Images

Classifications

• • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
  • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
  • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
  • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
  • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
  • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
  • A61K47/62—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being a protein, peptide or polyamino acid
  • A61K47/64—Drug-peptide, drug-protein or drug-polyamino acid conjugates, i.e. the modifying agent being a peptide, protein or polyamino acid which is covalently bonded or complexed to a therapeutically active agent
• • A61K47/48246—
• • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
  • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
  • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
  • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
  • A61P1/04—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for ulcers, gastritis or reflux esophagitis, e.g. antacids, inhibitors of acid secretion, mucosal protectants
• • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
  • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
  • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
  • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
  • A61P1/18—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for pancreatic disorders, e.g. pancreatic enzymes
• • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
  • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
  • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
  • A61P13/00—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
  • A61P13/12—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system of the kidneys
• • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
  • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
  • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
  • A61P21/00—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
  • A61P21/02—Muscle relaxants, e.g. for tetanus or cramps
• • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
  • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
  • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
  • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
• • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
  • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
  • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
  • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
  • A61P25/14—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
• • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
  • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
  • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
  • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
  • A61P25/18—Antipsychotics, i.e. neuroleptics; Drugs for mania or schizophrenia
• • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
  • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
  • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
  • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
  • A61P25/20—Hypnotics; Sedatives
• • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
  • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
  • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
  • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
  • A61P25/22—Anxiolytics
• • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
  • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
  • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
  • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
  • A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
• • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
  • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
  • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
  • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
• • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
  • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
  • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
  • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
• • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
  • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
  • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
  • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
  • A61P3/04—Anorexiants; Antiobesity agents
• • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
  • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
  • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
  • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
  • A61P3/06—Antihyperlipidemics
• • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
  • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
  • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
  • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
  • A61P3/08—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
  • A61P3/10—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
• • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
  • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
  • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
  • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
  • A61P3/12—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for electrolyte homeostasis
• • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
  • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
  • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
  • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
• • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
  • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
  • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
  • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
• • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
  • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
  • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
  • A61P7/00—Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
  • A61P7/10—Antioedematous agents; Diuretics
• • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
  • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
  • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
  • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
• • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
  • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
  • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
  • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
  • A61P9/04—Inotropic agents, i.e. stimulants of cardiac contraction; Drugs for heart failure
• • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
  • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
  • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
  • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
  • A61P9/10—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
• • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
  • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
  • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
  • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
  • A61P9/12—Antihypertensives

Definitions

• the invention relates to compounds including dimeric or multimeric peptide vectors and uses of such compounds.
• the brain is shielded against potentially toxic substances by the presence of two barrier systems: the blood-brain barrier (BBB) and the blood-cerebrospinal fluid barrier (BCSFB).
• BBB blood-brain barrier
• BCSFB blood-cerebrospinal fluid barrier
• the BBB is considered to be the major route for the uptake of serum ligands since its surface area is approximately 5000-fold greater than that of BCSFB.
• the brain endothelium, which constitutes the BBB represents the major obstacle for the use of potential drugs against many disorders of the CNS.
• only small lipophilic molecules may pass across the BBB, i.e., from circulating systemic blood to brain.
• Many drugs that have a larger size or higher hydrophobicity show promising results in animal studies for treating CNS disorders.
• peptide and protein therapeutics are generally excluded from transport from blood to brain, owing to the negligible permeability of the brain capillary endothelial wall to these drugs.
• the present invention features multimeric peptide vectors optionally conjugated to an agent (e.g., a therapeutic agent), and use of such compounds in treatment and diagnosis of disease.
• BBB blood-brain barrier
• the invention features a compound including the formula: A 1 -(X n -A m ) n where n is or is at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10; m is an integer from 2 to n+1; A 1 and each A m are, independently, a peptide vector, e.g., any described herein such as one that includes an amino acid sequence substantially identical to a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOS:1-105 and 107-117 or a functional fragment thereof; and each X n is, independently, a linker joined to the adjacent peptide vectors.
• the compound may include the formula: A 1 -X 1 -A 2
• the invention features a compound including the formula:
• a 1 , A 2 , each A q , each A r , and each A s are, independently, peptide vector, e.g., any described herein such as one that includes a sequence substantially identical to a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOS:1-105 and 107-117 or a functional fragment thereof;
• a 3 is a peptide vector including a sequence substantially identical to a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOS:1-105 and 107-117 or a functional fragment thereof or is absent;
• X, each X q , each X r , and each X s are, independently, linkers that join peptide vectors;
• m, n, and p are, independently, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10;
• q is an integer from 4 to m+3;
• r is an integer from m+4 to m+n+3; and
• s is an integer from m+n+
• Any of the above compounds may be conjugated to one or more agents (e.g., any described herein), through one or more linkers or through one or more peptide vectors.
• the invention features a compound of including the formula:
• a 1 , X, and A 2 are as described above and B is an agent and is conjugated to the linker X.
• the invention also features a compound including the formula:
• a 1 , X, and A 2 are as described above; B′ is an agent, B 2 and B 3 are, independently, agents or are absent, Y 1 and Y 2 are, independently, linkers joining A 1 to B 1 and A 2 to B 2 , respectively, where Y 2 is absent if B 2 is absent.
• the compound may include the formula:
• the invention features a compound including (a) at least two peptide vectors, where each peptide vector independently includes an amino acid sequence substantially identical to a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOS:1-105 and 107-117, where the peptide vectors are joined by a linker; and (b) an agent conjugated to at least one of the peptide vectors or to the linker.
• any of the above compounds may include at least one of the peptide vectors including an amino acid sequence at least 70%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or 100% identical to a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO:1-105 and 107-117 (e.g., Angiopep-1 (SEQ ID NO:67), Angiopep-2 (SEQ ID NO:97), cys-Angiopep-2 (SEQ ID NO:113), Angiopep-2-cys (SEQ ID NO:114), and reversed Angiopep-2 (SEQ ID NO:117)).
• SEQ ID NO:1-105 and 107-117 e.g., Angiopep-1 (SEQ ID NO:67), Angiopep-2 (SEQ ID NO:97), cys-Angiopep-2 (SEQ ID NO:113), Angiopep-2-cys (SEQ ID NO:114), and reversed Angiopep-2 (SEQ ID NO:117)
• the agent can be a therapeutic agent (e.g., any described herein, such as an agent selected from the group consisting of an anticancer agent, a therapeutic nucleic acid, a GLP-1 agonist, leptin or a leptin analog, neurotensin or a neurotensin analog, glial-derived neurotrophic factor (GDNF) or a GDNF analog, brain-derived neurotrophic factor (BDNF) or a BDNF analog), or an antibody.
• a therapeutic agent e.g., any described herein, such as an agent selected from the group consisting of an anticancer agent, a therapeutic nucleic acid, a GLP-1 agonist, leptin or a leptin analog, neurotensin or a neurotensin analog, glial-derived neurotrophic factor (GDNF) or a GDNF analog, brain-derived neurotrophic factor (BDNF) or a BDNF analog), or an antibody.
• GDNF glial-derived neurotroph
• the anticancer agent may be paclitaxel (Taxol), vinblastine, vincristine, etoposide, doxorubicin, cyclophosphamide, docetaxel (Taxotere®), melphalan, and chlorambucil, abarelix, aldesleukin, alemtuzumab, alitertinoin, allopurinol, altretamine, amifostine, anakinra, anastrozole, arsenic trioxide, asparaginase, azacitidine, BCG Live, bevacuzimab, bexarotene, bleomycin, bleomycin, bortezombi, bortezomib, busulfan, busulfan, calusterone, capecitabine, carboplatin, carmustine, celecoxib, cetuximab, cisplatin, cladribine, clofarabine, cytara
• the anticancer agent is paclitaxel, etoposide, or doxorubicin, or an analog thereof.
• the agent may be an RNAi agent (e.g., any RNAi agent described herein such as an RNAi agent is capable of silencing EGFR or VEGF expression).
• the agent may be a GLP-1 agonist (e.g., any described herein, such as exendin-4 (SEQ ID NO: 132), or an analog or fragment thereof having GLP-1 agonist activity, exendin-4 (SEQ ID NO: 132), [Lys 39 ]exendin-4 (SEQ ID NO: 134), or [Cys 32 ]exendin-4 (SEQ ID NO: 133)).
• the agent may be leptin or a leptin analog (e.g., any described herein, such as leptin or leptin analog is full-length human leptin, mature human leptin (amino acids 22-167 of the full length human leptin), or leptin 116-130 .
• the agent may be neurotensin or a neurotensin analog (e.g., any described herein, such as human neurotensin, human neurotensin(8-13), or pELYENKPRRPYIL-OH, where pE represents L-pyroglutamic acid).
• the agent may be GDNF, BDNF, or an analog thereof (e.g., a full length GDNF or BDNF sequence or a mature form of GDNF or BDNF or is human GDNF 78-211 ).
• the antibody may be a monoclonal antibody such as an antibody directed against the amyloid- ⁇ protein.
• the antibody may be selected from the group consisting of R1450 (Roche), bapineuzumab, solanezumab (LY2062430; Eli Lilly), BAN2401, PF-04360365 (Pfizer), and GSK933776A (GlaxoSmithKline).
• the compound has the structure shown in FIG. 9A , or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof (e.g., a TFA salt).
• the compounds of the invention can be used in the treatment of disease and conditions. Such methods are as follows.
• the invention also features a method of treating or treating prophylactically a subject having a cancer.
• the method includes administering to the patient a compound including an anticancer agent or a RNAi capable of inhibiting a gene whose expression is associated with or causes cancer (e.g., EGFR or VEGF).
• a compound including an anticancer agent or a RNAi capable of inhibiting a gene whose expression is associated with or causes cancer e.g., EGFR or VEGF.
• the cancer may be selected from the group consisting of brain cancer, hepatocellular carcinoma, breast cancer, cancers of the head and neck including various lymphomas such as mantle cell lymphoma, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, adenoma, squamous cell carcinoma, laryngeal carcinoma, cancers of the retina, cancers of the esophagus, multiple myeloma, ovarian cancer, uterine cancer, melanoma, colorectal cancer, bladder cancer, prostate cancer, lung cancer (including non-small cell lung carcinoma), pancreatic cancer, cervical cancer, head and neck cancer, skin cancers, nasopharyngeal carcinoma, liposarcoma, epithelial carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma, gallbladder adenocarcinoma, parotid adenocarcinoma, endometrial sarcoma, and multidrug resistant cancers.
• various lymphomas such as mantle cell lymphoma, non-
• the brain cancer may be selected from the group consisting of astrocytoma, pilocytic astrocytoma, dysembryoplastic neuroepithelial tumor, oligodendrogliomas, ependymoma, glioblastoma multiforme, mixed gliomas, oligoastrocytomas, medulloblastoma, retinoblastoma, neuroblastoma, germinoma, and teratoma.
• the invention also features a method of treating or treating prophylactically a subject having a metabolic disorder by administering a compound including GLP-1 agonist, leptin, a leptin analog, neurotensin, or a neurotensin analog in an amount sufficient to treat the disorder.
• the metabolic disorder may be diabetes (e.g., type I or type II diabetes), obesity, diabetes as a consequence of obesity, hyperglycemia, dyslipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, syndrome X, insulin resistance, impaired glucose tolerance (IGT), diabetic dyslipidemia, hyperlipidemia, a cardiovascular disease, or hypertension.
• the invention also features a method of reducing food intake by, or reducing body weight of, a subject by administering a compound including GLP-1 agonist, leptin, or a leptin analog to a subject in an amount sufficient to reduce food intake or reduce body weight.
• the subject may be overweight, obese, or bulimic.
• the invention also features a method of treating or treating prophylactically a disorder selected from the group consisting of anxiety, movement disorder, aggression, psychosis, seizures, panic attacks, hysteria, sleep disorders, Alzheimer's disease, and Parkinson's disease by administering a compound including a GLP-1 agonist to a subject in an amount sufficient to treat or prevent the disorder.
• a disorder selected from the group consisting of anxiety, movement disorder, aggression, psychosis, seizures, panic attacks, hysteria, sleep disorders, Alzheimer's disease, and Parkinson's disease by administering a compound including a GLP-1 agonist to a subject in an amount sufficient to treat or prevent the disorder.
• the invention also features a method of increasing neurogenesis in a subject by administering to the subject and effective amount of a compound including a GLP-1 agonist to the subject.
• the subject may be suffering from Parkinson's Disease, Alzheimer's Disease, Huntington's Disease, ALS, stroke, ADD, or a neuropsychiatric syndrome.
• the increase in neurogenesis may improve learning or enhances neuroprotection in the subject.
• the invention also features a method for converting liver stem/progenitor cells into functional pancreatic cells; preventing beta-cell deterioration and stimulation of beta-cell proliferation; treating obesity; suppressing appetite and inducing satiety; treating irritable bowel syndrome; reducing the morbidity and/or mortality associated with myocardial infarction and stroke; treating acute coronary syndrome characterized by an absence of Q-wave myocardial infarction; attenuating post-surgical catabolic changes; treating hibernating myocardium or diabetic cardiomyopathy; suppressing plasma blood levels of norepinepherine; increasing urinary sodium excretion, decreasing urinary potassium concentration; treating conditions or disorders associated with toxic hypervolemia, renal failure, congestive heart failure, nephrotic syndrome, cirrhosis, pulmonary edema, and hypertension; inducing an inotropic response and increasing cardiac contractility; treating polycystic ovary syndrome; treating respiratory distress; improving nutrition via a non-alimentary route, i.e.
• the invention also features a method of increasing GLP-1 receptor activity in a subject by administering a compound including a GLP-1 agonist to a subject in an amount sufficient to increase GLP-1 receptor activity.
• the invention also features a method of reducing body temperature of a subject, the method including administering a compound including neurotensin or a neurotensin analog in a sufficient amount to reduce body temperature.
• the subject may be suffering from or has suffered from cerebral ischemia, cardiac ischemia, or a nerve injury.
• the nerve injury may be a spinal cord injury.
• the invention also features a method of treating pain or prophylactically treating pain in a subject, the method including administering a compound of including neurotensin or a neurotensin analog in an amount sufficient to treat the pain.
• the pain may be an acute pain selected from the group consisting of mechanical pain, heat pain, cold pain, ischemic pain, and chemical-induced pain.
• the pain may be peripheral or central neuropathic pain, inflammatory pain, migraine-related pain, headache-related pain, irritable bowel syndrome-related pain, fibromyalgia-related pain, arthritic pain, skeletal pain, joint pain, gastrointestinal pain, muscle pain, angina pain, facial pain, pelvic pain, claudication, postoperative pain, post traumatic pain, tension-type headache, obstetric pain, gynecological pain, or chemotherapy-induced pain.
• the invention also features a method of treating or treating prophylactically a subject having a psychotic disorder (e.g., schizophrenia), the method including administering a compound including neurotensin or a neurotensin analog in an amount sufficient to treat the disorder.
• a psychotic disorder e.g., schizophrenia
• the invention also features a method of treating drug addiction or drug abuse in a subject, the method including administering to the subject a compound including neurotensin or a neurotensin analog in an amount sufficient to treat the addiction or abuse.
• the drug may be a psychostimulant (e.g., amphetamine, methamphetamine, 3,4-methylenedioxymethamphetamine, nicotine, cocaine, methylphenidate, and arecoline)
• the invention also features a method of treating or treating prophylactically a neurological disorder in a subject, the method including administering to the subject in an amount sufficient to treat or prevent the disorder (e.g., schizophrenia).
• the disorder e.g., schizophrenia
• the invention also features a method of treating or treating prophylactically a subject having a neurodegenerative disorder, the method including administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound including GDNF, BDNF, or an analog thereof.
• the neurodegenerative disorder may be selected from the group consisting of a polyglutamine expansion disorder, fragile X syndrome, fragile XE mental retardation, Friedreich's ataxia, myotonic dystrophy, spinocerebellar ataxia type 8, and spinocerebellar ataxia type 12, Alexander disease, Alper's disease, Alzheimer's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), ataxia telangiectasia, Batten disease ( Saintmeyer-Vogt-Sjogren-Batten disease), Canavan disease, Cockayne syndrome, corticobasal degeneration, Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease, ischemia stroke, Krabbe disease, Lewy body dementia, multiple sclerosis, multiple system atrophy, Parkinson's disease, Peliza
• the polyglutamine repeat disease is Huntington's disease (HD), dentatorubropallidoluysian atrophy, Kennedy's disease (also referred to as spinobulbar muscular atrophy), or a spinocerebellar ataxia selected from the group consisting of type 1, type 2, type 3 (Machado-Joseph disease), type 6, type 7, and type 17).
• HD Huntington's disease
• dentatorubropallidoluysian atrophy also referred to as spinobulbar muscular atrophy
• spinocerebellar ataxia selected from the group consisting of type 1, type 2, type 3 (Machado-Joseph disease), type 6, type 7, and type 17).
• the invention also features a method of treating a subject having a neuronal damage, the method including administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound including GDNF, BDNF, or an analog thereof.
• the neuronal damage may be caused by an ischemic stroke, a hemorrhagic stroke, or a spinal cord injury.
• the invention also features a method of treating a subject having depression or schizophrenia, the method including administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound including GDNF, BDNF, or an analog thereof.
• the invention also features a method of treating a subject having a disease related to the amyloid- ⁇ protein (e.g., Alzheimer's disease or cerebral amyloid angiopathy) by administering to said patient an effective amount of a therapeutic antibody (e.g., an antibody that specifically binds amyloid- ⁇ or a fragment thereof).
• a disease related to the amyloid- ⁇ protein e.g., Alzheimer's disease or cerebral amyloid angiopathy
• a therapeutic antibody e.g., an antibody that specifically binds amyloid- ⁇ or a fragment thereof.
• the subject may be a human.
• the compound is administered at a lower (e.g., less than 95%, 75%, 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 25%, 10%, 5%, or 1%) equivalent dosage as compared to the recommended dosage of the unconjugated agent.
• the compound is administered at a higher (1.5 ⁇ , 2 ⁇ , 2.5 ⁇ , 3.0 ⁇ , 5 ⁇ , 8 ⁇ , 10 ⁇ , 15 ⁇ , 20 ⁇ , 25 ⁇ ) equivalent dosage than a dosage recommended for the unconjugated agent.
• the peptide vector may be a polypeptide substantially identical to any of the sequences set Table 1, or a fragment thereof.
• the peptide vector has a sequence of Angiopep-1 (SEQ ID NO:67), Angiopep-2 (SEQ ID NO:97), Angiopep-3 (SEQ ID NO:107), Angiopep-4a (SEQ ID NO:108), Angiopep-4b (SEQ ID NO:109), Angiopep-5 (SEQ ID NO:110), Angiopep-6 (SEQ ID NO:111), Angiopep-7 (SEQ ID NO:112) or reversed Angiopep-2 (SEQ ID NO:117)).
• the peptide vector or compound of the invention may be efficiently transported into a particular cell type (e.g., any one, two, three, four, or five of liver, lung, kidney, spleen, and muscle) or may cross the mammalian BBB efficiently (e.g., Angiopep-1, -2, -3, -4a, -4b, -5, and -6).
• a particular cell type e.g., any one, two, three, four, or five of liver, lung, kidney, spleen, and muscle
• the peptide vector or compound is able to enter a particular cell type (e.g., any one, two, three, four, or five of liver, lung, kidney, spleen, and muscle) but does not cross the BBB efficiently (e.g., a conjugate including Angiopep-7).
• the peptide vector may be of any length, for example, at least 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 25, 35, 50, 75, 100, 200, or 500 amino acids, or any range between these numbers. In certain embodiments, the peptide vector is 10 to 50 amino acids in length.
• the polypeptide may be produced by recombinant genetic technology or chemical synthesis.
• Polypeptides Nos. 107, 109, and 110 include the sequences of SEQ ID NOS: 97, 109, and 110, respectively, and are acetylated at the N-terminus.
• the peptide vector may include an amino acid sequence having the formula: X1-X2-X3-X4-X5-X6-X7-X8-X9-X10-X11-X12-X13-X14-X15-X16-X17-X18-X19 where each of X1-X19 (e.g., X1-X6, X8, X9, X11-X14, and X16-X19) is, independently, any amino acid (e.g., a naturally occurring amino acid such as Ala, Arg, Asn, Asp, Cys, Gln, Glu, Gly, His, Ile, Leu, Lys, Met, Phe, Pro, Ser, Thr, Trp, Tyr, and Val) or absent and at least one (e.g., 2 or 3) of X1, X10, and X15 is arginine.
• a naturally occurring amino acid such as Ala, Arg, Asn, Asp, Cys, Gln,
• X7 is Ser or Cys; or X10 and X15 each are independently Arg or Lys.
• the residues from X1 through X19, inclusive are substantially identical to any of the amino acid sequences of any one of SEQ ID NOS:1-105 and 107-117 (e.g., Angiopep-1, Angiopep-2, Angiopep-3, Angiopep-4a, Angiopep-4b, Angiopep-5, Angiopep-6, Angiopep-7, and reversed Angiopep-2).
• at least one (e.g., 2, 3, 4, or 5) of the amino acids X1-X19 is Arg.
• the polypeptide has one or more additional cysteine residues at the N-terminal of the polypeptide, the C-terminal of the polypeptide, or both.
• the peptide vector or a peptide therapeutic described herein is modified (e.g., as described herein).
• the peptide or polypeptide may be amidated, acetylated, or both. Such modifications may be at the amino or carboxy terminus of the polypeptide.
• the peptide or polypeptide may also include peptidomimetics (e.g., those described herein) of any of the polypeptides described herein.
• the peptide vector or a peptide therapeutic described herein has an amino acid sequence described herein with at least one amino acid substitution (e.g., 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12 substitutions), insertion, or deletion or is substantially identical to an amino acid sequence described herein.
• the peptide or polypeptide may contain, for example, 1 to 12, 1 to 10, 1 to 5, or 1 to 3 amino acid substitutions, for example, 1 to 10 (e.g., to 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2) amino acid substitutions.
• the amino acid substitution(s) may be conservative or non-conservative.
• the peptide vector may have an arginine at one, two, or three of the positions corresponding to positions 1, 10, and 15 of the amino acid sequence of any of SEQ ID NO:1, Angiopep-1, Angiopep-2, Angiopep-3, Angiopep-4a, Angiopep-4b, Angiopep-5, Angiopep-6, Angiopep-7, and reversed Angiopep-2.
• the BDNF, GDNF, or related molecule may have a cysteine or lysine substitution or addition at any position (e.g., a lysine substitution at the N- or C-terminal position).
• the compound may specifically exclude a polypeptide including or consisting of any of SEQ ID NOS:1-105 and 107-117 (e.g., Angiopep-1, Angiopep-2, Angiopep-3, Angiopep-4a, Angiopep-4b, Angiopep-5, Angiopep-6, Angiopep-7, and reversed Angiopep-2).
• the polypeptides and compounds of the invention exclude the polypeptides of SEQ ID NOs:102, 103, 104, and 105.
• fragment is meant a portion of a full-length amino acid or nucleic acid sequence (e.g., any sequence described herein). Fragments may include at least 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 75, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 200, 500, 1000, 1500, 2000, or 5000 amino acids or nucleic acids of the full length sequence. A fragment may retain at least one of the biological activities of the full length protein.
• substantially identical is meant a polypeptide or nucleic acid exhibiting at least 35%, 40%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or even 99% identity to a reference amino acid or nucleic acid sequence.
• the length of comparison sequences will generally be at least 4 (e.g., at least 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 50, or 100) amino acids.
• the length of comparison sequences will generally be at least 60 nucleotides, preferably at least 90 nucleotides, and more preferably at least 120 nucleotides, or full length.
• gaps may be found between the amino acids of sequences that are identical or similar to amino acids of the original polypeptide.
• the gaps may include no amino acids, one or more amino acids that are not identical or similar to the original polypeptide.
• Percent identity may be determined, for example, with n algorithm GAP, BESTFIT, or FASTA in the Wisconsin Genetics Software Package Release 7.0, using default gap weights.
• peptide vector is meant a compound or molecule such as a polypeptide or a peptidomimetic that can be transported into a particular cell type (e.g., liver, lungs, kidney, spleen, or muscle) or across the BBB.
• the vector may be attached to (covalently or not) or conjugated to an agent and thereby may be able to transport the agent into a particular cell type or across the BBB.
• the vector may bind to receptors present on cancer cells or brain endothelial cells and thereby be transported into the cancer cell or across the BBB by transcytosis.
• the vector may be a molecule for which high levels of transendothelial transport may be obtained, without affecting the cell or BBB integrity.
• the vector may be a polypeptide or a peptidomimetic and may be naturally occurring or produced by chemical synthesis or recombinant genetic technology.
• agent any compound having at least one biological activity. Agents include both diagnostic and therapeutic agents.
• therapeutic agent an agent that is capable of being used in the treatment or prophylactic treatment of a disease or condition.
• RNAi agent any agent or compound that exerts a gene silencing effect by way of an RNA interference pathway.
• RNAi agents include any nucleic acid molecules that are capable of mediating sequence-specific RNAi, for example, a short interfering RNA (siRNA), double-stranded RNA (dsRNA), microRNA (miRNA), short hairpin RNA (shRNA), short interfering oligonucleotide, short interfering nucleic acid, short interfering modified oligonucleotide, chemically-modified siRNA, and post-transcriptional gene silencing RNA (ptgsRNA).
• siRNA short interfering RNA
• dsRNA double-stranded RNA
• miRNA microRNA
• shRNA short hairpin RNA
• ptgsRNA post-transcriptional gene silencing RNA
• treating a disease, disorder, or condition in a subject is meant reducing at least one symptom of the disease, disorder, or condition by administrating a therapeutic agent to the subject.
• treating prophylactically a disease, disorder, or condition in a subject is meant reducing the frequency of occurrence or severity of (e.g., preventing) a disease, disorder or condition by administering to the subject a therapeutic agent to the subject prior to the appearance of a disease symptom or symptoms.
• subject is meant a human or non-human animal (e.g., a mammal).
• equivalent dosage is meant the amount of a compound of the invention required to achieve the same molar amount of agent in the compound of the invention, as compared to the unconjugated molecule.
• a polypeptide which is “efficiently transported across the BBB” is meant a polypeptide that is able to cross the BBB at least as efficiently as Angiopep-6 (i.e., greater than 38.5% that of Angiopep-1 (250 nM) in the in situ brain perfusion assay described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/807,597, filed May 29, 2007, hereby incorporated by reference). Accordingly, a polypeptide which is “not efficiently transported across the BBB” is transported to the brain at lower levels (e.g., transported less efficiently than Angiopep-6).
• polypeptide or compound which is “efficiently transported to a particular cell type” is meant that the polypeptide or compound is able to accumulate (e.g., either due to increased transport into the cell, decreased efflux from the cell, or a combination thereof) in that cell type to at least a 10% (e.g., 25%, 50%, 100%, 200%, 500%, 1,000%, 5,000%, or 10,000%) greater extent than either a control substance, or, in the case of a conjugate, as compared to the unconjugated agent.
• a 10% e.g., 25%, 50%, 100%, 200%, 500%, 1,000%, 5,000%, or 10,000% greater extent than either a control substance, or, in the case of a conjugate, as compared to the unconjugated agent.
• FIG. 1 is a set of graphs showing the TMEA-(Angiopep-2) 2 conjugate before (Chromatogram 1) and after (Chromatogram 2) purification.
• FIG. 2 is a graph showing purification of the TMEA-(Angiopep-2) 2 conjugate.
• FIG. 3 is a set of graphs showing the SATP-Angiopep-2-Angiopep-2 conjugate before (Chromatogram 4) and after (Chromatogram 5) purification.
• FIG. 4 is a graph showing purification of the SATP-Angiopep-2-Angiopep-2 conjugate.
• FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing formation of the Angiopep-1 (SEQ ID NO: 67)dimmer formed through disulfide bonds.
• FIG. 6 is a graph showing apparent volume of parenchyma distribution measured by an in situ brain perfusion assay for the Angiopep-1 dimer and Angiopep-2.
• FIG. 7 is a graph showing parenchymal uptake (volume of parenchyma transformed to pmol uptake) using an in situ brain perfusion assay for the Angiopep-1 dimer and Angiopep-2.
• FIG. 8 is a graph showing uptake of Angiopep-2 monomers (synthetic and recombinant) as well as Angiopep-2 dimers and trimers in lean mice at 50 nM concentration using the in situ brain perfusion assay. A comparison using recombinant Angiopep-2 in diet-induced obese (DIO) mice is also shown.
• FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram showing the structure of an Exendin-4-Angiopep-2 dimmer conjugate (Ex4(Lys39 (MHA))-AN2-AN2).
• the compound has the structure HGEGTFTSDLSKQMEEEAVRLFIEWLKNGGPSSGAPPPK (SEQ ID NO: 134)-(MHA)-TFFYGGSRGKRNNFKTEEYC-(MPA)-TFFYGGSRGKRNNFKTEEY (SEQ ID NO: 178)-OH, where MHA is maleimido hexanoic acid and MPA is maleimido propionic acid.
• FIG. 9B is a schematic structure of an Exendin-4-scramble-Angiopep-2 (Ex4(Cys32)-ANS4 (N-Term) or Exen-S4) that was used a control.
• This compound has the structure HGEGTFTSDLSKQMEEEAVRLFIEWLKNGGPCSGAPPPS-(MHA)-GYKGERYRGFKETNFNTES-OH (SEQ ID NO: 123), where MHA is maleimido hexanoic acid.
• FIG. 10 is a graph showing the ability of, in order from left to right, Exendin-4, Exendin-4-Angiopep-2 conjugates C3, C6, and C11 (where the number indicates the length of the carbon chain connecting the Angiopep-2 and Exendin-4, as described in U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/105,618, filed Oct. 15, 2008), Exen-S4, and Exendin-4 when conjugated to a dimeric form of Angiopep-2, to cross the BBB.
• FIG. 11 is a graph showing the ability of Exendin-4 and Exen-An2-An2 to reduce glycemia in mice as compared to a control.
• multimeric forms of peptide vectors that are able to cross the blood-brain barrier (BBB) or are able to enter particular cell types (e.g., liver, spleen, kidney, muscle, ovary) with enhanced efficiency.
• BBB blood-brain barrier
• multimeric forms when conjugated to a therapeutic agent, can transport the agent across the BBB or into particular cells.
• the multimeric (e.g., dimeric) form of the peptide vector is capable of crossing the BBB or entering particular cell types more efficiently, and in certain cases as described herein, far more efficiently, than the monomeric form of the peptide vector.
• This increased efficiency in transport may allow for lower dosages of the therapeutic as compared either to the unconjugated agent or to the agent conjugated to a monomeric form of the peptide vector.
• the compounds of the invention may administered in higher dosages than either the unconjugated agent or the agent conjugated to a monomeric form of the peptide vector, as the greater targeting efficiency can reduce side effects.
• Compounds including such multimers and their use in treatment of disease are described in detail below.
• the compounds of the invention feature a multimeric (e.g., dimeric) form of the peptide vectors described herein.
• the peptide vectors are joined by a chemical bond either directly (e.g., a covalent bond such as a disulfide or a peptide bond) or indirectly (e.g., through a linker such as those described herein).
• a chemical bond either directly (e.g., a covalent bond such as a disulfide or a peptide bond) or indirectly (e.g., through a linker such as those described herein).
• Exemplary multimeric peptides are described below.
• the peptide vectors described herein are joined by a chemical linker.
• chemical linkers are known in the art and are described herein. Any appropriate linker can be used to produce a multimer of the invention. Exemplary chemical linkers include those described below.
• the multimeric peptide vector is a dimer having the formula: A 1 -X-A 2 where A 1 and A 2 are each, independently, a peptide vector (e.g., any peptide vector described herein) and X is a linker.
• the linker may be any linker described herein.
• the linker contains a maleimido moiety and binds to a cysteine present in the peptide vector (e.g., a peptide vector to which an N-terminal or C-terminal cysteine residue has been added).
• the multimeric peptide vector has or includes a formula selected from the group consisting of:
• a 1 , A 2 , A 3 , A m , and each A p are, independently, a peptide vector (e.g., any peptide vector described herein);
• X, X 1 , and each X p are, independently, a linker (e.g., any linker described herein) that joins together two peptide vectors;
• n is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10;
• m is n+2; and
• p is an integer from 2 to n+1.
• n is 1, and the compound has the formula:
• a 1 , A 2 , each A q , each A r , and each A s are, independently, peptide vectors (e.g., any of those described herein);
• a 3 is a peptide vector or is absent;
• X, each X q , each X r , and each X s are, independently, linkers that join peptide vectors;
• m, n, and p are each, independently, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10;
• q is an integer from 4 to m+3;
• r is an integer from m+4 to m+n+3; and
• s is an integer from m+n+4 to m+n+p+3.
• the multimeric peptide is in the form of a fusion protein.
• the fusion protein may contain 2, 3, 4, 5, or more peptide vectors, either joined directly by a peptide bond, or through peptide linkers.
• fusion protein dimers are described by the formula: A 1 -X-A 2 where A 1 and A 2 are, independently, a peptide vector (e.g., an amino acid sequence substantially identical to a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO:1-105 and 107-117, or a functional fragment thereof) and X is either (a) a peptide bond that joins A 1 and A 2 or (b) one or more amino acids joined to A 1 and A 2 by peptide bonds.
• the peptide is a single amino acid (e.g., a naturally occurring amino acid), a flexible linker, a rigid linker, or an a-helical linker.
• exemplary peptide linkers that can be used in the invention are described in the section entitled “peptide linkers” below.
• a 1 and A 2 are the same peptide vector.
• Fusion protein multimers can be described by the formula: A 1 -(X n -A m ) n where n is or is at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10; m is an integer from 2 to n+1; A 1 and each A m are, independently, a peptide vector (e.g., an amino acid sequence substantially identical to a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO:1-105 and 107-117, or a functional fragment thereof); and each X n is, independently, either (a) a peptide bond that joins A 1 and A 2 or (b) one or more amino acids joined to the adjacent peptide vector (A 1 or A n ) by peptide bonds.
• n is or is at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10
• m is an integer from 2 to n+1
• a 1 and each A m are, independently, a peptide vector (e.g., an amino acid sequence substantially identical to a sequence selected from the group consist
• the peptide vectors forming the multimer may each be fewer than 100, 50, 40, 35, 30, 25, 24, 23, 22, 21, 20, 19, 18, 17, 16, or 15 amino acids in length.
• the fusion protein may be fewer than 1,000, 500, 250, 150, 100, 90, 80, 75, 70, 65, 60, 55, 50, 45, 40, or 35 amino acids in length.
• the peptide vectors may be bound to each other or to a therapeutic agent either directly (e.g., through a covalent bond such as a peptide bond) or may be bound through a linker.
• Linkers include chemical linking agents (e.g., cleavable linkers) and peptides. Any of the linkers described below may be used in the compounds of the invention.
• the linker is a chemical linking agent.
• the peptide vector may be conjugated through sulfhydryl groups, amino groups (amines), or any appropriate reactive group.
• Homobifunctional and heterobifunctional cross-linkers are available from many commercial sources. Sites available for cross-linking may be found on the peptides and agents described herein.
• the cross-linker may comprise a flexible arm, e.g., 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, or 15 carbon atoms.
• Exemplary cross-linkers include BS 3 ([Bis(sulfosuccinimidyl)suberate]; BS 3 is a homobifunctional N-hydroxysuccinimide ester that targets accessible primary amines), NHS/EDC (N-hydroxysuccinimide and 1-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide; NHS/EDC allows for the conjugation of primary amine groups with carboxyl groups), sulfo-EMCS ([N- ⁇ -maleimidocaproic acid]hydrazide; sulfo-EMCS are heterobifunctional reactive groups (maleimide and NHS-ester) that are reactive toward sulfhydryl and amino groups), hydrazide (most proteins contain exposed carbohydrates and hydrazide is a useful reagent for linking carboxyl groups to primary amines), SATA (N-succinimidyl-S-acetylthioacetate; SATA is reactive towards amine
• active carboxyl groups e.g., esters
• Particular agents include N-hydroxysuccinimide (NHS), N-hydroxy-sulfosuccinimide (sulfo-NHS), maleimide-benzoyl-succinimide (MBS), gamma-maleimido-butyryloxy succinimide ester (GMBS), maleimido propionic acid (MPA), maleimido hexanoic acid (MHA), and maleimido undecanoic acid (MUA).
• NHS N-hydroxysuccinimide
• sulfo-NHS N-hydroxy-sulfosuccinimide
• MBS maleimide-benzoyl-succinimide
• GMBS gamma-maleimido-
• Primary amines are the principal targets for NHS esters. Accessible ⁇ -amine groups present on the N-termini of proteins and the 8-amine of lysine react with NHS esters.
• compounds of the invention can include a linker having a NHS ester conjugated to an N-terminal amino of a peptide or to an ⁇ -amine of lysine. An amide bond is formed when the NHS ester conjugation reaction reacts with primary amines releasing N-hydroxysuccinimide.
• succinimide containing reactive groups are herein referred to as succinimidyl groups.
• the functional group on the protein will be a thiol group and the chemically reactive group will be a maleimido-containing group such as gamma-maleimide-butrylamide (GMBA or MPA).
• GMBA gamma-maleimide-butrylamide
• maleido groups are referred to herein as maleido groups.
• the maleimido group is most selective for sulfhydryl groups on peptides when the pH of the reaction mixture is 6.5-7.4.
• the rate of reaction of maleimido groups with sulfhydryls e.g., thiol groups on proteins such as serum albumin or IgG
• a stable thioether linkage between the maleimido group and the sulfhydryl can be formed.
• a compound of the invention can include a linker having a maleimido group conjugated to a sulfhydryl group of a peptide vector or of an agent.
• Amine-to-amine linkers include NHS esters and imidoesters.
• exemplary NHS esters are DSG (disuccinimidyl glutarate), DSS (disuccinimidyl suberate), BS 3 (bis[sulfosuccinimidyl]suberate), TSAT (tris-succinimidyl aminotriacetate), variants of bis-succinimide ester-activated compounds that include a polyethylene glycol spacer such as BS(PEG) n , where n is 1-20 (e.g., BS(PEG) 5 and BS(PEG) 9 ), DSP (Dithiobis[succinimidyl propionate]), DTSSP (3,3′-dithiobis[sulfosuccinimidylpropionate]), DST (disuccinimidyl tartarate), BSOCOES (bis[2-(succinimidooxycarbonyloxy)ethy
• Imidoesters include DMA (dimethyl adipimidate.2 HCl), DMP (dimethyl pimelimidate.2HCl), DMS (dimethyl suberimidate.2HCl), and DTBP (dimethyl 3,3′-dithiobispropionimidate.2HCl).
• Other amine-to-amine linkers include DFDNB (1,5-difluoro-2,4-dinitrobenzene) and THPP ( ⁇ -[tris(hydroxymethyl)phosphino]propionic acid (betaine)).
• the linker may be a sulfhydryl-to-sulfhydry linker.
• Such linkers include maleimides and pyridyldithiols.
• Exemplary maleimides include BMOE (bis-maleimidoethane), BMB (1,4-bismaleimidobutane), BMH (bismaleimidohexane), TMEA (tris[2-maleimidoethyl]amine), BM(PEG)2 1,8-bis-maleimidodiethyleneglycol) or BM(PEG) n , where n is 1 to 20 (e.g., 2 or 3), BMDB (1,4 bismaleimidyl-2,3-dihydroxybutane), and DTME (dithio-bismaleimidoethane).
• Exemplary pyridyldithiols include DPDPB (1,4-di-[3′-(2′-pyridyldithio)-propionamido]butane).
• Other sulfhydryl linkers include HBVS (1,6-hexane-bis-vinylsulfone).
• the linker may be an amine-to-sulfhydryl linker, which includes NHS ester/maliemide compounds.
• these compounds are AMAS (N-( ⁇ -maleimidoacetoxy)succinimide ester), BMPS(N-[ ⁇ -maleimidopropyloxy]succinimide ester), GMBS (N-[ ⁇ -maleimidobutyryloxy]succinimide ester), sulfo-GMBS (N-[ ⁇ -maleimidobutyryloxy]sulfosuccinimide ester), MBS (m-maleimidobenzoyl-N-hydroxysuccinimide ester), sulfo-MBS (m-maleimidobenzoyl-N-hydroxysulfosuccinimide ester), SMCC (succinimidyl 4-[N-maleimidomethyl]cyclohexane-1-carboxylate), sulfo-SMCC (Sul
• the linker is an amino-to-nonselective linker.
• linkers include NHS ester/aryl azide and NHS ester/diazirine linkers.
• NHS ester/aryl azide linkers include NHS-ASA (N-hydroxysuccinimidyl-4-azidosalicylic acid), ANB-NOS(N-5-azido-2-nitrobenzoyloxysuccinimide), sulfo-HSAB (N-hydroxysulfosuccinimidyl-4-azidobenzoate), sulfo-NHS-LC-ASA (sulfosuccinimidyl[4-azidosalicylamido]hexanoate), SANPAH (N-succinimidyl-6-(4′-azido-2′-nitrophenylamino)hexanoate), sulfo-SANPAH (N-sulfo-SANPAH (N-sulfosuccinimi
• NHS ester/diazirine linkers include SDA (succinimidyl 4,4′-azipentanoate), LC-SDA (succinimidyl 6-(4,4′-azipentanamido)hexanoate), SDAD (succinimidyl 2-([4,4′-azipentanamido]ethyl)-1,3′-dithioproprionate), sulfo-SDA (sulfosuccinimidyl 4,4′-azipentanoate), sulfo-LC-SDA (sulfosuccinimidyl 6-(4,4′-azipentanamido)hexanoate), and sulfo-SDAD (sulfosuccinimidyl 2-([4,4′-azipentanamido]ethyl)-1,3′-dithioproprionate).
• Exemplary amine-to-carboxyl linkers include carbodiimide compounds (e.g., DCC(N,N-dicyclohexylcarbodimide) and EDC (1-ethyl-3-[3-dimethylaminopropyl]carbodiimide)).
• Exemplary sulfhydryl-to-nonselective linkers include pyridyldithiol/aryl azide compounds (e.g., APDP((N-[4-(p-azidosalicylamido)butyl]-3′-(2′-pyridyldithio)propionamide)).
• Exemplary sulfhydryl-to-carbohydrate linkers include maleimide/hydrazide compounds (e.g., BMPH(N-[ ⁇ -maleimidopropionic acid]hydrazide), EMCH ([N- ⁇ -maleimidocaproic acid]hydrazide), MPBH 4-(4-N-maleimidophenyl)butyric acid hydrazide), and KMUH(N-[ ⁇ -maleimidoundecanoic acid]hydrazide)) and pyridyldithiol/hydrazide compounds (e.g., PDPH (3-(2-pyridyldithio)propionyl hydrazide)).
• maleimide/hydrazide compounds e.g., BMPH(N-[ ⁇ -maleimidopropionic acid]hydrazide), EMCH ([N- ⁇ -maleimidocaproic acid]hydrazide), MPBH 4-(4-N-
• Exemplary carbohydrate-to-nonselective linkers include hydrazide/aryl azide compounds (e.g., ABH (p-azidobenzoyl hydrazide)).
• Exemplary hydroxyl-to-sulfhydryl linkers include isocyanate/maleimide compounds (e.g., (N-[p-maleimidophenyl]isocyanate)).
• Exemplary amine-to-DNA linkers include NHS ester/psoralen compounds (e.g., SPB (succinimidyl-[4-(psoralen-8-yloxy)]-butyrate)).
• the linker is a trifunctional, tetrafunctional, or greater linking agent.
• exemplary trifunctional linkers include TMEA, THPP, TSAT, LC-TSAT (tris-succinimidyl (6-aminocaproyl)aminotriacetate), tris-succinimidyl-1,3,5-benzenetricarboxylate, MDSI (maleimido-3,5-disuccinimidyl isophthalate), SDMB (succinimidyl-3,5-dimaleimidophenyl benzoate, Mal-4 (tetrakis-(3-maleimidopropyl)pentaerythritol, NHS-4 (tetrakis-(N-succinimidylcarboxypropyl)pentaerythritol)).
• TMEA has the structure:
• TMEA through its maleimide groups, can react with sulfhydryl groups (e.g., through cysteine amino acid side chains).
• THPP has the structure:
• hydroxyl groups and carboxy group of THPP can react with primary or secondary amines.
• Linkers are also described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,680,338 having the formula Y ⁇ C ⁇ N-Q-A-C(O)—Z, where Q is a homoaromatic or heteroaromatic ring system; A is a single bond or an unsubstituted or substituted divalent C 1-30 bridging group, Y is O or S; and Z is Cl, Br, I, N 3 , N-succinimidyloxy, imidazolyl, 1-benzotriazolyloxy, OAr where Ar is an electron-deficient activating aryl group, or OC(O)R where R is -A-Q-N ⁇ C ⁇ Y or C 4 -20 tertiary-alkyl.
• R 1 is H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 6-12 aryl or aralkyl or these coupled with a divalent organic —O—, —S—, or
• R′ is C 1-6 alkyl, linking moiety;
• R 2 is H, C 1-12 alkyl, C 6-12 aryl, or C 6-12 aralkyl, R 3 is
• R 4 is a pendant reactive group capable of linking R 3 to a peptide vector or to an agent.
• the linker includes at least one amino acid (e.g., a peptide of at least 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, 40, or 50 amino acids).
• the linker is a single amino acid (e.g., any naturally occurring amino acid such as Cys).
• a glycine-rich peptide such as a peptide having the sequence [Gly-Gly-Gly-Gly-Ser] n (SEQ ID NO: 124) where n is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 is used, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,271,149.
• a serine-rich peptide linker is used, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,525,491.
• Serine rich peptide linkers include those of the formula [X-X-X-X-Gly] y (SEQ ID NO: 125) where up to two of the X are Thr, and the remaining X are Ser, and y is 1 to 5 (e.g., Ser-Ser-Ser-Ser-Gly, (SEQ ID NO: 126) where y is greater than 1).
• the linker is a single amino acid (e.g., any amino acid, such as Gly or Cys).
• Amino acid linkers may be selected for flexibility (e.g., flexible or rigid) or may be selected on the basis of charge (e.g., positive, negative, or neutral).
• Flexible linkers typically include those with Gly resides (e.g., [Gly-Gly-Gly-Gly-Ser] n (SEQ ID NO : 124) where n is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6).
• linkers include rigid linkers (e.g., PAPAP (SEQ ID NO: 127) and (PT) n P (SEQ ID NO : 128), where n is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7) and ⁇ -helical linkers (e.g., A(EAAAK) n A (SEQ ID NO : 129), where n is 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5).
• rigid linkers e.g., PAPAP (SEQ ID NO: 127) and (PT) n P (SEQ ID NO : 128), where n is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7)
• ⁇ -helical linkers e.g., A(EAAAK) n A (SEQ ID NO : 129), where n is 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5).
• linkers are succinic acid, Lys, Glu, and Asp, or a dipeptide such as Gly-Lys.
• the linker is succinic acid
• one carboxyl group thereof may form an amide bond with an amino group of the amino acid residue
• the other carboxyl group thereof may, for example, form an amide bond with an amino group of the peptide or substituent.
• the linker is Lys, Glu, or Asp
• the carboxyl group thereof may form an amide bond with an amino group of the amino acid residue
• the amino group thereof may, for example, form an amide bond with a carboxyl group of the substituent.
• a further linker may be inserted between the ⁇ -amino group of Lys and the substituent.
• the further linker is succinic acid, which can form an amide bond with the ⁇ -amino group of Lys and with an amino group present in the substituent.
• the further linker is Glu or Asp (e.g., which forms an amide bond with the ⁇ -amino group of Lys and another amide bond with a carboxyl group present in the substituent), that is, the substituent is a N ⁇ -acylated lysine residue.
• the peptide linker is a branched polypeptide.
• exemplary branched peptide linkers are described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,759,509. Such linkers includes those of the formula:
• each X 1 is of the formula —CO—Y—Z m -G n ; and where Y, Z, Q, E, G, m, d, p, a, b, and n are as defined above; or each X 1 is of the formula:
• each X 2 is of the formula —CO—Y—Z m -G n ; and where Y, Z, G, Q, E, m, d, p, a, b, and n are as defined above; or each X 2 is of the formula:
• each X 3 is of the formula —CO—Y—Z m -G n ; and wherein Y, Z, G, Q, E, m, d, p, a, b, and n are as defined above; or each X 3 is of the formula
• each X 4 is of the formula —CO—Y—Z m -G n ; and where Y, Z, G, Q, E, m, d, p, a, b, and n are as defined above.
• the branched linker may employ an intermediate self-immolative spacer moiety (G), which covalently links together the agent or peptide vector and the branched peptide linker.
• G self-immolative spacer moiety
• a self-immolative spacer can be a bifunctional chemical moiety capable of covalently linking together two chemical moieties and releasing one of said spaced chemical moieties from the tripartate molecule by means of enzymatic cleavage (e.g., any appropriate linker described herein.
• G is a self-immolative spacer moiety which spaces and covalently links together the agent or peptide vector and the peptide linker, where the spacer is linked to the peptide vector or agent via the T moiety (as used in the following formulas “T” represents a nucleophilic atom which is already contained in the agent or peptide vector), and which may be represented by
• T is O, N or S
• R 1 is C 1-5 alkyl
• T is O, N, or S, and R 2 is H or C 1-5 alkyl
• T is O, N or S;
• T is O, N, or S.
• Preferred Gs include PABC (p-aminobenzyl-carbamoyl), GABA ( ⁇ -aminobutyric acid), ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethyl GABA, and ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethyl GABA.
• the thiol acceptor “A” is linked to a peptide vector or agent by a sulfur atom derived from the peptide vector or agent.
• the thiol acceptor can be, for example, an ⁇ -substituted acetyl group. Such a group has the formula:
• Y is a leaving group such as Cl, Br, I, mesylate, tosylate, and the like.
• the thiol acceptor is an alpha-substituted acetyl group, the thiol adduct after linkage to the ligand forms the bond —S—CH 2 —.
• the thiol acceptor is a Michael Addition acceptor.
• a representative Michael Addition acceptor of this invention has the formula
• Michael Addition acceptor After linkage the thiol group of the ligand, the Michael Addition acceptor becomes a Michael Addition adduct, e.g.,
• the bridging group “W” is a bifunctional chemical moiety capable of covalently linking together two spaced chemical moieties into a stable tripartate molecule. Examples of bridging groups are described in S. S. Wong, Chemistry of Protein Conjugation and Crosslinking . CRC Press, Florida, (1991); and G. E. Means and R. E. Feeney, Bioconjugate Chemistry , vol. 1, pp. 2-12, (1990), the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. W can covalently link the thiol acceptor to a keto moiety.
• An exemplary a bridging group has the formula —(CH 2 ) f —(Z) g —(CH 2 ) h —, where f is 0 to 10; h is 0 to 10; g is 0 or 1, provided that when g is 0, then f+h is 1 to 10; Z is S, O, NH, SO 2 , phenyl, naphthyl, a polyethylene glycol, a cycloaliphatic hydrocarbon ring containing 3 to 10 carbon atoms, or a heteroaromatic hydrocarbon ring containing 3 to 6 carbon atoms and 1 or 2 heteroatoms selected from O, N, or S.
• Preferred cycloaliphatic moieties include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and the like.
• Preferred heteroaromatic moieties include pyridyl, polyethlene glycol (1-20 repeating units), furanyl, pyranyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl, oxazinyl, pyrrolyl, thiazolyl, morpholinyl, and the like.
• f+h is an integer of 2 to 6 (e.g., 2 to 4 such as 2).
• f is 0, 1 or 2; and that h is 0, 1 or 2.
• Preferred bridging groups coupled to thiol acceptors are shown in the Pierce Catalog, pp. E-12, E-13, E-14, E-15, E-16, and E-17 (1992). Joining of the Peptide Vector Multimer to an Agent
• the invention features compounds where the multimeric peptide vector is joined (e.g., by a covalent bond) to one or more agents (e.g., a diagnostic or therapeutic agent, such as any of those described herein).
• agents e.g., a diagnostic or therapeutic agent, such as any of those described herein.
• the agent may be joined to the peptide vector directly through a covalent bond such as a peptide bond or disulfide bond, or may be joined to the peptide vector through a linker (e.g., any linker described herein).
• the agent may be joined to the peptide vector through any appropriate reactive moiety on the vector, e.g., through a primary amine such as an N-terminal amine or a ⁇ -amino group on a lysine side chain, through a thiol bond (e.g., through a cysteine side chain), or through a carboxyl group (e.g., a C-terminal carboxyl group or a aspartic acid or glutamic acid side chain).
• the agent may be joined to the peptide vector by a peptide bond (e.g., produced synthetically or recombinantly as a fusion protein).
• Compounds including an agent and dimeric peptide vector can be conjugated either through the peptide vector portion of the molecule or through the linker portion of the molecule.
• a 1 and A 2 are each, independently, peptide vectors (e.g., any described herein);
• X is a linker (e.g., chemical linker, peptide, or covalent bond) that joins A 1 and A 2 ;
• B 1 is an agent; and
• Y′ is a linker that joins B 1 and A 1 .
• two or more (e.g., 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10) agents are joined to one or both of the peptide vectors.
• Such compounds can be represented by the formula:
• a 1 , A 2 , and X are as defined above; m is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10; n is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10; p is an integer from 1 to m; q is an integer from m+1 to m+n; each B p and each B q are, independently, an agent (e.g., any described herein); and each Y p and each Y q are, independently, a linker that joins each B p or each B q to A 1 or A 2 , respectively.
• the agent is joined (e.g., through a covalent bond or a chemical linker such as those described herein) to the dimer through the linker that joins the peptide vectors forming the dimer.
• a covalent bond or a chemical linker such as those described herein
• Such compounds can have the formula:
• a 1 and A 2 are peptide vectors (e.g., any described herein); B is an agent; and X is a linker that joins A 1 , A 2 , and B.
• agents can be joined to both the linker and a peptide vector.
• Such compounds can be represented by the formula:
• a 1 and A 2 are, independently, peptide vectors;
• B Z is an agent or is absent; m is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10; n is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10;
• p is an integer from 1 to m;
• q is an integer from m+1 to m+n;
• Each B p and B q is, independently, an agent (e.g., any described herein); and each Y p and Y q is, independently, a linker that joins each B p or each B q to A 1 or A 2 , respectively, where at least one (e.g., at least two) of the following is true (i) B1 is present; (ii) m is at least 1; and (iii) n is at least 1.
• Compounds of the invention can also include a trimeric peptide vector. Where the trimeric peptide vector is joined to a single agent through one of the peptide vectors, the compound can have one of the following formulas:
• a 1 , A 2 , and A 3 are each, independently, a peptide vector (e.g., any described herein);
• X 1 and X 2 are linkers;
• B 1 is an agent;
• Y 1 is a linker that joins B 1 to a peptide vector (e.g., A 1 , A 2 , and A 3 ) or to the linker X 1 .
• the trimeric peptide vector is conjugated to one or more than one agent.
• conjugation can be through either the peptide vector, or through the linker(s).
• Such compounds can include one of the following formulas:
• a 1 , A 2 , and A 3 are peptide vectors; n, m, and j are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10;
• Each B p , each B q , and each B r are, independently, agents (e.g., any agent described herein);
• B z and B y are, independently, agents or are absent;
• X 1 is a linker joining A 1 , A 2 , and B z , if present;
• X 2 is a linker joining A 2 , A 3 , and B y , if present.
• at least one of n, m, or j is at least one, B z is present, or B y is present.
• at least two (e.g., at least 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, or 30) of B p , B q , B r , B y , and B z are present.
• the compounds of the invention can also include peptide multimers of a higher order (e.g., quatromers, pentomers, etc.). Such multimers can be described by the formula:
• a 1 , A 2 , each A q , each A r , and each A s are, independently, peptide vectors;
• a 3 is a peptide vector or is absent;
• X, each X q , X r , and X s are, independently, linkers that join peptide vectors;
• m, n, and p are each, independently, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10;
• q is an integer from 4 to m+3;
• r is an integer from m+4 to m+n+3; and
• s is an integer from m+n+4 to m+n+p+3.
• One or more agents can be joined to either the linkers (X, any X q , X r , or X s ) or the peptide vectors (A 1 , A 2 , A 3 , each A q , each A r , and each A s ) of this formula in order to form higher order multimer conjugates.
• linkers any X q , X r , or X s
• peptide vectors A 1 , A 2 , A 3 , each A q , each A r , and each A s
• the compounds of the invention can feature any of polypeptides described herein, for example, any of the peptides described in Table 1 (e.g., Angiopep-1, Angiopep-2, Angiopep-7, or reversed Angiopep-2), or a fragment or analog thereof.
• the polypeptide may have at least 35%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, 99%, or even 100% identity to a polypeptide described herein.
• the polypeptide may have one or more (e.g., 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, or 15) substitutions relative to one of the sequences described herein. Other modifications are described in greater detail below.
• the invention also features fragments of these polypeptides (e.g., a functional fragment).
• the fragments are capable of efficiently being transported to or accumulating in a particular cell type (e.g., liver, eye, lung, kidney, or spleen) or are efficiently transported across the BBB.
• Truncations of the polypeptide may be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, or more amino acids from either the N-terminus of the polypeptide, the C-terminus of the polypeptide, or a combination thereof.
• Other fragments include sequences where internal portions of the polypeptide are deleted.
• Additional polypeptides may be identified by using one of the assays or methods described herein.
• a candidate polypeptide may be produced by conventional peptide synthesis, conjugated with paclitaxel and administered to a laboratory animal.
• a biologically-active polypeptide conjugate may be identified, for example, based on its ability to increase survival of an animal injected with tumor cells and treated with the conjugate as compared to a control which has not been treated with a conjugate (e.g., treated with the unconjugated agent).
• a biologically active polypeptide may be identified based on its location in the parenchyma in an in situ cerebral perfusion assay.
• Labeled conjugates of a polypeptide can be administered to an animal, and accumulation in different organs can be measured.
• a polypeptide conjugated to a detectable label e.g., a near-IR fluorescence spectroscopy label such as Cy5.5
• a detectable label e.g., a near-IR fluorescence spectroscopy label such as Cy5.5
• a polypeptide conjugated to a detectable label allows live in vivo visualization.
• a polypeptide can be administered to an animal, and the presence of the polypeptide in an organ can be detected, thus allowing determination of the rate and amount of accumulation of the polypeptide in the desired organ.
• the polypeptide can be labelled with a radioactive isotope (e.g., 125 I). The polypeptide is then administered to an animal.
• the animal is sacrificed and the organs are extracted.
• the amount of radioisotope in each organ can then be measured using any means known in the art.
• Appropriate negative controls include any peptide or polypeptide known not to be efficiently transported into a particular cell type (e.g., a peptide related to Angiopep that does not cross the BBB, or any other peptide).
• aprotininin analogs may be found by performing a protein BLAST (Genbank: www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/BLAST/) using the synthetic aprotinin sequence (or portion thereof) disclosed in International Application No. PCT/CA2004/000011. Exemplary aprotinin analogs are also found under accession Nos. CAA37967 (GI:58005) and 1405218C (GI:3604747).
• Any therapeutic or diagnostic agent may be conjugated to a multimer (e.g., a dimer) of the invention.
• Such agents may be chemically conjugated to one or more of the peptide vectors, or may be conjugated to a linker that joins two (or more) of the peptide vectors (e.g., a trifunetional linker).
• Agents of particular interest include anticancer agents (e.g., paclitaxel, etoposide, doxorubicin and analogs thereof), RNAi agents, and peptide and polypeptide therapeutics (e.g., GLP-1 agonists, neurotensin and neurotensin receptor agonists, leptin and OB receptor agonists, GDNF, BDNF, and analogs thereof).
• anticancer agents e.g., paclitaxel, etoposide, doxorubicin and analogs thereof
• RNAi agents e.g., RNAi agents, and peptide and polypeptide therapeutics (e.g., GLP-1 agonists, neurotensin and neurotensin receptor agonists, leptin and OB receptor agonists, GDNF, BDNF, and analogs thereof).
• the agent is a small molecule drug, an antibiotic, a medicine, a detectable label, a protein (e.g., an enzyme), protein-based compound (e.g., a protein complex comprising one or polypeptide chain) and a peptide or polypeptide.
• a protein e.g., an enzyme
• protein-based compound e.g., a protein complex comprising one or polypeptide chain
• peptide or polypeptide e.g., a protein complex comprising one or polypeptide chain
• Exemplary peptide and polypeptide therapeutics that can be used in the present invention are described, for example in U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/200,947, filed Dec. 5, 2008, which is hereby incorporated by reference.
• the agent may be more particularly, a molecule which is active at the level of the central nervous system.
• the agent may be any agent for treating or detecting a neurological disease.
• the agent may be a small molecule drug, an antibiotic, a medicine, a detectable label, a protein (e.g., an enzyme), protein-based compound (e.g., a protein complex comprising one or polypeptide chain) and a peptide or polypeptide.
• a protein e.g., an enzyme
• protein-based compound e.g., a protein complex comprising one or polypeptide chain
• the agent may be more particularly, a molecule that is active at the level of the central nervous system.
• the agent may be any agent for treating or detecting a neurological disease.
• the detectable label may be a radioimaging agent.
• Other label include an isotope, a fluorescent label (e.g., rhodamine), a reporter molecule (e.g., biotin), etc.
• Other examples of detectable labels include, for example, a green fluorescent protein, biotin, a histag protein and ⁇ -galactosidase.
• Protein or protein-based compound which may be conjugated to a multimer of the invention include an antibody, an antibody fragment (e.g., an antibody binding fragment such as Fv fragment, F(ab) 2 , F(ab) 2 ′ and Fab and the like), a peptidic- or protein-based drug (e.g., a positive pharmacological modulator (agonist) or an pharmacological inhibitor (antagonist)).
• an antibody fragment e.g., an antibody binding fragment such as Fv fragment, F(ab) 2 , F(ab) 2 ′ and Fab and the like
• a peptidic- or protein-based drug e.g., a positive pharmacological modulator (agonist) or an pharmacological inhibitor (antagonist)
• agents are cellular toxins (e.g., monomethyl auristatin E (MMAE), toxins from bacteria endotoxins and exotoxins; diphtheria toxins, botunilum toxins, tetanus toxins, perussis toxins, staphylococcus enterotoxins, toxin shock syndrome toxin TSST-1, adenylate cyclase toxin, shiga toxin, cholera enterotoxin, and others) and anti-angiogenic compounds (endostatin, catechins, nutriceuticals, chemokine IP-10, inhibitors of matrix metalloproteinase (MMPIs), anastellin, vironectin, antithrombin, tyrosine kinase inhibitors, VEGF inhibitors, antibodies against receptor, trastuzumab (Herceptin®), Bevacizumab (Avastin®), and panitumumab and others).
• MMAE monomethyl auristatin E
• the agent may be an anticancer drug.
• An anticancer drug encompassed by the present invention may include, for example, a drug having a group allowing its conjugation to the carrier of the invention.
• Particular anticancer drugs include those selected from the group consisting of paclitaxel (Taxol), vinblastine, vincristine, etoposide, doxorubicin, cyclophosphamide, docetaxel (Taxotere®), melphalan, and chlorambucil; pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; or a combination thereof.
• the anticancer agent is paclitaxel, etoposide, or doxorubicin; a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; or a derivative thereof.
• exemplary agents include abarelix, aldesleukin, alemtuzumab, alitertinoin, allopurinol, altretamine, amifostine, anakinra, anastrozole, arsenic trioxide, asparaginase, azacitidine, BCG Live, bevacuzimab, bexarotene, bleomycin, bleomycin, bortezombi, bortezomib, busulfan, busulfan, calusterone, capecitabine, carboplatin, carmustine, celecoxib, cetuximab, cisplatin, cladribine, clofarabine, cytarabine, dacarbazine, dactinomycin, actinomycin D, dalteparin (e.g., sodium), darbepoetin alfa, dasatinib, daunorubicin, daunomycin, decitabine, denile
• the agent is a derivative of paclitaxel.
• Structural analogs of paclitaxel are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,911,549 and can be described by the formula:
• R 1 is selected from the group consisting of —CH 3 ; —C 6 H 5 , or phenyl substituted with one, 2 or 3 C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 3 alkoxy, halo, C 1 -C 3 alkylthio, trifluoromethyl, C 2 -C 6 , dialkylamino, hydroxyl, or nitro; and -2-furyl, 2-thienyl, 1-naphthyl, 2-naphthyl or 3,4-methylenedioxyphenyl;
• R 2 is selected from the group consisting of —H, —NHC(O)H, —NHC(O)C 1 -C 10 alkyl (preferably —NHC(O)C 4 -C 6 alkyl), —NHC(O)phenyl, —NHC(O)phenyl substituted with one, 2, or 3 C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 3 alkoxy,
• R′ 6 and R′ 7 are —CH 3 , —CH 2 CH 3 , benzyl or R′ 6 and R′ 7 together with the nitrogen of NR′ 6 R′ 7 form a pyrrolidino, piperidino, morpholino, or N-methylpiperizino group;
• X ⁇ is halide, and base is NH 3 , (HOC 2 H 4 ) 3 N,N(CH 3 ) 3 , CH 3 N(C 2 H 4 ) 2 NH, NH 2 (CH 2 ) 6 NH 2 , N-methylglucamine, NaOH or KOH], —OC(O)(CH 2 ) n NR 2 R 3 [where n is 1-3, R 2 is —H or —C
• Particular paclitaxel analogs include ((azidophenyl)ureido)taxoid, (2 ⁇ ,5 ⁇ ,7 ⁇ ,9 ⁇ ,10 ⁇ ,13 ⁇ )-5,10,13,20-tetraacetoxytax-11-ene-2,7,9-triol, (2 ⁇ ,5 ⁇ ,9 ⁇ ,10 ⁇ )-2,9,10-triacetoxy-5-( ⁇ -D-glucopyranosyl)oxy)-3,11-cyclotax-11-en-13-one, 1 ⁇ -hydroxybaccatin I, 1,7-dihydroxytaxinine, 1-acety-5,7,10-deacetyl-baccatin I, 1-dehydroxybaccatin VI, 1-hydroxy-2-deacetoxy-5-decinnamoyl-taxinine j, 1-hydroxy-7,9-dideacetylbaccatin I, 1-hydroxybaccatin I, 10-acetyl-4-deacetyltaxotere, 10-deacetoxypaclitaxel, 10-Deacet
• paclitaxel analogs include 1-deoxypaclitaxel, 10-deacetoxy-7-deoxypaclitaxel, 10-O-deacetylpaclitaxel 10-monosuccinyl ester, 10-succinyl paclitaxel, 12b-acetyloxy-2a,3,4,4a,5,6,9,10,11,12,12a,12b-dodecahydro-4,11-dihydroxy-12-(2,5-dimethoxybenzyloxy)-4a,8,13,13-tetramethyl-5-oxo-7,11-methano-1H-cyclodeca(3,4)benz(1,2-b)oxet-9-yl 3-(tert-butyloxycarbonyl)amino-2-hydroxy-5-methyl-4-hexaenoate, 130-nm albumin-bound paclitaxel, 2′-paclitaxel methyl 2-glucopyranosyl succinate, 3′-(4-azidophenyl)-3′
• Etoposide derivatives may also be used in the compounds of the invention.
• the podophyllotoxin derivative is a compound having a structure according to the formula:
• each R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 is selected, independently, from H, optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl, C(O)R 8 , P(O)(OR 9 )(OR 10 ), S(O) 2 (OR 9 ), or a hydrolyzable linker Y that comprises a covalent bond to an amino acid of the polypeptide;
• X is O or NR 7 ;
• each R 4 , R 5 , and R 7 is selected, independently, from H, optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl, C(O)R 8 , or a hydrolyzable linker Y that comprises a covalent bond to an amino acid of the polypeptide;
• R 6 is H, optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl;
• R 8 is selected from optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl or optionally substituted aryl;
• each R 9 and R 10 is selected, independently, from H, optionally substituted C
• the etoposide derivative is conjugated at the 2′ or 3′ hydroxyl group.
• conjugation strategies are described in U.S. Provisional Application Nos. 61/105,654, filed Oct. 15, 2008, and 61/171,010, filed Apr. 20, 2009.
• etoposide phosphate Etoposide phosphate
• Etoposide phosphate Etoposide phosphate
• etoposide derivatives include those where the phenolic —OH is replaced with an acyloxy group (e.g., —OC(O)R 8 , as described herein) such as the following compound:
• acylated etoposide derivatives can also show improved water solubility relative to etoposide when covalently attached to any of the polypeptides described herein.
• podophyllotoxin derivatives include teniposide and NK611.
• the anti-cancer agent is doxorubicin (hydroxydaunorubicin or Adriamycin®) or a doxorubicin derivative such as epirubicin (Ellence® or Pharmorubicie®).
• doxorubicin and doxorubicin derivatives can be covalently attached to an amino acid in any of the polypeptides described herein through a hydrolyzable covalent linker bonded to, for example, the 14-hydroxyl group.
• Doxorubicin derivatives can be described generally by the following formula:
• each X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , X 4 , and X 5 is selected, independently, from a covalent bond, O, or NR 25 ; each R 17 , R 18 , R 19 , R 20 , R 20 , R 21 , R 22 , R 23 , R 24 , and R 25 , is selected, independently, from H, optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl, optionally substituted C 2-6 alkenyl, optionally substituted C 2-6 alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, or is a hydrolyzable linker Y as defined herein.
• R 17 , R 18 , R 19 , R 20 , R 20 , R 21 , R 22 , R 23 , R 24 , and R 25 is Y.
• R 21 is Y.
• doxorubicin derivatives can be found in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,098,884, 4,301,277, 4,314,054, 4,464,529, 4,585,859, 4,672,057, 4,684,629, 4,826,964, 5,200,513, 5,304,687, 5,594,158, 5,625,043, and 5,874,412, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference.
• the multimeric peptide vectors may be conjugated to any nucleic acid, including expression vectors (e.g., a plasmid) and therapeutic nucleic acids (e.g., RNAi agents).
• the expression vector may encode a polypeptide (e.g., a therapeutic polypeptide such as an interferon, a therapeutic cytokine (e.g., IL-12), or FGF-2) or may encode a therapeutic nucleic acid (e.g., an RNAi agent such as those described herein).
• Nucleic acids include any type known in the art, such as double and single-stranded DNA and RNA molecules of any length, conformation, charge, or shape (i.e., linear, concatemer, circular (e.g., a plasmid), nicked circular, coiled, supercoiled, or charged. Additionally, the nucleic acid can contain 5′ and 3′ terminal modifications and include blunt and overhanging nucleotides at these termini, or combinations thereof. In certain embodiments of the invention the nucleic acid is or encodes an RNA interference sequence (e.g., an siRNA, shRNA, miRNA, or dsRNA nucleotide sequence) that can silence a targeted gene product.
• the nucleic acid can be, for example, a DNA molecule, an RNA molecule, or a modified form thereof.
• RNAi targets include growth factors (e.g., epidermal growth factor (EGF), vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF), transforming growth factor- ⁇ (TGF- ⁇ )), growth factor receptors, including receptor tyrosine kinases (e.g., EGF receptor (EGFR), including Her2/neu (ErbB), VEGF receptor (VEGFR), platelet-derived growth factor receptor (PDGFR), cytokines, chemokines, kinases, including cytoplasmic tyrosine and serine/threonine kinases (e.g., focal adhesion kinase, cyclin-dependent kinase, SRC kinases, syk-ZAP70 kinases, BTK kinases, RAF kinase, MAP kinases (including ERIC), and Wnt kinases), phosphatases, regulatory GTPases (e.g., Ras protein), transcription factors (e.g.,
• RNAi sequences to silence EGFR are SEQ ID NO:117 (GGAGCUGCCCAUGAGAAAU) and SEQ ID NO:118 (AUUUCUCAUGGGCAGCUCC).
• VEGF can be silenced with an RNAi molecule having the sequence, for example, set forth in SEQ ID NO:119 (GGAGTACCCTGATGAGATC).
• RNAi sequences for use in the agents of the invention may be either commercially available (e.g., Dharmacon, Ambion) or the practitioner may use one of several publicly available software tools for the construction of viable RNAi sequences (e.g., The siRNA Selection Server, maintained by MIT/Whitehead; available at: http://jura.wi.mit.edu/bioc/siRNAext/). Examples of diseases or conditions, and RNAi target that may be useful in treatment of such diseases, are shown in Table 3.
• RNAi Target Molecules Cancer Glioblastoma Epidermal growth factor receptor (EGFR), Vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF) Glioma EGFR, VEGF Astrocytoma EGFR, VEGF Neuroblastoma EGFR, VEGF Lung cancer EGFR, VEGF Breast cancer EGFR, VEGF Hepatocellular carcinoma EGFR, VEGF Neurodegenerative Disease Huntington's disease Huntingtin (Htt) Parkinson's disease Alpha-synuclein Alzheimer's disease Amyloid precursor protein (APP), Presenilin-1 or -2, Apolipoprotein E (ApoE) Amyotropic lateral schlerosis Superoxide dismutase 1 (SOD-1) Multiple schlerosis Sorting nexin-6 (SNX6), LINGO-1, Nogo-A, NgR-1, APP Lysosomal Storage Disease MP
• GLP-1 agonists include GLP-1, exendin-4, and analogs thereof. Exemplary analogs are described below.
• Exendin-4 and exendin-4 analogs can also be used in the compositions, methods, and kits of the invention.
• the compounds of the invention can include fragments of the exendin-4 sequence.
• Exendin-4 has the sequence. His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Leu-Ser-Lys-Gln-Met-Glu-Glu-Glu-Ala-Val-Arg-Leu-Phe-Ile-Glu-Trp-Leu-Lys-Asn-Gly-Gly-Pro-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-Pro-Pro-Pro-Ser-NH 2 (SEQ ID NO: 132)
• exendin-4 analogs include those having a cysteine substitution (e.g., [Cys 32 ]exendin-4 (SEQ ID NO : 133)) or a lysine substitution (e.g., [Lys 39 ]exendin-4 (SEQ ID NO: 134)).
• cysteine substitution e.g., [Cys 32 ]exendin-4 (SEQ ID NO : 133)
• lysine substitution e.g., [Lys 39 ]exendin-4 (SEQ ID NO: 134)
• Exendin analogs are also described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,157,555 and include those of the formula: X 1 -X 2 -X 3 -Gly-Thr-X 4 -X 5 -X 6 -X 7 -X 8 -Ser-Lys-Gln-X 9 -Glu-Glu-Glu-Ala-Val-Arg-Leu-X 10 -X 11 -X 12 -X 13 -Leu-Lys-Asn-Gly-Gly-X 14 -Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-X 15 -X 16 -X 17 -X 18 -Z (SEQ ID NO: 135) where X 1 is His, Arg or Tyr; X 2 is Ser, Gly, Ala or Thr; X 3 is Asp or Glu; X 4 is Phe, Tyr or NaI; X 5 is Thr or Ser; X 6 is Ser or Thr; X 7 is Asp or Glu; X 8 is Leu
• N-alkyl groups for N-alkylglycine, N-alkyl-pGly and N-alkylalanine include lower alkyl groups (e.g., C 1-6 alkyl or C 1-4 alkyl).
• X 1 is His or Tyr (e.g., His).
• X 2 can be Gly.
• X 9 can be Leu, pGly, or Met.
• X 13 can be Trp or Phe.
• X 4 can be Phe or NaI;
• X 11 can be Ile or Val, and
• X 14 , X 15 , X 16 and X 17 can be independently selected from Pro, HPro, TPro, or N-alkylalanine (e.g., where N-alkylalanine has a N-alkyl group of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms).
• X 15 , X 16 , and X 17 are the same amino acid residue.
• X 18 may be Ser or Tyr (e.g., Ser).
• Z can be —NH 2 .
• X 1 is His or Tyr (e.g., His);
• X 2 is Gly;
• X 4 is Phe or NaI;
• X 9 is Leu, pGly, or Met;
• X 10 is Phe or NaI;
• X 11 is Ile or Val;
• X 14 , X 15 , X 16 , and X 17 are independently selected from Pro, HPro, TPro, or N-alkylalanine; and
• X 18 is Ser or Tyr, (e.g., Ser).
• Z can be —NH 2 .
• X 9 is Leu, Ile, Val, or pGly (e.g., Leu or pGly) and X 13 is Phe, Tyr, or NaI (e.g., Phe or NaI).
• X 9 is Leu, Ile, Val, or pGly (e.g., Leu or pGly) and X 13 is Phe, Tyr, or NaI (e.g., Phe or NaI).
• exendin analogs also described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,157,555 and 7,223,725, include compounds of the formula: X 1 -X 2 -X 3 -Gly-X 5 -X 6 -X 7 -X 8 -X 9 -X 10 -X 11 -X 12 -X 13 -X 14 -X 15 -X 16 -X 17 -Ala-X 19 -X 20 -X 21 -X 22 -X 23 -X 24 -X 25 -X 26 -X 27 -X 28 -Z 1 (SEQ ID NO: 179) where X 1 is His, Arg, or Tyr; X 2 is Ser, Gly, Ala, or Thr; X 3 is Asp or Glu; X 5 is Ala or Thr; X 6 is Ala, Phe, Tyr, or NaI; X 7 is Thr or Ser; X 8 is Ala, Ser, or Thr; X 9 is Asp or Glu; X 10
• N-alkyl groups for N-alkylglycine, N-alkyl-pGly and N-alkylalanine include lower alkyl groups of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms (e.g., 1 to 4 carbon atoms).
• X 1 is His or Tyr (e.g., His).
• X 2 can be Gly.
• X 14 can be Leu, pGly, or Met.
• X 25 can be Trp or Phe.
• X 6 is Phe or NaI
• X 22 is Phe or NaI
• X 23 is Ile or Val.
• X 31 , X 36 , X 37 , and X 38 can be independently selected from Pro, HPro, TPro, and N-alkylalanine.
• X 1 is His or Tyr (e.g., His);
• X 2 is Gly;
• X 6 is Phe or NaI;
• X 14 is Leu, pGly, or Met;
• X 22 is Phe or NaI;
• X 23 is Ile or Val;
• X 31 , X 36 , X 37 , and X 38 are independently selected from Pro, HPro, TPro, or N-alkylalanine.
• X 14 is Leu, Ile, Val, or pGly (e.g., Leu or pGly), and X 25 is Phe, Tyr or NaI (e.g., Phe or NaI).
• Exendin analogs described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,220,721 include compounds of the formula: X 1 -X 2 -X 3 -X 4 -X- 5 -X 6 -X 7 -X 8 -X 9 -X 10 -X 11 -X 12 -X 13 -X 14 -X 15 -X 16 -X 17 -Ala-X 19 -X 20 -X 21 -X 22 -X 23 -X 24 -X 25 -X 26 -X 27 -X 28 -Z 1 (SEQ ID NO: 180) where X 1 is His, Arg, Tyr, Ala, Norval, Val, or Norleu; X 2 is Ser, Gly, Ala, or Thr; X 3 is Ala, Asp, or Glu; X 4 is Ala, Norval, Val, Norleu, or Gly; X 5 is Ala or Thr; X 6 is Phe, Tyr or NaI; X 7 is Thr or
• X 14 is Arg, Leu, Ile, or Met
• X 20 is His, Arg, or Lys
• X 40 is Arg-OH, —OH, —NH 2 or Lys-OH.
• X 14 is Met and X 20 is Arg
• X 40 cannot be —NH 2 .
• exendin-4 derivatives include [(Ile/Leu/Met) 14 ,(His/Lys) 20 ,Arg 40 ]exendin-4; [(not Lys/not Arg) 12 ,(not Lys/not Arg) 20 ,(not Lys/not Arg) 27 ,Arg 40 ]exendin-4; and [(not Lys/not Arg) 20 ,Arg 40 ]exendin-4.
• Particular exendin-4 analogs include [Lys 20 ,Arg 40 ]exendin-4,[His 20 ,Arg 40 ]exendin-4; and [Leu 14 ,Lys 20 ,Arg 40 ]exendin-4.
• the invention may also use truncated forms of exendin-4 or any of the exendin analogs described herein.
• the truncated forms may include deletions of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20 amino acids from the N-terminus, from the C-terminus, or a combination thereof.
• Particular exendin-4 fragments include Exendin-4(1-31). Other fragments of exendin-4 are described in U.S. Patent Application Publication No.
• 2007/0037747 and have the formula: His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-X 6 -Thr-Ser-Asp-Leu-Ser-Lys-Gln-X 14 -Glu-Glu-Glu-Ala-Val-X 20 -Leu-Phe-Ile-Glu-Trp-Leu-Lys-Asn-Gly-X 30 -Pro-X 32 (SEQ ID NO: 137) where X 6 is Phe or Tyr, X 14 is Met, Ile or Leu, X 20 is Lys; X 30 is Gly or is absent; and X 32 is Arg or is absent.
• GLP-1 and GLP-1 analogs can be GLP-1 or a GLP-1 analog.
• the GLP-1 analog is a peptide, which can be truncated, may have one or more substitutions of the wild type sequence (e.g., the human wild type sequence), or may have other chemical modifications.
• GLP-1 agonists can also be non-peptide compounds, for example, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,927,214. Particular analogs include LY548806, CJC-1131, and Liraglutide.
• the GLP-1 analog can be truncated form of GLP-1.
• the GLP-1 peptide may be truncated by 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 20, or more residues from its N-terminus, its C-terminus, or a combination thereof.
• the truncated GLP-1 analog is the GLP-1(7-34), GLP-1(7-35), GLP-1(7-36), or GLP-1(7-37) human peptide or the C-terminal amidated forms thereof.
• modified forms of truncated GLP-1 peptides are used.
• Exemplary analogs are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,545,618 and have the amino acid sequence: His-Ala-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-Gly-Gln-Ala-Ala-Lys-Glu-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-Val-Lys-(Gly)-(Arg)-(Gly) (SEQ ID NO: 138) where (Gly), (Arg), and (Gly) are present or absent depending on indicated chain length, with at least one modification selected from the group consisting of (a) substitution of a neutral amino acid, Arg, or a D form of Lys for Lys at position 26 and/or 34 and/or a neutral amino acid, Lys, or a D form of Arg for Arg at position 36; (b) substitution
• the substituted amino acids may be in the D form.
• the amino acids substituted at position 7 can also be the N-acylated or N-alkylated amino acids.
• Exemplary GLP-1 analogs include [D-His 7 ]GLP-1(7-37), [Tyr 7 ]GLP-1(7-37), [N-acetyl-His 7 ]GLP-1 (7-37), [N-isopropyl-His 7 ]GLP-1(7-37), [D-Ala 8 ]GLP-1(7-37), [D-Glu 9 ]GLP-1(7-37), [Asp 9 ]GLP-1(7-37), [D-Asp 9 ]GLP-1(7-37), [D-Phe 10 ]GLP-1(7-37), [Ser 22 ,Arg 23 ,Arg 24 ,Gln 26 ]GLP-1(7-37), and [Ser 8 ,Gln 9
• GLP-1 fragments are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,574,008 have the formula: R 1 -Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-Gly-Gln-Ala-Ala-Lys-Glu-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-Val-X-Gly-Arg-R 2 (SEQ ID NO: 181) where R 1 is H 2 N; H 2 N-Ser; H 2 N-Val-Ser; H 2 N-Asp-Val-Ser; H 2 N-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser; H 2 N-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser; H 2 N-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser; H 2 N-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser; H 2 N-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser; H 2 N-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser
• GLP-1 analogs include the sequence His-Ala-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-Gly-Gln-Ala-Ala-Lys-Glu-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-Val-X (SEQ ID NO: 139), where X is Lys, Lys-Gly, or Lys-Gly-Arg.
• GLP-1 analogs also include peptides of the formula: H 2 N—X—CO—R 1 , where R 1 is OH, OM, or —NR 2 R 3 ; M is a pharmaceutically acceptable cation or a lower branched or unbranched alkyl group (e.g., C 1-6 alkyl); R 2 and R 3 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and a lower branched or unbranched alkyl group (e.g., C 1-6 alkyl); X is a peptide comprising the sequence His-Ala-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-Gly-Gln-Ala-Ala-Lys-Glu-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-Val-Lys-Gly-Arg; (SEQ ID NO: 203); NH 2 is the amine group of the amino terminus of X; and CO
• GLP-1 analogs are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,981,488 and have the formula: R 1 -X-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Y-Gly-Gln-Ala-Ala-Lys-Z-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-Val-Lys-Gly-Arg-R 2 (SEQ ID NO: 142) where R 1 is His, D-His, desamino-His, 2-amino-His, ⁇ -hydroxy-His, homohistidine, ⁇ -fluoromethyl-His, or ⁇ -methyl-His; X is Met, Asp, Lys, Thr, Leu, Asn, Gln, Phe, Val, or Tyr; Y and Z are independently selected from Glu, Gln, Ala, Thr, Ser, and Gly; and R 2 is selected from NH 2 and G
• GLP-1 analogs are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,512,549 and have the formula: R 1 -Ala-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-Gly-Gln-Ala-Ala-Xaa-Glu-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-Val-Lys(R 2 )-Gly-Arg-R 3 (SEQ ID NO: 143) where R 1 is 4-imidazopropionyl (des-amino-histidyl), 4-imidazoacetyl, or 4-imidazo- ⁇ , adimethyl-acetyl; R 2 , which is bound to the side chain of the Lys (e.g., through the ⁇ amino group), is C 6-10 unbranched acyl or is absent; R 3 is Gly-OH or NH 2 ; and Xaa is Lys or Arg.
• the GLP-1 analog has the formula: His-X 8 -Glu-Gly-X 11 -X 12 -Thr-Ser-Asp-X 16 -Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-X 22 -X 23 -X 24 -Ala-X 26 -X 27 -Phe-Ile-Ala-X 31 -Leu-X 33 -X 34 -X 35 -X 36 -R (SEQ ID NO: 144) where X 8 is Gly, Ala, Val, Leu, Ile, Ser, or Thr; X 11 is Asp, Glu, Arg, Thr, Ala, Lys, or His; X 12 is His, Trp, Phe, or Tyr; X 16 is Leu, Ser Thr, Trp, His, Phe, Asp, Val, Tyr, Glu, or Ala; X 22 is Gly, Asp,
• the polypeptide has the amino acid sequence: His-X 8 -Glu-Gly-Thr-X 12 -Thr-Ser-Asp-X 16 -Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-X 22 -X 23 -Ala-Ala-X 26 -Glu-Phe-Ile-X 30 -Trp-Leu-Val-Lys-X 35 -Arg-R (SEQ ID NO: 145) where X 8 is Gly, Ala, Val, Leu, Ile, Ser, or Thr; X 12 is His, Trp, Phe, or Tyr; X 16 is Leu, Ser, Thr, Trp, His, Phe, Asp, Val, Glu, or Ala; X 22 is Gly, Asp, Glu, Gln, Asn, Lys, Arg, Cys, or Cya; X 23 is His, Asp, Lys, Glu, or Gln; X 26 is Asp, Lys, Glu, Glu,
• the polypeptide has the amino acid sequence: His-X 8 -Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-X 22 -X 23 -Ala-Ala-Lys-X 27 -Phe-Ile-X 30 -Trp-Leu-Val-Lys-Gly-Arg-R (SEQ ID NO: 146) where X 8 is Gly, Ala, Val, Leu, Ile, Ser, or Thr; X 22 is Gly, Asp, Glu, Gln, Asn, Lys, Arg, Cys, or Cya; X 23 is His, Asp, Lys, Glu, or Gln; X 27 is Ala, Glu, His, Phe, Tyr, Trp, Arg, or Lys X 30 is Ala, Glu, Asp, Ser, or His; R is Lys, Arg, Thr, Ser, Glu, Asp
• the polypeptide has the amino acid sequence: X 7 -X 8 -Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-X 22 -Gln-Ala-Ala-Lys-Glu-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-Val-Lys-Gly-Arg-R (SEQ ID NO: 147) where X 7 is L-His, D-His, desamino-His, 2-amino-His, ⁇ -hydroxy-His, homo-His, ⁇ -fluoromethyl-His or ⁇ -methyl-His; X 8 is Gly, Ala, Val, Leu, Ile, Ser or Thr (e.g., Gly, Val, Leu, Ile, Ser, or Thr); X 22 is Asp, Glu, Gln, Asn, Lys, Arg, Cys, or Cya, and R
• the GLP-1 compound has an amino acid other than alanine at position 8 and an amino acid other than glycine at position 22.
• GLP-1 compounds include [Glu 22 ]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Asp 22 ]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Arg 22 ]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Lys 22 ]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Cya 22 ]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val 8 ,Glu 22 ]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val 8 ,Asp 22 ]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val 8 ,Arg 22 ]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val 8 ,Lys 22 ]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val 8 ,Cya 22 ]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Gly 8 ,Glu 22 ]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Gly 8 ,Asp
• GLP-1 analogs are described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,101,843 and include those having the formula: X 7 -X 8 -Glu-Gly-Thr-X 12 -Thr-Ser-Asp-X 16 -Ser-X 18 -X 19 -X 20 -Glu-X 22 -Gln-Ala-X 25 -Lys-X 27 -Phe-Ile-X 30 -Trp-Leu-X 33 -Lys-Gly-Arg-X 37 (SEQ ID NO: 148) wherein: X 7 is L-His, D-His, desamino-His, 2-amino-His, ⁇ -hydroxy-His, homohistidine, ⁇ -fluoromethyl-His, or ⁇ -methyl-His; X 8 is Ala, Gly, Val, Leu, Ile, Ser, or Thr; X 12 is Phe, Trp, or Tyr; X 16 is Val, Trp, I
• GLP-1 analogs described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,101,843 have the formula: X 7 -X 8 -Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-X 16 -Ser-X 18 -Tyr-Leu-Glu-X 22 -Gln-Ala-X 25 -Lys-Glu-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-X 33 -Lys-Gly-Arg-X 37 (SEQ ID NO: 149) wherein: X 7 is L-His, D-His, desamino-His, 2-amino-His, ⁇ -hydroxy-His, homohistidine, ⁇ -fluoromethyl-His, or ⁇ -methyl-His; X 8 is Gly, Ala, Val, Leu, Ile, Ser, or Thr; X 16 is Val, Phe, Tyr, or Trp; X 18 is Ser, Tyr, Trp, Phe, Lys,
• GLP-1 analogs are also described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,238,670 and have the structure: A-X 1 -X 2 -X 3 -X 4 -X 5 -X 6 -X 7 -X 8 -X 9 -Y-Z-B where each of X 1-9 is a naturally or nonnaturally occurring amino acid residue; Y and Z are amino acid residues; and one of the substitutions at the ⁇ -carbon atoms of Y and Z may each independently be substituted with a primary substituent group selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocyclylalkyl, arylalkyl and heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclylalkyl said primary substituent optionally being substituted with a secondary substituent selected from a cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group; any of said primary or secondary substituents may further be substituted with one or more of H,
• a and B are optionally present, where A is present and A is H, an amino acid or peptide containing from about 1-15 amino acid residues, an R group, an R—C(O) (amide) group, a carbamate group RO—C(O), a urea R 4 R 5 N—C(O), a sulfonamido R—SO 2 , or R 4 R 5 N—SO 2 ; where R is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C 1-12 alkyl, C 3-10 cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, aryloxyalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, and heteroaryloxyalkyl; R 4 and R 5 are each independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl,
• Exemplary substitutions on the ⁇ -carbon atoms of Y and Z include heteroarylarylmethyl, arylheteroarylmethyl, and biphenylmethyl forming biphenylalanine residues, any of which is also optionally substituted with one or more, hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, arylalkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, alkenyl, alkynyl, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, nitro, cyano, amino, acylamino, azido, guanidino, amidino, carboxyl, carboxamido, carboxamido alkyl, formyl, acyl, carboxyl alkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, arylalkyloxy, heteroaryloxy, heterocycleoxy, acyloxy, mercapto, mercapto alkyl, mercaptoaryl, mercapto acyl, halo, cyano, nitro
• inventions include isolated polypeptides where the other substitution at the ⁇ -carbon of Y is substituted with H, methyl, or ethyl; and where the other substitution at the ⁇ -carbon of Z is substituted with H, methyl, or ethyl.
• X 1 is naturally or non-naturally occurring amino acid residue in which one of the substitutions at the ⁇ -carbon is a primary substituent selected from the group consisting of heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylkalkyl and arylalkyl, said primary substituent optionally being substituted with secondary substituent selected from heteroaryl or heterocyclyl; and in which the other substitution at the ⁇ -carbon is H or alkyl;
• X 2 is naturally or nonnaturally occurring amino acid residue in which one of the substitutions at the ⁇ -carbon is an alkyl or cycloalkyl where the alkyl group may optionally form a ring with the nitrogen of X 2 ; and wherein the other substitution at the ⁇ -carbon is H or alkyl;
• X 3 is a naturally or nonnaturally occurring amino acid residue in which one of the substitutions at the ⁇ -carbon is a carboxyalkyl, bis-carboxyalkyl, sulfonyl
• X 1 is His, D-His, N-Methyl-His, D-N-Methyl-His, 4-ThiazolylAla, or D-4-ThiazolylAla
• X 2 is Ala, D-Ala, Pro, Gly, D-Ser, D-Asn, Nma, D-Nma, 4-ThioPro, 4-Hyp, L-2-Pip, L-2-Azt, Aib, S- or R-Iva and Acc3
• X 3 is Glu, N-Methyl-Glu, Asp, D-Asp, His, Gla, Adp, Cys, or 4-ThiazolyAla
• X 4 is Gly, His, Lys, or Asp
• X 5 is Thr, D-Thr, Nle, Met, Nva, or L-Aoc
• X 6 is Phe, Tyr, Tyr(Bzl), Tyr(3-NO 2 ), Nle, Trp, P
• Additional embodiments include those where Y is Bip, D-Bip, L-Bip(2-Me), D-Bip(2-Me), L-Bip(2′-Me), L-Bip(2-Et), D-Bip(2-Et), L-Bip(3-Et), L-Bip(4-Et), L-Bip(2-n-propyl), L-Bip(2-n-propyl, 4-OMe), L-Bip(2-n-propyl,2′-Me), L-Bip(3-Me), L-Bip(4-Me), L-Bip(2,3-di-Me), L-Bip(2,4-di-Me), L-Bip(2,6-di-Me), L-Bip(2,4-di-Et), L-Bip(2-Me, 2′-Me), L-Bip(2-Et, 2′-Me
• X 1 is an R group, an R—C(O) (amide) group, a carbamate group RO—C(O), a urea R 4 R 5 N—C(O), a sulfonamido R—SO 2 , or a R 4 R 5 N—SO 2 ;
• R is H, C 1-12 alkyl, C 3-10 cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, aryloxyalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroaryloxyalkyl, or heteroarylalkoxyalkyl; and where R 4 and R 5 are each independently H, C 1-12 alkyl, C 3-10 cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, aryloxyalkyl
• X 1 (where applicable), X 2 , and X 3 are N—H or N-alkylated, (e.g., N-methylated) amino acid residues.
• the polypeptide may be a 10-mer to 15-mer and capable of binding to and activating the GLP-1 receptor.
• NaI naphthylalanine
• pGly pentylglycine
• t-BuG t-butylglycine
• TPro thioproline
• HPro homoproline
• NmA N-methylalanine
• Cya cysteic acid
• Thi ⁇ 2-Thienyl-Ala
• hSer homoserine
• Aib ⁇ -aminoisobutyric acid
• Bip biphenylalanine
• Nle norleucine
• Ahx 2-aminohexanoic acid
• Nva node
• the compounds of the invention can include leptin and leptin derivatives.
• Leptin is an adipokine, and thus the proteins or peptides used in the invention can include an adipokine or an analog thereof.
• Adipokines include adiponectin, leptin, and resistin.
• Adiponectins include human, mouse, and rat adiponectin.
• Leptins include leptin (116-130), leptin (22-56), leptin (57-92), leptin (93-105), LY396623, meterleptin, murine leptin analog, pegylated leptin, and methionyl human leptin.
• Resistins include human, mouse, and rat resistin.
• the leptin may be a cleaved sequence or the full length protein.
• the polypeptide used in the invention may be any of these peptides or proteins or may be substantially identical to any of these peptides or proteins.
• Neurotensin is a 13 amino acid peptide found in the central nervous system and in the gastrointestinal tract. In brain, NT is associated with dopaminergic receptors and other neurotransmitter system. Peripheral NT acts as a paracrine and endocrine peptide on both the digestive and cardiovascular systems. To exert its biological effects in the brain NT has to be injected or delivered directly to the brain because NT does not cross the BBB and is rapidly degraded by peptidases following systematic administration.
• NT receptors Preclinical pharmacological studies, most of which involve direct injection of NT into the brain, strongly suggest that an agonist of NT receptors would be clinically useful for the treatment of neuropsychiatric conditions including psychosis, schizophrenia, Parkinson's disease, pain, and the abuse of psychostimulants.
• intraventricular injection of NT led to hypothermia and analgesia in antinociception experiments.
• the peptide therapeutic may be neurotensin or analog thereof.
• Human neurotensin is a thirteen amino acid peptide having the sequence QLYENKPRRPYIL.
• exemplary neurotensin analogs include (VIP-neurotensin) hybrid antagonist, acetylneurotensin(8-13), JMV 1193, KK13 peptide, neuromedin N, neuromedin N precursor, neurotensin(1-10), neurotensin(1-11), neurotensin(1-13), neurotensin(1-6), neurotensin(1-8), neurotensin(8-13), Asp(12)-neurotensin(8-13), Asp(13)-neurotensin(8-13), Lys(8)-neurotensin(8-13), N-methyl-Arg(8)-Lys(9)-neo-Trp(11)-neo-Leu(12)-neurotensin(8-13), neurotensin(9-13), neurotensin 69 L,
• neurotensin analogs include NT64L [L-neo-Trp11]NT(8-13), NT72D [D-Lys9,D-neo-Trp11,tert-Leu12]NT(9-13), NT64D [D-neo-Trp11]NT(8-13), NT73L [D-Lys9,L-neo-Trp11]NT(9-13), NT65L [L-neo-Trp11, tert-Leu12]NT(8-13), NT73D [D-Lys9,D-neo-Trp11]NT(9-13), NT65D [D-neo-Trp11, tert-Leu12]NT(8-13), NT74L [DAB9,L-neo-Trp11,tert-Leu12]NT(9-13), NT66L [D-Lys8, L-neo-Trp11, ter
• neurotensin analogs include those with modified amino acids (e.g., any of those described herein).
• the neurotensin analog may be selective for NTR1, NTR2, or NTR3 (e.g., may bind to or activate one of NTR1, NTR2, or NTR3 at least 2, 5, 10, 50, 100, 500, 1000, 5000, 10,000, 50,000, or 100,000 greater) as compared to at least one of the other NTR receptors or both.
• the peptide vector is attached to GDNF, a GDNF analog, a GDNF fragment, or a modified form thereof.
• the GDNF analog is a sequence substantially identical (e.g., at least 60%, 70%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, 99% identical) to GDNF, a GDNF analog, or to a fragment thereof.
• GDNF is secreted as a disulfide-linked homodimer, and is able to support survival of dopaminergic neurons, Purkinje cells, motoneurons, and sympathetic neurons.
• GDNF analogs or fragments having one or more of these activities may be used in the present invention, and activity of such analogs and fragments can be tested using any means known in the art.
• Human GDNF is expressed as a 211 amino acid protein (isoform 1); a 185 amino acid protein (isoform 2), and a 133 amino acid protein.
• Mature GDNF is a 134 amino acid sequence that includes amino acids 118-211 of isoform 1, amino acids 92-185 of isoform 2.
• Isoform 3 includes a transforming growth factor like domain from amino acids 40-133.
• the GDNF analog is a splice variant of GDNF.
• GDNF a splice variant of GDNF.
• Such proteins are described in PCT Publication No. WO 2009/053536, and include the pre-( ⁇ )pro-GDNF, pre-( ⁇ )pro-GDNF, and pre-( ⁇ )pro-GDNF splice variant, as well as the variants lacking the pre-pro region: ( ⁇ )pro-GDNF, ( ⁇ )pro-GDNF, and pre-( ⁇ )pro-GDNF.
• GDNF analogs are also described in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2009/0069230, which include a GDNF analog having the sequence: Xaa 1 -Pro-Xaa 3 -Pro-Xaa 5 -Xaa 6 -Xaa 7 -Xaa 8 (SEQ ID NO: 182) where Xaa 1 is Phe, Trp, or Tyr; Xaa 3 is Leu, Ala, Ile, or Val; Xaa 5 is Ala, Leu, Ile, or Val; Xaa 6 is Gly, is any amino acid residue of the D configuration or is absent; Xaa 7 is Lys, Arg, or His or is absent; and Xaa 8 is Arg, Lys, or His or is absent.
• Xaa represents an amino acid, which we may also refer to as an amino acid residue.
• the subscripts (here, the subscripts 1-8) represent the positions of each amino acid in the peptide sequence.
• Xaa 1 represents the first amino acid residue in a fragment of a GDNF precursor protein.
• the fragments of a GDNF precursor protein can have a sequence represented by (1) Phe-Pro-Xaa 3 -Pro-Xaa 5 -Xaa 6 -Xaa 7 -Xaa 8 (SEQ ID NO: 183), (e.g., Phe-Pro-Leu-Pro-Ala-Gly-Lys-Arg (SEQ ID NO: 151); (2) Xaa 1 -Pro-Leu-Pro-Xaa 5 -Xaa 6 -Xaa 7 -Xaa 8 (SEQ ID NO: 184); (3) Phe-Pro-Leu-Pro-Xaa 5 -Xaa 6 -Xaa 7 -Xaa 8 (SEQ ID NO: 152); (4) Xaa 1 -Pro-Xaa 3 -Pro-Ala-Xaa 6 -Xaa 7 -Xaa 8 (SEQ ID NO: 185); (5) Phe-Pro-Xaa 3 -Pro-A
• the fragment of a GDNF precursor protein can be a fragment or portion of a GDNF precursor protein conforming to Formula I, where Xaa 1 is Phe, Xaa 3 is Leu, Xaa 5 is Ala, Xaa 6 is Gly, Xaa 7 is Lys and Xaa 8 is Arg (i.e., Phe-Pro-Leu-Pro-Ala-Gly-Lys-Arg). At least one (e.g., one, two, or three) of the amino acid residues represented by Formula I can be absent. For example, Xaa 6 , Xaa 7 , and/or Xaa 8 can be absent.
• the fragment of a GDNF precursor protein or the biologically active variants can have, or can include, a sequence of amino acid residues conforming to the amino acid sequence:
• Xaa 3 is Glu or Asp
• Xaa 4 is Ala, Gly, Ile, Leu, Met, or Val
• Xaa 6 is Ala, Gly, Ile, Leu, Met, or Val
• Xaa 7 is Glu or Asp
• Xaa 8 is Asp or Glu
• Xaa 9 is Arg, His, or Lys
• Xaa 10 is Ser, Asn, Gln, or Thr
• Xaa 11 is Leu, Ala, Gly, Ile, Leu, Met or Val
• Xaa 12 is Gly, is any amino acid residue of the D-configuration, or is not present
• Xaa 13 is Arg
• the fragments of a GDNF precursor protein or the biologically active variants can have, or can include, a sequence of amino acid residues conforming to the amino acid sequence of Formula III: Xaa 1 -Xaa 2 -Xaa 3 -Xaa 4 -Xaa 5 -Xaa 6 -Xaa r Xaa 8 -Xaa 9 -Xaa 10 -Xaa 11 -Xaa 12 -Xaa t3 -Xaa 14 -Xaa 15 -Xaa 16 -Xaa 17 -Xaa 18 -Xaa 19 -Xaa 20 -Xaa 21 -Xaa 22 (SEQ ID NO: 191) (III).
• Xaa 1 and Xaa 2 are, independently, Arg, Lys, or His or are absent;
• Xaa 3 is Glu or Asp;
• Xaa 4 is Arg, Lys, or His;
• Xaa 5 is Asn, Gln, Ser, or Thr;
• Xaa 6 is Arg, Lys, or His;
• Xaa 7 is Gln, Asn, Ser, or Thr;
• Xaa 8 , Xaa 9 , Xaa 10 , and Xaa 11 are, independently, Ala, Gly, Ile, Leu, Met, or Val;
• Xaa 12 is Asn, Gln, Ser, or Thr;
• Xaa 13 is Pro or Ser;
• Xaa 14 is Glu or Asp;
• Xaa 15 is Asn, Gln, Ser, or Thr;
• Xaa 16 is Ser, Asn, Gln, or
• An exemplary peptide conforming to Formula III can have the sequence Arg-Arg-Glu-Arg-Asn-Arg-Gln-Ala-Ala-Ala-Asn-Pro-Glu-Asn-Ser-Arg-Gly-Lys-Gly-Arg-Arg (SEQ ID NO: 192).
• GDNF analogs are described in PCT Publication No. WO 2008/069876. These analogs include ERNRQAAAANPENSRGK-amide (SEQ ID NO : 200); FPLPA-amide (SEQ ID NO: 194); and PPEAPAEDRSL-amide (SEQ ID NO: 195).
• GDNF analogs are described in PCT Publication No. WO 2007/019860.
• the analogs include those having the formula: X a -(x)-X b -X c -X d -X f (SEQ ID NO: 193) where X a is D, E, A or G, (x) is a sequence of 2-3 amino acid residues or a single amino acid residue selected from the group consisting of amino acid residues A, D, E, G, I, K, L, P, Q, S, T and V, X b is amino acid residue Y or H, or a hydrophobic amino acid residue, and at least one of X c , X d , or X f is a charged or hydrophobic amino acid residue.
• the analog may be 6-22 amino acids in length.
• GDNF analogs are described in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2006/0258576. These analogs include FPLPA-amide, (SEQ ID NO: 194), PPEAPAEDRSL-amide (SEQ ID NO: 195), LLEAPAEDHSL-amide (SEQ ID NO: 196), SPDKQMAVLP (SEQ ID NO: 197), SPDKQAAALP (SEQ ID NO: 198), SPDKQTPIFS (SEQ ID NO: 199), ERNRQAAAANPENSRGK-amide (SEQ ID NO: 200), ERNRQAAAASPENSRGK-amide (SEQ ID NO: 201), and ERNRQSAATNVENSSKK-amide (SEQ ID NO: 202).
• FPLPA-amide FPLPA-amide
• PPEAPAEDRSL-amide SEQ ID NO: 195
• LLEAPAEDHSL-amide SEQ ID NO: 196
• SPDKQMAVLP SEQ ID NO: 197
• SPDKQAAALP SEQ ID
• Additional GDNF analogs can include functional fragments (e.g., any of the fragments described herein), peptides having any of the modifications described herein, or peptidomimetics thereof. Activity of such analogs and fragments can be tested using any means known in the art.
• BDNF Brain-Derived Neurotrophic Factor
• the compounds of the invention may be or may include BDNF, BDNF analogs, or BDNF fragments.
• BDNF is glycoprotein of the nerve growth factor family of proteins.
• the protein is encoded as a 247 amino acid polypeptide (isoform A), a 255 amino acid polypeptide (isoform B), a 262 amino acid polypeptide (isoform C), a 276 amino acid polypeptide (isoform D), a 329 amino acid polylpeptide (isoform E).
• the mature 119 amino acid glycoprotein is processed from the larger precursor to yield a neutrophic factor that promotes the survival of neuronal cell populations.
• the mature protein includes amino acids 129-247 of the isoform A preprotein, amino acids 137-255 of the isoform B preprotein, amino acids 144-162 of isoform C preprotein, amino acids 158-276 of the isoform D preprotein, or amino acids 211 (or 212)-329 of the isoform E preprotein.
• BDNF acts at the TrkB receptor and at low affinity nerve growth factor receptor (LNGFR or p75). BDNF is capable of supporting neuronal survival of existing neurons and can also promote growth and differentiation of new neurons.
• the BDNF fragments or analogs of the invention may have any of the aforementioned activities. Activity of such analogs and fragments can be tested using any means known in the art.
• BDNF analogs are described in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2004/0072291, which include those having a substitution of A, C, D, E, G, H, K, N P, Q R, S, or T at one more positions selected from the group consisting of 10, 16, 20, 29, 31, 36, 38, 39, 42, 44, 49, 52, 53, 54, 61, 63, 71, 76, 86, 87, 90, 92, 98, 100, 102, 103, and 105. Additional substitutions are described in Table 3 below.
• BDNF analogs are also described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,800,607, which describes BDNF modified with 1-acyl-glycerol.
• These analogs include a modified BDNF, where is the compound of the formula: A(X—B) n where A is a residue of brain-derived neurotrophic factor, B is a residue of a 1-acyl-glycerol derivative having a hydroxyl group at the 2-position of the glycerol moiety, which is prepared by removing a hydrogen atom from the hydroxyl group, X is a chemical cross-linkage, and m is an average number of the introduction and is not less than about 0.5; (3) A modified BDNF according to the above (2), wherein X is a group of the formula (2):
• R 1 is an alkylene group, or a group of the formula (3):
• R 2 and R 3 are independently an alkylene group; (4) A modified BDNF according to the above (2), wherein the 1-acyl-glycerol derivative is 1-acyl-glycero-3-phosphoryl choline, 1-acyl-glycero-3-phosphoryl serine, or 1-acyl-grycero-3-phosphoryl ethylamine; (5) A modified BDNF according to the above (2), wherein B is a 1-acyl-glycero-3-phosphoryl choline residue of the formula (4):
• R 4 is an acyl group, a 1-acyl-glycero-3-phosphoryl serine residue of the formula (5):
• R 4 is an acyl group, or a 1-acyl-glycero-phosphoryl ethylamine residue of the formula (6):
• R 4 is an acyl group
• B is a group of the formula (4):
• R 4 is an acyl group
• (7) A modified BDNF according to any one of the above (2), (3), (4), (5) and (6), where the acyl group is an alkanoyl group having 8 to 30 carbon atoms
• (8) A modified BDNF according to any one of the above (2), (3), (4), (5), (6) and (7), where the acyl group is palmitoyl group
• (9) A modified BDNF according to any one of the above (2), (3), (4), (5), (6), (7) and (8), where m is in the range of from about 1 to about 6;
• (11) A modified BDNF according to the above (10), where R 1 is a straight chain alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms;
• (12) A modified BDNF according to the above (10), where R 1 is trimethylene.
• BDNF analogs include those described in PCT Publication No. WO 96/15146, which described conjugates of BDNF to water soluble polymers such as polyethylene glycol. Additional BDNF analogs can include functional fragments (e.g., any of the fragments described herein), peptides having any of the modifications described herein, or peptidomimetics thereof. Activity of such analogs can be tested using any method known in the art.
• the peptide vectors and peptide/polypeptide agents used in the invention may have a modified amino acid sequence.
• the modification does not destroy significantly a desired biological activity (e.g., ability to cross the BBB or agonist activity).
• the modification may reduce (e.g., by at least 5%, 10%, 20%, 25%, 35%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 90%, or 95%), may have no effect, or may increase (e.g., by at least 5%, 10%, 25%, 50%, 100%, 200%, 500%, or 1000%) the biological activity of the original polypeptide.
• the modified peptide or polypeptide may have or may optimize a characteristic of a polypeptide, such as in vivo stability, bioavailability, toxicity, immunological activity, immunological identity, and conjugation properties.
• Modifications include those by natural processes, such as posttranslational processing, or by chemical modification techniques known in the art. Modifications may occur anywhere in a polypeptide including the polypeptide backbone, the amino acid side chains and the amino- or carboxy-terminus. The same type of modification may be present in the same or varying degrees at several sites in a given polypeptide, and a polypeptide may contain more than one type of modification. Polypeptides may be branched as a result of ubiquitination, and they may be cyclic, with or without branching. Cyclic, branched, and branched cyclic polypeptides may result from posttranslational natural processes or may be made synthetically.
• modifications include pegylation, acetylation, acylation, addition of acetomidomethyl (Acm) group, ADP-ribosylation, alkylation, amidation, biotinylation, carbamoylation, carboxyethylation, esterification, covalent attachment to flavin, covalent attachment to a heme moiety, covalent attachment of a nucleotide or nucleotide derivative, covalent attachment of drug, covalent attachment of a marker (e.g., fluorescent or radioactive), covalent attachment of a lipid or lipid derivative, covalent attachment of phosphatidylinositol, cross-linking, cyclization, disulfide bond formation, demethylation, formation of covalent crosslinks, formation of cystine, formation of pyroglutamate, formylation, gamma-carboxylation, glycosylation, GPI anchor formation, hydroxylation, iodination, methylation, myristoylation, oxidation, proteolytic
• a modified polypeptide can also include an amino acid insertion, deletion, or substitution, either conservative or non-conservative (e.g., D-amino acids, desamino acids) in the polypeptide sequence (e.g., where such changes do not substantially alter the biological activity of the polypeptide).
• conservative or non-conservative e.g., D-amino acids, desamino acids
• the addition of one or more cysteine residues to the amino or carboxy terminus of any of the polypeptides of the invention can facilitate conjugation of these polypeptides by, e.g., disulfide bonding.
• Angiopep-1 (SEQ ID NO:67), Angiopep-2 (SEQ ID NO:97), or Angiopep-7 (SEQ ID NO:112) can be modified to include a single cysteine residue at the amino-terminus (SEQ ID NOS: 71, 113, and 115, respectively) or a single cysteine residue at the carboxy-terminus (SEQ ID NOS: 72, 114, and 116, respectively).
• Amino acid substitutions can be conservative (i.e., wherein a residue is replaced by another of the same general type or group) or non-conservative (i.e., wherein a residue is replaced by an amino acid of another type).
• a non-naturally occurring amino acid can be substituted for a naturally occurring amino acid (i.e., non-naturally occurring conservative amino acid substitution or a non-naturally occurring non-conservative amino acid substitution).
• Polypeptides made synthetically can include substitutions of amino acids not naturally encoded by DNA (e.g., non-naturally occurring or unnatural amino acid).
• non-naturally occurring amino acids include D-amino acids, an amino acid having an acetylaminomethyl group attached to a sulfur atom of a cysteine, a pegylated amino acid, the omega amino acids of the formula NH 2 (CH 2 ) n COOH wherein n is 2-6, neutral nonpolar amino acids, such as sarcosine, t-butyl alanine, t-butyl glycine, N-methyl isoleucine, and norleucine.
• Phenylglycine may substitute for Trp, Tyr, or Phe; citrulline and methionine sulfoxide are neutral nonpolar, cysteic acid is acidic, and ornithine is basic. Proline may be substituted with hydroxyproline and retain the conformation conferring properties.
• Analogs may be generated by substitutional mutagenesis and retain the biological activity of the original polypeptide. Examples of substitutions identified as “conservative substitutions” are shown in Table 4. If such substitutions result in a change not desired, then other type of substitutions, denominated “exemplary substitutions” in Table 4, or as further described herein in reference to amino acid classes, are introduced and the products screened.
• Substantial modifications in function or immunological identity are accomplished by selecting substitutions that differ significantly in their effect on maintaining (a) the structure of the polypeptide backbone in the area of the substitution, for example, as a sheet or helical conformation. (b) the charge or hydrophobicity of the molecule at the target site, or (c) the bulk of the side chain.
• Naturally occurring residues are divided into groups based on common side chain properties:
• Trp Tryptophan
• Tyrosine Tyrosine
• Phe Phenylalanine
• Histidine His
• peptidomimetics or polypeptide analogs are also encompassed by the present invention and can form the peptide vectors or peptide/polypeptide agents used in the compounds of the invention.
• Polypeptide analogs are commonly used in the pharmaceutical industry as non-peptide drugs with properties analogous to those of the template polypeptide.
• the non-peptide compounds are termed “peptide mimetics” or peptidomimetics (Fauchere et al., Infect. Immun. 54:283-287, 1986 and Evans et al., J. Med. Chem. 30:1229-1239, 1987).
• Peptide mimetics that are structurally related to therapeutically useful peptides or polypeptides may be used to produce an equivalent or enhanced therapeutic or prophylactic effect.
• peptidomimetics are structurally similar to the paradigm polypeptide (i.e., a polypeptide that has a biological or pharmacological activity) such as naturally-occurring receptor-binding polypeptides, but have one or more peptide linkages optionally replaced by linkages such as —CH 2 NH—, —CH 2 S—, —CH 2 —CH 2 —, —CH ⁇ CH—(cis and trans), —CH 2 SO—, —CH(OH)CH 2 —, —COCH 2 — etc., by methods well known in the art (Spatola, Peptide Backbone Modifications, Vega Data, 1:267, 1983; Spatola et al., Life Sci.
• polypeptide mimetics may have significant advantages over naturally occurring polypeptides including more economical production, greater chemical stability, enhanced pharmacological properties (e.g., half-life, absorption, potency, efficiency), reduced antigenicity, and others.
• peptide vectors described herein may efficiently cross the BBB or target particular cell types (e.g., those described herein), their effectiveness may be reduced by the presence of proteases. Likewise, the effectiveness of the peptide/polypeptide agents used in the invention may be similarly reduced.
• Serum proteases have specific substrate requirements, including L-amino acids and peptide bonds for cleavage.
• exopeptidases which represent the most prominent component of the protease activity in serum, usually act on the first peptide bond of the polypeptide and require a free N-terminus (Powell et al., Pharm. Res. 10:1268-1273, 1993). In light of this, it is often advantageous to use modified versions of polypeptides.
• the modified polypeptides retain the structural characteristics of the original L-amino acid polypeptides, but advantageously are not readily susceptible to cleavage by protease and/or exopeptidases.
• a polypeptide derivative or peptidomimetic as described herein may be all L-, all D-, or mixed D, L polypeptides.
• the presence of an N-terminal or C-terminal D-amino acid increases the in vivo stability of a polypeptide because peptidases cannot utilize a D-amino acid as a substrate (Powell et al., Pharm. Res. 10:1268-1273, 1993).
• Reverse-D polypeptides are polypeptides containing D-amino acids, arranged in a reverse sequence relative to a polypeptide containing L-amino acids.
• the C-terminal residue of an L-amino acid polypeptide becomes N-terminal for the D-amino acid polypeptide, and so forth.
• Reverse D-polypeptides retain the same tertiary conformation and therefore the same activity, as the L-amino acid polypeptides, but are more stable to enzymatic degradation in vitro and in vivo, and thus have greater therapeutic efficacy than the original polypeptide (Brady and Dodson, Nature 368:692-693, 1994 and Jameson et al., Nature 368:744-746, 1994).
• constrained polypeptides including a consensus sequence or a substantially identical consensus sequence variation may be generated by methods well known in the art (Rizo et al., Ann. Rev. Biochem. 61:387-418, 1992).
• constrained polypeptides may be generated by adding cysteine residues capable of forming disulfide bridges and, thereby, resulting in a cyclic polypeptide.
• Cyclic polypeptides have no free N- or C-termini. Accordingly, they are not susceptible to proteolysis by exopeptidases, although they are, of course, susceptible to endopeptidases, which do not cleave at polypeptide termini.
• amino acid sequences of the polypeptides with N-terminal or C-terminal D-amino acids and of the cyclic polypeptides are usually identical to the sequences of the polypeptides to which they correspond, except for the presence of N-terminal or C-terminal D-amino acid residue, or their circular structure, respectively.
• a cyclic derivative containing an intramolecular disulfide bond may be prepared by conventional solid phase synthesis while incorporating suitable S-protected cysteine or homocysteine residues at the positions selected for cyclization such as the amino and carboxy termini (Sah et al., J. Pharm. Pharmacol. 48:197, 1996).
• cyclization can be performed either (1) by selective removal of the S-protecting group with a consequent on-support oxidation of the corresponding two free SH-functions, to form a S—S bonds, followed by conventional removal of the product from the support and appropriate purification procedure or (2) by removal of the polypeptide from the support along with complete side chain de-protection, followed by oxidation of the free SH-functions in highly dilute aqueous solution.
• the cyclic derivative containing an intramolecular amide bond may be prepared by conventional solid phase synthesis while incorporating suitable amino and carboxyl side chain protected amino acid derivatives, at the position selected for cyclization.
• the cyclic derivatives containing intramolecular —S-alkyl bonds can be prepared by conventional solid phase chemistry while incorporating an amino acid residue with a suitable amino-protected side chain, and a suitable S-protected cysteine or homocysteine residue at the position selected for cyclization.
• Another effective approach to confer resistance to peptidases acting on the N-terminal or C-terminal residues of a polypeptide is to add chemical groups at the polypeptide termini, such that the modified polypeptide is no longer a substrate for the peptidase.
• One such chemical modification is glycosylation of the polypeptides at either or both termini.
• Certain chemical modifications, in particular N-terminal glycosylation have been shown to increase the stability of polypeptides in human serum (Powell et al., Pharm. Res. 10:1268-1273, 1993).
• N-terminal alkyl group consisting of a lower alkyl of from one to twenty carbons, such as an acetyl group, and/or the addition of a C-terminal amide or substituted amide group.
• the present invention includes modified polypeptides consisting of polypeptides bearing an N-terminal acetyl group and/or a C-terminal amide group.
• polypeptide derivatives containing additional chemical moieties not normally part of the polypeptide, provided that the derivative retains the desired functional activity of the polypeptide.
• examples of such derivatives include (1) N-acyl derivatives of the amino terminal or of another free amino group, wherein the acyl group may be an alkanoyl group (e.g., acetyl, hexanoyl, octanoyl) an aroyl group (e.g., benzoyl) or a blocking group such as F-moc (fluorenylmethyl-O—CO—); (2) esters of the carboxy terminal or of another free carboxy or hydroxyl group; (3) amide of the carboxy-terminal or of another free carboxyl group produced by reaction with ammonia or with a suitable amine; (4) phosphorylated derivatives; (5) derivatives conjugated to an antibody or other biological ligand and other types of derivatives.
• the acyl group may be an alkanoyl group (e.g
• polypeptide sequences which result from the addition of additional amino acid residues to the polypeptides described herein are also encompassed in the present invention. Such longer polypeptide sequences can be expected to have the same biological activity and specificity (e.g., cell tropism) as the polypeptides described above. While polypeptides having a substantial number of additional amino acids are not excluded, it is recognized that some large polypeptides may assume a configuration that masks the effective sequence, thereby preventing binding to a target (e.g., a member of the LRP receptor family such as LRP or LRP2). These derivatives could act as competitive antagonists. Thus, while the present invention encompasses polypeptides or derivatives of the polypeptides described herein having an extension, desirably the extension does not destroy the cell targeting activity of the polypeptides or its derivatives.
• a target e.g., a member of the LRP receptor family such as LRP or LRP2
• derivatives included in the present invention are dual polypeptides consisting of two of the same, or two different polypeptides, as described herein, covalently linked to one another either directly or through a spacer, such as by a short stretch of alanine residues or by a putative site for proteolysis (e.g., by cathepsin, see e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,126,249 and European Patent No. 495 049): Multimers of the polypeptides described herein consist of a polymer of molecules formed from the same or different polypeptides or derivatives thereof.
• the present invention also encompasses polypeptide derivatives that are chimeric or fusion proteins containing a polypeptide described herein, or fragment thereof, linked at its amino- or carboxy-terminal end, or both, to an amino acid sequence of a different protein.
• a chimeric or fusion protein may be produced by recombinant expression of a nucleic acid encoding the protein.
• a chimeric or fusion protein may contain at least 6 amino acids shared with one of the described polypeptides which desirably results in a chimeric or fusion protein that has an equivalent or greater functional activity.
• non-peptidyl compounds generated to replicate the backbone geometry and pharmacophore display (peptidomimetics) of the polypeptides described herein often possess attributes of greater metabolic stability, higher potency, longer duration of action, and better bioavailability.
• Peptidomimetics compounds can be obtained using any of the numerous approaches in combinatorial library methods known in the art, including biological libraries, spatially addressable parallel solid phase or solution phase libraries, synthetic library methods requiring deconvolution, the ‘one-bead one-compound’ library method, and synthetic library methods using affinity chromatography selection.
• the biological library approach is limited to peptide libraries, while the other four approaches are applicable to peptide, non-peptide oligomer, or small molecule libraries of compounds (Lam, Anticancer Drug Des. 12:145, 1997). Examples of methods for the synthesis of molecular libraries can be found in the art, for example, in: DeWitt et al. ( Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
• Libraries of compounds may be presented in solution (e.g., Houghten, Biotechniques 13:412-421, 1992) or on beads (Lam, Nature 354:82-84, 1991), chips (Fodor, Nature 364:555-556, 1993), bacteria or spores (U.S. Pat. No. 5,223,409), plasmids (Cull et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:1865-1869, 1992) or on phage (Scott and Smith, Science 249:386-390, 1990), or luciferase, and the enzymatic label detected by determination of conversion of an appropriate substrate to product.
• polypeptide as described herein can be isolated and purified by any number of standard methods including, but not limited to, differential solubility (e.g., precipitation), centrifugation, chromatography (e.g., affinity, ion exchange, and size exclusion), or by any other standard techniques used for the purification of peptides, peptidomimetics, or proteins.
• differential solubility e.g., precipitation
• centrifugation e.g., centrifugation
• chromatography e.g., affinity, ion exchange, and size exclusion
• the functional properties of an identified polypeptide of interest may be evaluated using any functional assay known in the art. Desirably, assays for evaluating downstream receptor function in intracellular signaling are used (e.g., cell proliferation).
• the peptidomimetics compounds of the present invention may be obtained using the following three-phase process: (1) scanning the polypeptides described herein to identify regions of secondary structure necessary for targeting the particular cell types described herein; (2) using conformationally constrained dipeptide surrogates to refine the backbone geometry and provide organic platforms corresponding to these surrogates; and (3) using the best organic platforms to display organic pharmocophores in libraries of candidates designed to mimic the desired activity of the native polypeptide.
• the three phases are as follows. In phase 1, the lead candidate polypeptides are scanned and their structure abridged to identify the requirements for their activity. A series of polypeptide analogs of the original are synthesized.
• phase 2 the best polypeptide analogs are investigated using the conformationally constrained dipeptide surrogates.
• Indolizidin-2-one, indolizidin-9-one and quinolizidinone amino acids (I 2 aa, I 9 aa and Qaa respectively) are used as platforms for studying backbone geometry of the best peptide candidates.
• These and related platforms (reviewed in Halab et al., Biopolymers 55:101-122, 2000 and Hanessian et al., Tetrahedron 53:12789-12854, 1997) may be introduced at specific regions of the polypeptide to orient the pharmacophores in different directions.
• Biological evaluation of these analogs identifies improved lead polypeptides that mimic the geometric requirements for activity.
• phase 3 the platforms from the most active lead polypeptides are used to display organic surrogates of the pharmacophores responsible for activity of the native peptide.
• the pharmacophores and scaffolds are combined in a parallel synthesis format. Derivation of polypeptides and the above phases can be accomplished by other means using methods known in the art.
• Structure function relationships determined from the polypeptides, polypeptide derivatives, peptidomimetics or other small molecules described herein may be used to refine and prepare analogous molecular structures having similar or better properties. Accordingly, the compounds of the present invention also include molecules that share the structure, polarity, charge characteristics and side chain properties of the polypeptides described herein.
• peptides and peptidomimetics screening assays which are useful for identifying compounds for targeting an agent to particular cell types (e.g., those described herein).
• the assays of this invention may be developed for low-throughput, high-throughput, or ultra-high throughput screening formats.
• Assays of the present invention include assays amenable to automation.
• the compounds of the invention can be used to treat a variety of diseases and conditions. Because the compounds of the invention are able to cross the BBB or enter particular cell types, treatments of neurological disorders, including neurodegenerative diseases and cancer, can be enhanced using the multimers of the invention.
• Compounds of the invention including anticancer agents may be used to treat any brain or central nervous system disease (e.g., a brain cancer such as glioblastoma, astrocytoma, glioma, meduloblastoma, and oligodendroma, neuroglioma, ependymoma, and meningioma).
• a brain cancer such as glioblastoma, astrocytoma, glioma, meduloblastoma, and oligodendroma, neuroglioma, ependymoma, and meningioma.
• Compounds that are efficiently transported to the liver, lung, kidney, spleen or muscle e.g., AngioPep-1 through AngioPep-7) and therefore may also be used, in conjunction with an appropriate therapeutic agent, to treat a disease associated with these tissues (e.g., a cancer such as hepatocellular carcinoma, liver cancer, small cell carcinoma (e.g., oat cell cancer), mixed small cell/large cell carcinoma, combined small cell carcinoma, and metastatic tumors.
• Metastatic tumors can originate from cancer of any tissue, including breast cancer, colon cancer, prostate cancer, sarcoma, bladder cancer, neuroblastoma, Wilm's tumor, lymphoma, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, and certain T-cell lymphomas).
• Additional exemplary cancers that may be treated using a composition of the invention include hepatocellular carcinoma, breast cancer, cancers of the head and neck including various lymphomas such as mantle cell lymphoma, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, adenoma, squamous cell carcinoma, laryngeal carcinoma, cancers of the retina, cancers of the esophagus, multiple myeloma, ovarian cancer, uterine cancer, melanoma, colorectal cancer, bladder cancer, prostate cancer, lung cancer (including non-small cell lung carcinoma), pancreatic cancer, cervical cancer, head and neck cancer, skin cancers, nasopharyngeal carcinoma, liposarcoma, epithelial carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma, gallbladder adenocarcinoma, parotid adenocarcinoma, endometrial sarcoma, multidrug resistant cancers; and proliferative diseases and conditions, such as neovascularization
• Brain cancers that may be treated with vector that is transported efficiently across the BBB include astrocytoma, pilocytic astrocytoma, dysembryoplastic neuroepithelial tumor, oligodendrogliomas, ependymoma, glioblastoma multiforme, mixed gliomas, oligoastrocytomas, medulloblastoma, retinoblastoma, neuroblastoma, germinoma, and teratoma.
• the compounds of the invention including a GLP-1 agoinst can be used in any therapeutic application where a GLP-1 agonist activity in the brain, or in a particular tissues, is desired.
• GLP-1 agonist activity is associated with stimulation of insulin secretion (i.e., to act as an incretin hormone) and inhibition glucagon secretion, thereby contributing to limit postprandial glucose excursions.
• GLP-1 agonists can also inhibit gastrointestinal motility and secretion, thus acting as an enterogastrone and part of the “ileal brake” mechanism.
• GLP-1 also appears to be a physiological regulator of appetite and food intake.
• GLP-1 and GLP-1 receptor agonists can be used for therapy of metabolic disorders, as reviewed in, e.g., Kinzig et al., J Neurosci 23:6163-6170, 2003.
• Such disorders include obesity, hyperglycemia, dyslipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, syndrome X, insulin resistance, IGT, diabetic dyslipidemia, hyperlipidemia, a cardiovascular disease, and hypertension.
• GLP-1 is also has neurological effects including sedative or anti-anxiolytic effects, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,846,937.
• GLP-1 agonists can be used in the treatment of anxiety, aggression, psychosis, seizures, panic attacks, hysteria, or sleep disorders.
• GLP-1 agonists can also be used to treat Alzheimer's disease, as GLP-1 agonists have been shown to protect neurons against amyloid- ⁇ peptide and glutamate-induced apoptosis (Perry et al., Curr Alzheimer Res 2:377-85, 2005).
• GLP-1 agonists include improving learning, enhancing neuroprotection, and alleviating a symptom of a disease or disorder of the central nervous system, e.g., through modulation of neurogenesis, and e.g., Parkinson's Disease, Alzheimer's Disease, Huntington's Disease, ALS, stroke, ADD, and neuropsychiatric syndromes (U.S. Pat. No. 6,969,702 and U.S. Patent Application No. 2002/0115605). Stimulation of neurogenesis using GLP-1 agonists has been described, for example, in Bertilsson et al., J Neurosci Res 86:326-338, 2008.
• Still other therapeutic uses include converting liver stem/progenitor cells into functional pancreatic cells (U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2005/0053588); preventing beta-cell deterioration (U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,259,233 and 6,569,832) and stimulation of beta-cell proliferation (U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2003/0224983); treating obesity (U.S. Pat. No. 7,211,557); suppressing appetite and inducing satiety (U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2003/0232754); treating irritable bowel syndrome (U.S. Pat. No. 6,348,447); reducing the morbidity and/or mortality associated with myocardial infarction (U.S. Pat. No.
• 6,703,359 treating conditions or disorders associated with toxic hypervolemia, e.g., renal failure, congestive heart failure, nephrotic syndrome, cirrhosis, pulmonary edema, and hypertension (U.S. Pat. No. 6,703,359); inducing an inotropic response and increasing cardiac contractility (U.S. Pat. No. 6,703,359); treating polycystic ovary syndrome (U.S. Pat. No. 7,105,489); treating respiratory distress (U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2004/0235726); improving nutrition via a non-alimentary route, i.e., via intravenous, subcutaneous, intramuscular, peritoneal, or other injection or infusion (U.S. Pat.
• toxic hypervolemia e.g., renal failure, congestive heart failure, nephrotic syndrome, cirrhosis, pulmonary edema, and hypertension
• inducing an inotropic response and increasing cardiac contractility U.S. Pat
• Compounds of the invention that include leptin or a related molecule can be used to treat metabolic disorders, neurological diseases, as well as other indications.
• the compound of the invention is used to treat a metabolic disorder.
• a metabolic disorder include diabetes (type I or type II), obesity, hyperglycemia, dyslipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, syndrome X, insulin resistance, IGT, diabetic dyslipidemia, hyperlipidemia, a cardiovascular disease, and hypertension.
• Leptin decreases food intake and thus can be used to reduce weight and to treat diseases where reduced food intake or weight loss is beneficial.
• peptide vectors described herein are capable of transporting an agent across the BBB
• the compounds of the invention are also useful for the treatment of neurological diseases such as neurodegenerative diseases or other conditions of the central nervous system (CNS), the peripheral nervous system, or the autonomous nervous system (e.g., where neurons are lost or deteriorate).
• neurological diseases such as neurodegenerative diseases or other conditions of the central nervous system (CNS), the peripheral nervous system, or the autonomous nervous system (e.g., where neurons are lost or deteriorate).
• CNS central nervous system
• the peripheral nervous system e.g., a central nervous system
• the autonomous nervous system e.g., where neurons are lost or deteriorate.
• Many neurodegenerative diseases are characterized by ataxia (i.e., uncoordinated muscle movements) and/or memory loss.
• Neurodegenerative diseases include Alexander disease, Alper disease, Alzheimer's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS; i.e., Lou Gehrig's disease), ataxia telangiectasia, Batten disease ( Saintmeyer-Vogt-Sjogren-Batten disease), bovine spongiform encephalopathy (BSE), Canavan disease, Cockayne syndrome, corticobasal degeneration, Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease, Huntington's disease, HIV-associated dementia, Kennedy's disease, Krabbé disease, Lewy body dementia, Machado-Joseph disease (Spinocerebellar ataxia type 3), multiple sclerosis, multiple system atrophy, narcolepsy, neuroborreliosis, Parkinson's disease, Pelizaeus-Merzbacher disease, Pick's disease, primary lateral sclerosis, prion diseases, Refsum's disease, Schilder's disease (i.e., ad
• the compounds of the invention can also be used to treat diseases found in other organs or tissues.
• Angiopep-7 SEQ ID NO:112
• the compounds of the presents invention may also be used to treat genetic disorders, such as Down syndrome (i.e., trisomy 21), where down-regulation of particular gene transcripts may be useful.
• the compounds of the invention can be used in any appropriate therapeutic application where the activity of neurotensin activity is beneficial.
• NT is associated with dopaminergic receptors and other neurotransmitter systems.
• Peripheral NT acts as a paracrine and endocrine peptide on both the digestive and cardiovascular systems.
• Various therapeutic applications have been suggested for neurotensin, including psychiatric disorders, metabolic disorder, and pain. Because neurotensin has been shown to modulate neurotransmission in areas of the brain associated with schizophrenia, neurotensin and neurotensin receptor agonists have been proposed as antipsychotic agents.
• polypeptides described herein are capable of transporting an agent across the BBB
• the compounds of the invention are also useful for the treatment of neurological diseases such as neurodegenerative diseases or other conditions of the central nervous system (CNS), the peripheral nervous system, or the autonomous nervous system (e.g., where neurons are lost or deteriorate).
• Neurotensin has been suggested an antipsychotic therapy, and thus may be useful in the treatment of diseases such as schizophrenia and bipolar disorder.
• Many neurodegenerative diseases are characterized by ataxia (i.e., uncoordinated muscle movements) and/or memory loss.
• Neurodegenerative diseases include Alexander disease, Alper disease, Alzheimer's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS; i.e., Lou Gehrig's disease), ataxia telangiectasia, Batten disease ( Saintmeyer-Vogt-Sjogren-Batten disease), bovine spongiform encephalopathy (BSE), Canavan disease, Cockayne syndrome, corticobasal degeneration, Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease, Huntington's disease, HIV-associated dementia, Kennedy's disease, Krabbé disease, Lewy body dementia, Machado-Joseph disease (Spinocerebellar ataxia type 3), multiple sclerosis, multiple system atrophy, narcolepsy, neuroborreliosis, Parkinson's disease, Pelizaeus-Merzbacher disease, Pick's disease, primary lateral sclerosis, prion diseases, Refsum's disease, Schilder's disease (i.e., ad
• the compounds of the invention may be used to reduce the body temperature of a subject. Because reduction in body temperature has been shown to be beneficial in subjects who may be suffering from, or may have recently suffered from, a stroke, cerebral ischemia, cardiac ischemia, or a nerve injury such as a spinal cord injury, such a treatment would therefore be useful in reducing complications of these conditions.
• Neurotensin is also known to have analgesic effects.
• the compounds of the invention may be used to reduce pain in a subject.
• the subject may be suffering from an acute pain (e.g., selected from the group consisting of mechanical pain, heat pain, cold pain, ischemic pain, and chemical-induced pain).
• pain include peripheral or central neuropathic pain, inflammatory pain, migraine-related pain, headache-related pain, irritable bowel syndrome-related pain, fibromyalgia-related pain, arthritic pain, skeletal pain, joint pain, gastrointestinal pain, muscle pain, angina pain, facial pain, pelvic pain, claudication, postoperative pain, post traumatic pain, tension-type headache, obstetric pain, gynecological pain, or chemotherapy-induced pain.
• the metabolic disorder may be diabetes (e.g., Type I or Type II), obesity, diabetes as a consequence of obesity, hyperglycemia, dyslipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, syndrome X, insulin resistance, impaired glucose tolerance (IGT), diabetic dyslipidemia, hyperlipidemia, a cardiovascular disease, or hypertension.
• diabetes e.g., Type I or Type II
• diabetes as a consequence of obesity, hyperglycemia, dyslipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, syndrome X, insulin resistance, impaired glucose tolerance (IGT), diabetic dyslipidemia, hyperlipidemia, a cardiovascular disease, or hypertension.
• the subject may be overweight, obese, or bulimic.
• Neurotensin has also been suggested to be able to treat drug addiction or reduce drug abuse in subjects, particularly with psychostimulant.
• the compounds of the invention may be useful in treating addiction to or abuse of drugs such as amphetamine, methamphetamine, 3,4-methylenedioxymethamphetamine, nicotine, cocaine, methylphenidate, and arecoline.
• GDNF and BDNF-based compounds may be used to treat any disease or condition where enhancing neuronal survival (e.g., decreasing neuronal death rate) or increasing the rate of neuronal formation is beneficial.
• Such conditions include neurodegenerative disorders, e.g., a disorder selected from the group consisting of a polyglutamine expansion disorder (e.g., Huntington's disease (HD), dentatorubropallidoluysian atrophy, Kennedy's disease (also referred to as spinobulbar muscular atrophy), and spinocerebellar ataxia (e.g., type 1, type 2, type 3 (also referred to as Machado-Joseph disease), type 6, type 7, and type 17)), another trinucleotide repeat expansion disorder (e.g., fragile X syndrome, fragile XE mental retardation, Friedreich's ataxia, myotonic dystrophy, spinocerebellar ataxia type 8, and spinocerebellar ataxia type 12), Alexander disease
• the present invention also features pharmaceutical compositions that contain a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention.
• the composition can be formulated for use in a variety of drug delivery systems.
• One or more physiologically acceptable excipients or carriers can also be included in the composition for proper formulation.
• Suitable formulations for use in the present invention are found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences , Mack Publishing Company, Philadelphia, Pa., 17th ed., 1985.
• Langer Science 249:1527-1533, 1990).
• the pharmaceutical compositions are intended for parenteral, intranasal, topical, oral, or local administration, such as by a transdermal means, for prophylactic and/or therapeutic treatment.
• the pharmaceutical compositions can be administered parenterally (e.g., by intravenous, intramuscular, or subcutaneous injection), or by oral ingestion, or by topical application or intraarticular injection at areas affected by the vascular or cancer condition. Additional routes of administration include intravascular, intra-arterial, intratumor, intraperitoneal, intraventricular, intraepidural, as well as nasal, ophthalmic, intrascleral, intraorbital, rectal, topical, or aerosol inhalation administration.
• compositions for parenteral administration that include the above mention agents dissolved or suspended in an acceptable carrier, preferably an aqueous carrier, e.g., water, buffered water, saline, PBS, and the like.
• an acceptable carrier preferably an aqueous carrier
• the compositions may contain pharmaceutically acceptable auxiliary substances as required to approximate physiological conditions, such as pH adjusting and buffering agents, tonicity adjusting agents, wetting agents, detergents and the like.
• the invention also provides compositions for oral delivery, which may contain inert ingredients such as binders or fillers for the formulation of a tablet, a capsule, and the like.
• compositions for local administration which may contain inert ingredients such as solvents or emulsifiers for the formulation of a cream, an ointment, and the like.
• compositions may be sterilized by conventional sterilization techniques, or may be sterile filtered.
• the resulting aqueous solutions may be packaged for use as is, or lyophilized, the lyophilized preparation being combined with a sterile aqueous carrier prior to administration.
• the pH of the preparations typically will be between 3 and 11, more preferably between 5 and 9 or between 6 and 8, and most preferably between 7 and 8, such as 7 to 7.5.
• the resulting compositions in solid form may be packaged in multiple single dose units, each containing a fixed amount of the above-mentioned agent or agents, such as in a sealed package of tablets or capsules.
• the composition in solid form can also be packaged in a container for a flexible quantity, such as in a squeezable tube designed for a topically applicable cream or ointment.
• compositions containing an effective amount can be administered for prophylactic or therapeutic treatments.
• compositions can be administered to a subject with a clinically determined predisposition or increased susceptibility to a neurological or neurodegenerative disease.
• Compositions of the invention can be administered to the subject (e.g., a human) in an amount sufficient to delay, reduce, or preferably prevent the onset of clinical disease.
• compositions are administered to a subject (e.g., a human) already suffering from disease (e.g., a neurological condition or neurodegenerative disease) in an amount sufficient to cure or at least partially arrest the symptoms of the condition and its complications.
• an amount adequate to accomplish this purpose is defined as a “therapeutically effective amount,” an amount of a compound sufficient to substantially improve some symptom associated with a disease or a medical condition.
• a therapeutically effective amount an amount of a compound sufficient to substantially improve some symptom associated with a disease or a medical condition.
• an agent or compound that decreases, prevents, delays, suppresses, or arrests any symptom of the disease or condition would be therapeutically effective.
• a therapeutically effective amount of an agent or compound is not required to cure a disease or condition but will provide a treatment for a disease or condition such that the onset of the disease or condition is delayed, hindered, or prevented, or the disease or condition symptoms are ameliorated, or the term of the disease or condition is changed or, for example, is less severe or recovery is accelerated in an individual.
• Amounts effective for this use may depend on the severity of the disease or condition and the weight and general state of the subject, but generally range from about 0.05 ⁇ g to about 1000 ⁇ g (e.g., 0.5-100 ⁇ g) of an equivalent amount of the agent per dose per subject.
• Suitable regimes for initial administration and booster administrations are typified by an initial administration followed by repeated doses at one or more hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly intervals by a subsequent administration.
• the total effective amount of an agent present in the compositions of the invention can be administered to a mammal as a single dose, either as a bolus or by infusion over a relatively short period of time, or can be administered using a fractionated treatment protocol, in which multiple doses are administered over a more prolonged period of time (e.g., a dose every 4-6, 8-12, 14-16, or 18-24 hours, or every 2-4 days, 1-2 weeks, once a month).
• a fractionated treatment protocol in which multiple doses are administered over a more prolonged period of time (e.g., a dose every 4-6, 8-12, 14-16, or 18-24 hours, or every 2-4 days, 1-2 weeks, once a month).
• continuous intravenous infusion sufficient to maintain therapeutically effective concentrations in the blood are contemplated.
• the therapeutically effective amount of one or more agents present within the compositions of the invention and used in the methods of this invention applied to mammals can be determined by the ordinarily-skilled artisan with consideration of individual differences in age, weight, and the condition of the mammal. Because certain compounds of the invention exhibit an enhanced ability to cross the BBB, the dosage of the compounds of the invention can be lower than (e.g., less than or equal to about 90%, 75%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 15%, 12%, 10%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.5%, or 0.1% of) the equivalent dose of required for a therapeutic effect of the unconjugated agonist.
• the agents of the invention are administered to a subject (e.g. a mammal, such as a human) in an effective amount, which is an amount that produces a desirable result in a treated subject (e.g., preservation of neurons, new neuronal growth).
• an effective amount which is an amount that produces a desirable result in a treated subject (e.g., preservation of neurons, new neuronal growth).
• Therapeutically effective amounts can also be determined empirically by those of skill in the art.
• the subject may also receive an agent in the range of about 0.05 to 1,000 ⁇ g equivalent dose as compared to unconjugated agent per dose one or more times per week (e.g., 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7 or more times per week), 0.1 to 2,500 (e.g., 2,000, 1,500, 1,000, 500, 100, 10, 1, 0.5, or 0.1) ⁇ g dose per week.
• a subject may also receive an agent of the composition in the range of 0.1 to 3,000 ⁇ g per dose once every two or three weeks.
• compositions of the invention including an effective amount can be carried out with dose levels and pattern being selected by the treating physician.
• the dose and administration schedule can be determined and adjusted based on the severity of the disease or condition in the subject, which may be monitored throughout the course of treatment according to the methods commonly practiced by clinicians or those described herein.
• the compounds of the present invention may be used in combination with either conventional methods of treatment or therapy or may be used separately from conventional methods of treatment or therapy.
• compositions according to the present invention may be comprised of a combination of a compound of the present invention in association with a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, as described herein, and another therapeutic or prophylactic agent known in the art.
• ESI-TOF MS analysis showed the presence of TMEA cross-linked monomer, dimer, and trimer in solution. After evaporation of methanol and lyophilization, the dimer TMEA-(AN2) 2 was obtained as a pure white solid (119 mg, 50%, purity>98%). The mass was checked by ESI-TOF MS (Bruker Daltonics).
• Angiopep-2-Cys-NH 2 (H-TFFYGGSRGKRNNFKTEEYC-NH 2 ; SEQ ID NO:114) was synthesized using solid phase peptide synthesis (SPPS). G 6 S 7 is coupled using pseudoproline dipeptide GS to optimize the synthesis. SPPS was carried out on a Protein Technologies, Inc. Symphony® peptide synthesizer using Fmoc (9-fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl)amino-terminus protection.
• Angiopep-2-Cys-NH 2 (H-TFFYGGSRGKRNNFKTEECY-NH 2 ; SEQ ID NO:114) was synthesized on a 100- ⁇ mol scale using a 5-fold excess of Fmoc-amino acids (200 mM) relative to the resin. Coupling was performed from a Rink amide MBHA resin (with Nle) (0.40 mmol/g) for carboxyl-terminus amides using 1:1:2 amino acid/activator/NMM in DMF with HCTU (2-(1H-6-chlorobenzotriazol-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate) and NMM (N-methylmorpholine). Deprotection was carried out using 20% piperidine/DMF.
• Rink amide MBHA resin (with Nle) (0.40 mmol/g), Fmoc-amino acids and HCTU were purchased from ChemImpex, and the pseudoproline dipeptide GS was purchased from Novabiochem.
• Side protecting groups for amino acids were trityl (Trt) for cysteine and aspargine, (tBu) for glutamic acid, tyrosine, serine, and threonine, pentamethyldihydrobenzofuran-5-sulfonyl (Pbf) for arginine, and tButyloxycarbonyl (tBoc) for lysine.
• the SATP-AN2Cys-NH 2 was generated as follows. After deprotection of the last threonine residue, N-terminal S-acetylthiopropionic acyl groups were introduced by treating the free N-terminal amino peptide bound to the resin with a solution of SATP (N-succinimidyl S-acetylthiopropionate) (Pierce Biotechnology) (24.5 mg, 100 ⁇ mol, 1 eq. in 4 ml of DMF, 25 mM) for one hour at room temperature. The modification with SATP solution was repeated once for 1 h 30.
• SATP N-succinimidyl S-acetylthiopropionate
• Dimeric SATP-AN2-AN2 was produced as follows. MPA-AN2, AN2 vector activated by BMPS(N-[ ⁇ -Maleimidopropyloxy]succinimide ester), (120 mg, 39.4 umol, 1 eq., 80.25% peptide content) was dissolved in DMSO (2 ml). This solution was added to a solution of SATP-AN2-CysNH2 (100 mg, 39.4 ⁇ mol, 1 eq. in 2.5 ml of DMSO). Monitoring of the reaction was done with the analytical methods 1 and 2 (See chromatograms 4-5 in FIG. 3 ). The reaction (8.8 mM) allowed to proceed at room temperature for 30 minutes and filtered. The mixture was purified by RP-HPLC chromatography (Waters PrepLC 4000, See chromatograms 4-6 in FIGS. 3 and 4 and Table 9).
• the dimer SATP-AN2-AN2 was obtained as a pure white solid (39 mg, 20%, purity>98%).
• the mass was confirmed by ESI-TOF MS (Bruker Daltonics): calculated 4986.39. found 4986.42, m/z 1247.60 (+4), 998.08 (+5), 832.07 (+6), 713.35 (+7).
• SATP-AN2Cys-NH 2 Purification of SATP-AN2Cys-NH 2 was performed as follows using a Waters PrepLC 4000 with a Kromasil column (C18, 10 ⁇ m, 50 ⁇ 250 mm, 100 ⁇ ). Solution A was 0.1% FA in H 2 O; Solution B was 0.1% FA in MeOH, with a flow rate of 48 ml/min and gradient of 20-45% B. Purification results are shown in Table 9.
• SATP-AN2-AN2 Purification of SATP-AN2-AN2 was performed as follows using a Waters PrepLC 4000 with a BEH phenyl column (5 um, 19 ⁇ 150 mm, 135 ⁇ ). Solution A was 0.1% FA in H 2 O; Solution B was 0.1% FA in MeOH with a flow rate of 13 ml/min and a gradient of 35-50% B. Purification results are shown in Table 10.
• the conjugate was stored under nitrogen atmosphere, below ⁇ 20° C.
• Angiopep-1 dimer was prepared by incubating the Angiopep-1 peptide (SEQ ID NO:67) at 37° C. for 2 hours in phosphate buffered saline (PBS) at pH 8.5. This reaction resulted in formation of Angiopep-1 dimers joined by a disulfide bond through the cysteine amino acid on each protein ( FIG. 5 ).
• PBS phosphate buffered saline
• FIG. 6 Volume of brain parenchymal distribution was measured using the in situ brain perfusion assay ( FIG. 6 ).
• Great uptake volumes using the Angiopep-1 dimer were observed, especially at lower concentrations, as compared to monomeric Angiopep-2.
• Parenchymal uptake of the Angiopep-1 dimer and Angiopep-2 was also measured at various concentrations in situ ( FIG. 7 ).
• the Angiopep-1 dimer, especially at lower concentrations ( ⁇ 500 nmol) exhibited higher transport than the Angiopep-2 monomer.
• Angiopep-2 synthetic
• Angiopep-2 recombinant
• Transport of recombinant Angiopep-2 into diet-induced obese mice (DIO) was also tested ( FIG. 8 ). Transport of the dimers and trimers into brain was observed.
• Exendin-4-Angiopep-2 dimer was generated having the structure shown in FIG. 9A .
• the amine group in the C-terminal lysine of [Lys 39 ]Exendin-4 was conjugated to an Angiopep-2 dimer through an MHA linker at the N-terminal threonine of the first Angiopep-2 peptide.
• a N-succinimidyl-5-acetylthiopropionate (SATP) linker was attached to an Angiopep-2-Cys peptide at its N-terminus.
• the Angiopep-2-Cys peptide was conjugated to a second Angiopep-2 peptide, which had been modified to contain an MPA linker.
• the dimer was then linked to the [Lys 39 ]Exendin-4 through an MHA linker.
• a control molecule (Exen-S4) was also generated using a scrambed form of Angiopep-2 conjugated at its N-terminal to the cysteine of [Cys 32 ]Exendin-4 through an MHA linker ( FIG. 9B ).
• These conjugates were prepared as trifluoroacetate (TFA) salts.
• S4 scrambled Angiopep-2
• the experiments were performed as described in Example 2 above.
• mice were injected with a bolus containing a control, exendin-4, or the exendin-4-Angiopep-2 dimer conjugate. Mice receiving either exendin-4 or the conjugate exhibited reduced glycemia as compared to mice receiving the control ( FIG. 11 ).

Abstract

Description

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This Application is a U.S. National Stage Application of international patent application PCT/CA2010/001014, filed Jun. 30, 2010, which, in turn, claims benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/222,785, filed on Jul. 2, 2009, and U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/252,024, filed on Oct. 15, 2009.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

The invention relates to compounds including dimeric or multimeric peptide vectors and uses of such compounds.

The brain is shielded against potentially toxic substances by the presence of two barrier systems: the blood-brain barrier (BBB) and the blood-cerebrospinal fluid barrier (BCSFB). The BBB is considered to be the major route for the uptake of serum ligands since its surface area is approximately 5000-fold greater than that of BCSFB. The brain endothelium, which constitutes the BBB, represents the major obstacle for the use of potential drugs against many disorders of the CNS. As a general rule, only small lipophilic molecules may pass across the BBB, i.e., from circulating systemic blood to brain. Many drugs that have a larger size or higher hydrophobicity show promising results in animal studies for treating CNS disorders. Thus, peptide and protein therapeutics are generally excluded from transport from blood to brain, owing to the negligible permeability of the brain capillary endothelial wall to these drugs.

Therapy of brain diseases can be impaired by the inability of otherwise effective therapeutic agents to cross the BBB. Thus, new strategies for transporting agents into the brain are desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

We have now developed compounds containing dimeric or multimeric peptide vectors that are capable of crossing the blood-brain barrier (BBB) or entering particular cell types (e.g., liver, lung, spleen, kidney, and muscle) with enhanced efficiency. When these compounds are joined with (e.g., conjugated to) one or more agents, efficiency of transport across the BBB or into particular cell types is likewise enhanced. Accordingly, the present invention features multimeric peptide vectors optionally conjugated to an agent (e.g., a therapeutic agent), and use of such compounds in treatment and diagnosis of disease.

In a first aspect, the invention features a compound including the formula:
A¹-(Xⁿ-A^m)_n
where n is or is at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10; m is an integer from 2 to n+1; A¹ and each A^m are, independently, a peptide vector, e.g., any described herein such as one that includes an amino acid sequence substantially identical to a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOS:1-105 and 107-117 or a functional fragment thereof; and each Xⁿ is, independently, a linker joined to the adjacent peptide vectors. The compound may include the formula:
A¹-X¹-A²

In another aspect, the invention features a compound including the formula:

where A¹, A², each A^q, each A^r, and each A^s are, independently, peptide vector, e.g., any described herein such as one that includes a sequence substantially identical to a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOS:1-105 and 107-117 or a functional fragment thereof; A³ is a peptide vector including a sequence substantially identical to a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOS:1-105 and 107-117 or a functional fragment thereof or is absent; X, each X^q, each X^r, and each X^s are, independently, linkers that join peptide vectors; m, n, and p are, independently, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10; q is an integer from 4 to m+3; r is an integer from m+4 to m+n+3; and s is an integer from m+n+4 to m+n+p+3.

Any of the above compounds may be conjugated to one or more agents (e.g., any described herein), through one or more linkers or through one or more peptide vectors.

In another aspect, the invention features a compound of including the formula:

where A¹, X, and A² are as described above and B is an agent and is conjugated to the linker X. The invention also features a compound including the formula:

where A¹, X, and A² are as described above; B′ is an agent, B² and B³ are, independently, agents or are absent, Y¹ and Y² are, independently, linkers joining A¹ to B¹ and A² to B², respectively, where Y² is absent if B² is absent. The compound may include the formula:

In another aspect, the invention features a compound including (a) at least two peptide vectors, where each peptide vector independently includes an amino acid sequence substantially identical to a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOS:1-105 and 107-117, where the peptide vectors are joined by a linker; and (b) an agent conjugated to at least one of the peptide vectors or to the linker.

Any of the above compounds may include at least one of the peptide vectors including an amino acid sequence at least 70%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or 100% identical to a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO:1-105 and 107-117 (e.g., Angiopep-1 (SEQ ID NO:67), Angiopep-2 (SEQ ID NO:97), cys-Angiopep-2 (SEQ ID NO:113), Angiopep-2-cys (SEQ ID NO:114), and reversed Angiopep-2 (SEQ ID NO:117)). In compounds including an agent, the agent can be a therapeutic agent (e.g., any described herein, such as an agent selected from the group consisting of an anticancer agent, a therapeutic nucleic acid, a GLP-1 agonist, leptin or a leptin analog, neurotensin or a neurotensin analog, glial-derived neurotrophic factor (GDNF) or a GDNF analog, brain-derived neurotrophic factor (BDNF) or a BDNF analog), or an antibody. The anticancer agent may be paclitaxel (Taxol), vinblastine, vincristine, etoposide, doxorubicin, cyclophosphamide, docetaxel (Taxotere®), melphalan, and chlorambucil, abarelix, aldesleukin, alemtuzumab, alitertinoin, allopurinol, altretamine, amifostine, anakinra, anastrozole, arsenic trioxide, asparaginase, azacitidine, BCG Live, bevacuzimab, bexarotene, bleomycin, bleomycin, bortezombi, bortezomib, busulfan, busulfan, calusterone, capecitabine, carboplatin, carmustine, celecoxib, cetuximab, cisplatin, cladribine, clofarabine, cytarabine, dacarbazine, dactinomycin, actinomycin D, dalteparin, darbepoetin alfa, dasatinib, daunorubicin, daunomycin, decitabine, denileukin, denileukin diftitox, dexrazoxane, dromostanolone propionate, eculizumab, epirubicin , epoetin alfa, erlotinib, estramustine, exemestane, fentany, filgrastim, floxuridine, fludarabine, fluorouracil, 5-FU, fulvestrant, gefitinib, gemcitabine, gemtuzumab ozogamicin, goserelin, histrelin, hydroxyurea, ibritumomab tiuxetan, idarubicin, ifosfamide, imatinib, Interferon alfa-2b, irinotecan, lapatinib ditosylate, lenalidomide, letrozole, leucovorin, leuprolide, levamisole, lomustine, CCNU, meclorethamine (nitrogen mustard), megestrol, mercaptopurine (6-MP), mesna, methotrexate, methoxsalen, mitomycin C, mitotane, mitoxantrone, nandrolone phenpropionate, nelarabine, nofetumomab, oprelvekin, oxaliplatin, palifermin, pamidronate, panitumumab, pegademase, pegaspargase, pegfilgrastim, peginterferon alfa-2b, pemeterxed, pentostatin, pipobroman, plicamycin (mithramycin), porfimer, procarbazine, quinacrine, rasburicase, rituximab, sargramostim, sorafenib, streptozocin, sunitinib, talc, tamoxifen, temozolomide, teniposide (VM-26), testolactone, thalidomide, thioguanine (6-TG), thiotepa, thiotepa, thiotepa, topotecan, toremifene, Tositumomab/I-131 (tositumomab), trastuzumab, trastuzumab, tretinoin (ATRA), uracil mustard, vairubicin, vinorelbine, vorinostat, zoledronate, and zoledronic acid; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In particular embodiments, the anticancer agent is paclitaxel, etoposide, or doxorubicin, or an analog thereof. The agent may be an RNAi agent (e.g., any RNAi agent described herein such as an RNAi agent is capable of silencing EGFR or VEGF expression). The agent may be a GLP-1 agonist (e.g., any described herein, such as exendin-4 (SEQ ID NO: 132), or an analog or fragment thereof having GLP-1 agonist activity, exendin-4 (SEQ ID NO: 132), [Lys³⁹]exendin-4 (SEQ ID NO: 134), or [Cys³²]exendin-4 (SEQ ID NO: 133)). The agent may be leptin or a leptin analog (e.g., any described herein, such as leptin or leptin analog is full-length human leptin, mature human leptin (amino acids 22-167 of the full length human leptin), or leptin_116-130. The agent may be neurotensin or a neurotensin analog (e.g., any described herein, such as human neurotensin, human neurotensin(8-13), or pELYENKPRRPYIL-OH, where pE represents L-pyroglutamic acid). The agent may be GDNF, BDNF, or an analog thereof (e.g., a full length GDNF or BDNF sequence or a mature form of GDNF or BDNF or is human GDNF^78-211). The antibody may be a monoclonal antibody such as an antibody directed against the amyloid-βprotein. The antibody may be selected from the group consisting of R1450 (Roche), bapineuzumab, solanezumab (LY2062430; Eli Lilly), BAN2401, PF-04360365 (Pfizer), and GSK933776A (GlaxoSmithKline). In a specific embodiment, the compound has the structure shown in FIG. 9A, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof (e.g., a TFA salt).

The compounds of the invention (e.g., those described above and in the detailed description) can be used in the treatment of disease and conditions. Such methods are as follows.

The invention also features a method of treating or treating prophylactically a subject having a cancer. The method includes administering to the patient a compound including an anticancer agent or a RNAi capable of inhibiting a gene whose expression is associated with or causes cancer (e.g., EGFR or VEGF). The cancer may be selected from the group consisting of brain cancer, hepatocellular carcinoma, breast cancer, cancers of the head and neck including various lymphomas such as mantle cell lymphoma, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, adenoma, squamous cell carcinoma, laryngeal carcinoma, cancers of the retina, cancers of the esophagus, multiple myeloma, ovarian cancer, uterine cancer, melanoma, colorectal cancer, bladder cancer, prostate cancer, lung cancer (including non-small cell lung carcinoma), pancreatic cancer, cervical cancer, head and neck cancer, skin cancers, nasopharyngeal carcinoma, liposarcoma, epithelial carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma, gallbladder adenocarcinoma, parotid adenocarcinoma, endometrial sarcoma, and multidrug resistant cancers. The brain cancer may be selected from the group consisting of astrocytoma, pilocytic astrocytoma, dysembryoplastic neuroepithelial tumor, oligodendrogliomas, ependymoma, glioblastoma multiforme, mixed gliomas, oligoastrocytomas, medulloblastoma, retinoblastoma, neuroblastoma, germinoma, and teratoma.

The invention also features a method of treating or treating prophylactically a subject having a metabolic disorder by administering a compound including GLP-1 agonist, leptin, a leptin analog, neurotensin, or a neurotensin analog in an amount sufficient to treat the disorder. The metabolic disorder may be diabetes (e.g., type I or type II diabetes), obesity, diabetes as a consequence of obesity, hyperglycemia, dyslipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, syndrome X, insulin resistance, impaired glucose tolerance (IGT), diabetic dyslipidemia, hyperlipidemia, a cardiovascular disease, or hypertension.

The invention also features a method of reducing food intake by, or reducing body weight of, a subject by administering a compound including GLP-1 agonist, leptin, or a leptin analog to a subject in an amount sufficient to reduce food intake or reduce body weight. The subject may be overweight, obese, or bulimic.

The invention also features a method of treating or treating prophylactically a disorder selected from the group consisting of anxiety, movement disorder, aggression, psychosis, seizures, panic attacks, hysteria, sleep disorders, Alzheimer's disease, and Parkinson's disease by administering a compound including a GLP-1 agonist to a subject in an amount sufficient to treat or prevent the disorder.

The invention also features a method of increasing neurogenesis in a subject by administering to the subject and effective amount of a compound including a GLP-1 agonist to the subject. The subject may be suffering from Parkinson's Disease, Alzheimer's Disease, Huntington's Disease, ALS, stroke, ADD, or a neuropsychiatric syndrome. The increase in neurogenesis may improve learning or enhances neuroprotection in the subject.

The invention also features a method for converting liver stem/progenitor cells into functional pancreatic cells; preventing beta-cell deterioration and stimulation of beta-cell proliferation; treating obesity; suppressing appetite and inducing satiety; treating irritable bowel syndrome; reducing the morbidity and/or mortality associated with myocardial infarction and stroke; treating acute coronary syndrome characterized by an absence of Q-wave myocardial infarction; attenuating post-surgical catabolic changes; treating hibernating myocardium or diabetic cardiomyopathy; suppressing plasma blood levels of norepinepherine; increasing urinary sodium excretion, decreasing urinary potassium concentration; treating conditions or disorders associated with toxic hypervolemia, renal failure, congestive heart failure, nephrotic syndrome, cirrhosis, pulmonary edema, and hypertension; inducing an inotropic response and increasing cardiac contractility; treating polycystic ovary syndrome; treating respiratory distress; improving nutrition via a non-alimentary route, i.e., via intravenous, subcutaneous, intramuscular, peritoneal, or other injection or infusion; treating nephropathy; treating left ventricular systolic dysfunction (e.g., with abnormal left ventricular ejection fraction); inhibiting antro-duodenal motility (e.g., for the treatment or prevention of gastrointestinal disorders such as diarrhea, postoperative dumping syndrome and irritable bowel syndrome, and as premedication in endoscopic procedures; treating critical illness polyneuropathy (CIPN) and systemic inflammatory response syndrome (SIRS; modulating triglyceride levels and treating dyslipidemia; treating organ tissue injury caused by reperfusion of blood flow following ischemia; or treating coronary heart disease risk factor (CHDRF) syndrome in a subject by administering and effective amount of a compound including a GLP-1 agonist to the subject.

The invention also features a method of increasing GLP-1 receptor activity in a subject by administering a compound including a GLP-1 agonist to a subject in an amount sufficient to increase GLP-1 receptor activity.

The invention also features a method of reducing body temperature of a subject, the method including administering a compound including neurotensin or a neurotensin analog in a sufficient amount to reduce body temperature. The subject may be suffering from or has suffered from cerebral ischemia, cardiac ischemia, or a nerve injury. The nerve injury may be a spinal cord injury.

The invention also features a method of treating pain or prophylactically treating pain in a subject, the method including administering a compound of including neurotensin or a neurotensin analog in an amount sufficient to treat the pain. The pain may be an acute pain selected from the group consisting of mechanical pain, heat pain, cold pain, ischemic pain, and chemical-induced pain. The pain may be peripheral or central neuropathic pain, inflammatory pain, migraine-related pain, headache-related pain, irritable bowel syndrome-related pain, fibromyalgia-related pain, arthritic pain, skeletal pain, joint pain, gastrointestinal pain, muscle pain, angina pain, facial pain, pelvic pain, claudication, postoperative pain, post traumatic pain, tension-type headache, obstetric pain, gynecological pain, or chemotherapy-induced pain.

The invention also features a method of treating or treating prophylactically a subject having a psychotic disorder (e.g., schizophrenia), the method including administering a compound including neurotensin or a neurotensin analog in an amount sufficient to treat the disorder.

The invention also features a method of treating drug addiction or drug abuse in a subject, the method including administering to the subject a compound including neurotensin or a neurotensin analog in an amount sufficient to treat the addiction or abuse. The drug may be a psychostimulant (e.g., amphetamine, methamphetamine, 3,4-methylenedioxymethamphetamine, nicotine, cocaine, methylphenidate, and arecoline)

The invention also features a method of treating or treating prophylactically a neurological disorder in a subject, the method including administering to the subject in an amount sufficient to treat or prevent the disorder (e.g., schizophrenia).

The invention also features a method of treating or treating prophylactically a subject having a neurodegenerative disorder, the method including administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound including GDNF, BDNF, or an analog thereof. The neurodegenerative disorder may be selected from the group consisting of a polyglutamine expansion disorder, fragile X syndrome, fragile XE mental retardation, Friedreich's ataxia, myotonic dystrophy, spinocerebellar ataxia type 8, and spinocerebellar ataxia type 12, Alexander disease, Alper's disease, Alzheimer's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), ataxia telangiectasia, Batten disease (Spielmeyer-Vogt-Sjogren-Batten disease), Canavan disease, Cockayne syndrome, corticobasal degeneration, Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease, ischemia stroke, Krabbe disease, Lewy body dementia, multiple sclerosis, multiple system atrophy, Parkinson's disease, Pelizaeus-Merzbacher disease, Pick's disease, primary lateral sclerosis, Refsum's disease, Sandhoff disease, Schilder's disease, spinal cord injury, spinal muscular atrophy, Steele-Richardson-Olszewski disease, and Tabes dorsalis. In certain embodiments, the polyglutamine repeat disease is Huntington's disease (HD), dentatorubropallidoluysian atrophy, Kennedy's disease (also referred to as spinobulbar muscular atrophy), or a spinocerebellar ataxia selected from the group consisting of type 1, type 2, type 3 (Machado-Joseph disease), type 6, type 7, and type 17).

The invention also features a method of treating a subject having a neuronal damage, the method including administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound including GDNF, BDNF, or an analog thereof. The neuronal damage may be caused by an ischemic stroke, a hemorrhagic stroke, or a spinal cord injury.

The invention also features a method of treating a subject having depression or schizophrenia, the method including administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound including GDNF, BDNF, or an analog thereof.

The invention also features a method of treating a subject having a disease related to the amyloid-β protein (e.g., Alzheimer's disease or cerebral amyloid angiopathy) by administering to said patient an effective amount of a therapeutic antibody (e.g., an antibody that specifically binds amyloid-β or a fragment thereof).

In any of the above methods, the subject may be a human.

In the treatment methods of the invention, in certain embodiments, the compound is administered at a lower (e.g., less than 95%, 75%, 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 25%, 10%, 5%, or 1%) equivalent dosage as compared to the recommended dosage of the unconjugated agent. In other embodiments, the compound is administered at a higher (1.5×, 2×, 2.5×, 3.0×, 5×, 8×, 10×, 15×, 20×, 25×) equivalent dosage than a dosage recommended for the unconjugated agent.

In any of the above aspects, the peptide vector may be a polypeptide substantially identical to any of the sequences set Table 1, or a fragment thereof. In certain embodiments, the peptide vector has a sequence of Angiopep-1 (SEQ ID NO:67), Angiopep-2 (SEQ ID NO:97), Angiopep-3 (SEQ ID NO:107), Angiopep-4a (SEQ ID NO:108), Angiopep-4b (SEQ ID NO:109), Angiopep-5 (SEQ ID NO:110), Angiopep-6 (SEQ ID NO:111), Angiopep-7 (SEQ ID NO:112) or reversed Angiopep-2 (SEQ ID NO:117)). The peptide vector or compound of the invention may be efficiently transported into a particular cell type (e.g., any one, two, three, four, or five of liver, lung, kidney, spleen, and muscle) or may cross the mammalian BBB efficiently (e.g., Angiopep-1, -2, -3, -4a, -4b, -5, and -6). In another embodiment, the peptide vector or compound is able to enter a particular cell type (e.g., any one, two, three, four, or five of liver, lung, kidney, spleen, and muscle) but does not cross the BBB efficiently (e.g., a conjugate including Angiopep-7). The peptide vector may be of any length, for example, at least 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 25, 35, 50, 75, 100, 200, or 500 amino acids, or any range between these numbers. In certain embodiments, the peptide vector is 10 to 50 amino acids in length. The polypeptide may be produced by recombinant genetic technology or chemical synthesis.

TABLE 1
Exemplary Peptide Vectors

SEQ ID
NO:

1	T F V Y G G C R A K R N N F K S A E D
2	T F Q Y G G C M G N G N N F V T E K E
3	P F F Y G G C G G N R N N F D T E E Y
4	S F Y Y G G C L G N K N N Y L R E E E
5	T F F Y G G C R A K R N N F K R A K Y
6	T F F Y G G C R G K R N N F K R A K Y
7	T F F Y G G C R A K K N N Y K R A K Y
8	T F F Y G G C R G K K N N F K R A K Y
9	T F Q Y G G C R A K R N N F K R A K Y
10	T F Q Y G G C R G K K N N F K R A K Y
11	T F F Y G G C L G K R N N F K R A K Y
12	T F F Y G G S L G K R N N F K R A K Y
13	P F F Y G G C G G K K N N F K R A K Y
14	T F F Y G G C R G K G N N Y K R A K Y
15	P F F Y G G C R G K R N N F L R A K Y
16	T F F Y G G C R G K R N N F K R E K Y
17	P F F Y G G C R A K K N N F K R A K E
18	T F F Y G G C R G K R N N F K R A K D
19	T F F Y G G C R A K R N N F D R A K Y
20	T F F Y G G C R G K K N N F K R A E Y
21	P F F Y G G C G A N R N N F K R A K Y
22	T F F Y G G C G G K K N N F K T A K Y
23	T F F Y G G C R G N R N N F L R A K Y
24	T F F Y G G C R G N R N N F K T A K Y
25	T F F Y G G S R G N R N N F K T A K Y
26	T F F Y G G C L G N G N N F K R A K Y
27	T F F Y G G C L G N R N N F L R A K Y
28	T F F Y G G C L G N R N N F K T A K Y
29	T F F Y G G C R G N G N N F K S A K Y
30	T F F Y G G C R G K K N N F D R E K Y
31	T F F Y G G C R G K R N N F L R E K E
32	T F F Y G G C R G K G N N F D R A K Y
33	T F F Y G G S R G K G N N F D R A K Y
34	T F F Y G G C R G N G N N F V T A K Y
35	P F F Y G G C G G K G N N Y V T A K Y
36	T F F Y G G C L G K G N N F L T A K Y
37	S F F Y G G C L G N K N N F L T A K Y
38	T F F Y G G C G G N K N N F V R E K Y
39	T F F Y G G C M G N K N N F V R E K Y
40	T F F Y G G S M G N K N N F V R E K Y
41	P F F Y G G C L G N R N N Y V R E K Y
42	T F F Y G G C L G N R N N F V R E K Y
43	T F F Y G G C L G N K N N Y V R E K Y
44	T F F Y G G C G G N G N N F L T A K Y
45	T F F Y G G C R G N R N N F L T A E Y
46	T F F Y G G C R G N G N N F K S A E Y
47	P F F Y G G C L G N K N N F K T A E Y
48	T F F Y G G C R G N R N N F K T E E Y
49	T F F Y G G C R G K R N N F K T E E D
50	P F F Y G G C G G N G N N F V R E K Y
51	S F F Y G G C M G N G N N F V R E K Y
52	P F F Y G G C G G N G N N F L R E K Y
53	T F F Y G G C L G N G N N F V R E K Y
54	S F F Y G G C L G N G N N Y L R E K Y
55	T F F Y G G S L G N G N N F V R E K Y
56	T F F Y G G C R G N G N N F V T A E Y
57	T F F Y G G C L G K G N N F V S A E Y
58	T F F Y G G C L G N R N N F D R A E Y
59	T F F Y G G C L G N R N N F L R E E Y
60	T F F Y G G C L G N K N N Y L R E E Y
61	P F F Y G G C G G N R N N Y L R E E Y
62	P F F Y G G S G G N R N N Y L R E E Y
63	M R P D F C L E P P Y T G P C V A R I
64	A R I I R Y F Y N A K A G L C Q T F V Y G
65	Y G G C R A K R N N Y K S A E D C M R T C G
66	P D F C L E P P Y T G P C V A R I I R Y F Y
67	T F F Y G G C R G K R N N F K T E E Y
68	K F F Y G G C R G K R N N F K T E E Y
69	T F Y Y G G C R G K R N N Y K T E E Y
70	T F F Y G G S R G K R N N F K T E E Y
71	C T F F Y G C C R G K R N N F K T E E Y
72	T F F Y G G C R G K R N N F K T E E Y C
73	C T F F Y G S C R G K R N N F K T E E Y
74	T F F Y G G S R G K R N N F K T E E Y C
75	P F F Y G G C R G K R N N F K T E E Y
76	T F F Y G G C R G K R N N F K T K E Y
77	T F F Y G G K R G K R N N F K T E E Y
78	T F F Y G G C R G K R N N F K T K R Y
79	T F F Y G G K R G K R N N F K T A E Y
80	T F F Y G G K R G K R N N F K T A G Y
81	T F F Y G G K R G K R N N F K R E K Y
82	T F F Y G G K R G K R N N F K R A K Y
83	T F F Y G G C L G N R N N F K T E E Y
84	T F F Y G C G R G K R N N F K T E E Y
85	T F F Y G G R C G K R N N F K T E E Y
86	T F F Y G G C L G N G N N F D T E E E
87	T F Q Y G G C R G K R N N F K T E E Y
88	Y N K E F G T F N T K G C E R G Y R F
89	R F K Y G G C L G N M N N F E T L E E
90	R F K Y G G C L G N K N N F L R L K Y
91	R F K Y G G C L G N K N N Y L R L K Y
92	K T K R K R K K Q R V K I A Y E E I F K N Y
93	K T K R K R K K Q R V K I A Y
94	R G G R L S Y S R R F S T S T G R
95	R R L S Y S R R R F
96	R Q I K I W F Q N R R M K W K K
97	T F F Y G G S R G K R N N F K T E E Y
98	M R P D F C L E P P Y T G P C V A R I
	I R Y F Y N A K A G L C Q T F V Y G G
	C R A K R N N F K S A E D C M R T C G G A
99	T F F Y G G C R G K R N N F K T K E Y
100	R F K Y G G C L G N K N N Y L R L K Y
101	T F F Y G G C R A K R N N F K R A K Y
102	N A K A G L C Q T F V Y G G C L A K R N N F
	E S A E D C M R T C G G A
103	Y G G C R A K R N N F K S A E D C M R T C G
	G A
104	G L C Q T F V Y G G C R A K R N N F K S A E
105	L C Q T F V Y G G C E A K R N N F K S A
107	T F F Y G G S R G K R N N F K T E E Y
108	R F F Y G G S R G K R N N F K T E E Y
109	R F F Y G G S R G K R N N F K T E E Y
110	R F F Y G G S R G K R N N F R T E E Y
111	T F F Y G G S R G K R N N F R T E E Y
112	T F F Y G G S R G R R N N F R T E E Y
113	C T F F Y G G S R G K R N N F K T E E Y
114	T F F Y G G S R G K R N N F K T E E Y C
115	C T F F Y G G S R G R R N N F R T E E Y
116	T F F Y G G S R G R R N N F R T E E Y C
117	Y E E T K F N N R K G R S G G Y F F T
Polypeptides Nos. 5, 67, 76, and 91, include the sequences of SEQ ID NOS: 5, 67, 76, and 91, respectively, and are amidated at the C-terminus.
Polypeptides Nos. 107, 109, and 110 include the sequences of SEQ ID NOS: 97, 109, and 110, respectively, and are acetylated at the N-terminus.

In any of the above aspects, the peptide vector may include an amino acid sequence having the formula:
X1-X2-X3-X4-X5-X6-X7-X8-X9-X10-X11-X12-X13-X14-X15-X16-X17-X18-X19
where each of X1-X19 (e.g., X1-X6, X8, X9, X11-X14, and X16-X19) is, independently, any amino acid (e.g., a naturally occurring amino acid such as Ala, Arg, Asn, Asp, Cys, Gln, Glu, Gly, His, Ile, Leu, Lys, Met, Phe, Pro, Ser, Thr, Trp, Tyr, and Val) or absent and at least one (e.g., 2 or 3) of X1, X10, and X15 is arginine. In some embodiments, X7 is Ser or Cys; or X10 and X15 each are independently Arg or Lys. In some embodiments, the residues from X1 through X19, inclusive, are substantially identical to any of the amino acid sequences of any one of SEQ ID NOS:1-105 and 107-117 (e.g., Angiopep-1, Angiopep-2, Angiopep-3, Angiopep-4a, Angiopep-4b, Angiopep-5, Angiopep-6, Angiopep-7, and reversed Angiopep-2). In some embodiments, at least one (e.g., 2, 3, 4, or 5) of the amino acids X1-X19 is Arg. In some embodiments, the polypeptide has one or more additional cysteine residues at the N-terminal of the polypeptide, the C-terminal of the polypeptide, or both.

In certain embodiments of any of the above aspects, the peptide vector or a peptide therapeutic described herein is modified (e.g., as described herein). The peptide or polypeptide may be amidated, acetylated, or both. Such modifications may be at the amino or carboxy terminus of the polypeptide. The peptide or polypeptide may also include peptidomimetics (e.g., those described herein) of any of the polypeptides described herein.

In certain embodiments, the peptide vector or a peptide therapeutic described herein has an amino acid sequence described herein with at least one amino acid substitution (e.g., 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12 substitutions), insertion, or deletion or is substantially identical to an amino acid sequence described herein. The peptide or polypeptide may contain, for example, 1 to 12, 1 to 10, 1 to 5, or 1 to 3 amino acid substitutions, for example, 1 to 10 (e.g., to 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2) amino acid substitutions. The amino acid substitution(s) may be conservative or non-conservative. For example, the peptide vector may have an arginine at one, two, or three of the positions corresponding to positions 1, 10, and 15 of the amino acid sequence of any of SEQ ID NO:1, Angiopep-1, Angiopep-2, Angiopep-3, Angiopep-4a, Angiopep-4b, Angiopep-5, Angiopep-6, Angiopep-7, and reversed Angiopep-2. In certain embodiments, the BDNF, GDNF, or related molecule may have a cysteine or lysine substitution or addition at any position (e.g., a lysine substitution at the N- or C-terminal position).

In any of the above aspects, the compound may specifically exclude a polypeptide including or consisting of any of SEQ ID NOS:1-105 and 107-117 (e.g., Angiopep-1, Angiopep-2, Angiopep-3, Angiopep-4a, Angiopep-4b, Angiopep-5, Angiopep-6, Angiopep-7, and reversed Angiopep-2). In some embodiments, the polypeptides and compounds of the invention exclude the polypeptides of SEQ ID NOs:102, 103, 104, and 105.

By “fragment” is meant a portion of a full-length amino acid or nucleic acid sequence (e.g., any sequence described herein). Fragments may include at least 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 75, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 200, 500, 1000, 1500, 2000, or 5000 amino acids or nucleic acids of the full length sequence. A fragment may retain at least one of the biological activities of the full length protein.

By “substantially identical” is meant a polypeptide or nucleic acid exhibiting at least 35%, 40%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or even 99% identity to a reference amino acid or nucleic acid sequence. For polypeptides, the length of comparison sequences will generally be at least 4 (e.g., at least 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 50, or 100) amino acids. For nucleic acids, the length of comparison sequences will generally be at least 60 nucleotides, preferably at least 90 nucleotides, and more preferably at least 120 nucleotides, or full length. It is to be understood herein that gaps may be found between the amino acids of sequences that are identical or similar to amino acids of the original polypeptide. The gaps may include no amino acids, one or more amino acids that are not identical or similar to the original polypeptide. Percent identity may be determined, for example, with n algorithm GAP, BESTFIT, or FASTA in the Wisconsin Genetics Software Package Release 7.0, using default gap weights.

By “peptide vector” is meant a compound or molecule such as a polypeptide or a peptidomimetic that can be transported into a particular cell type (e.g., liver, lungs, kidney, spleen, or muscle) or across the BBB. The vector may be attached to (covalently or not) or conjugated to an agent and thereby may be able to transport the agent into a particular cell type or across the BBB. In certain embodiments, the vector may bind to receptors present on cancer cells or brain endothelial cells and thereby be transported into the cancer cell or across the BBB by transcytosis. The vector may be a molecule for which high levels of transendothelial transport may be obtained, without affecting the cell or BBB integrity. The vector may be a polypeptide or a peptidomimetic and may be naturally occurring or produced by chemical synthesis or recombinant genetic technology.

By “agent” is meant any compound having at least one biological activity. Agents include both diagnostic and therapeutic agents.

By “therapeutic agent” is meant an agent that is capable of being used in the treatment or prophylactic treatment of a disease or condition.

By “RNAi agent” is meant any agent or compound that exerts a gene silencing effect by way of an RNA interference pathway. RNAi agents include any nucleic acid molecules that are capable of mediating sequence-specific RNAi, for example, a short interfering RNA (siRNA), double-stranded RNA (dsRNA), microRNA (miRNA), short hairpin RNA (shRNA), short interfering oligonucleotide, short interfering nucleic acid, short interfering modified oligonucleotide, chemically-modified siRNA, and post-transcriptional gene silencing RNA (ptgsRNA).

By “treating” a disease, disorder, or condition in a subject is meant reducing at least one symptom of the disease, disorder, or condition by administrating a therapeutic agent to the subject.

By “treating prophylactically” a disease, disorder, or condition in a subject is meant reducing the frequency of occurrence or severity of (e.g., preventing) a disease, disorder or condition by administering to the subject a therapeutic agent to the subject prior to the appearance of a disease symptom or symptoms.

By “subject” is meant a human or non-human animal (e.g., a mammal).

By “equivalent dosage” is meant the amount of a compound of the invention required to achieve the same molar amount of agent in the compound of the invention, as compared to the unconjugated molecule.

By a polypeptide which is “efficiently transported across the BBB” is meant a polypeptide that is able to cross the BBB at least as efficiently as Angiopep-6 (i.e., greater than 38.5% that of Angiopep-1 (250 nM) in the in situ brain perfusion assay described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/807,597, filed May 29, 2007, hereby incorporated by reference). Accordingly, a polypeptide which is “not efficiently transported across the BBB” is transported to the brain at lower levels (e.g., transported less efficiently than Angiopep-6).

By a polypeptide or compound which is “efficiently transported to a particular cell type” is meant that the polypeptide or compound is able to accumulate (e.g., either due to increased transport into the cell, decreased efflux from the cell, or a combination thereof) in that cell type to at least a 10% (e.g., 25%, 50%, 100%, 200%, 500%, 1,000%, 5,000%, or 10,000%) greater extent than either a control substance, or, in the case of a conjugate, as compared to the unconjugated agent. Such activities are described in detail in International Application Publication No. WO 2007/009229, hereby incorporated by reference.

Other features and advantages of the invention will be apparent from the following Detailed Description, the drawings, and the claims.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 is a set of graphs showing the TMEA-(Angiopep-2)₂ conjugate before (Chromatogram 1) and after (Chromatogram 2) purification.

FIG. 2 is a graph showing purification of the TMEA-(Angiopep-2)₂ conjugate.

FIG. 3 is a set of graphs showing the SATP-Angiopep-2-Angiopep-2 conjugate before (Chromatogram 4) and after (Chromatogram 5) purification.

FIG. 4 is a graph showing purification of the SATP-Angiopep-2-Angiopep-2 conjugate.

FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing formation of the Angiopep-1 (SEQ ID NO: 67)dimmer formed through disulfide bonds.

FIG. 6 is a graph showing apparent volume of parenchyma distribution measured by an in situ brain perfusion assay for the Angiopep-1 dimer and Angiopep-2.

FIG. 7 is a graph showing parenchymal uptake (volume of parenchyma transformed to pmol uptake) using an in situ brain perfusion assay for the Angiopep-1 dimer and Angiopep-2.

FIG. 8 is a graph showing uptake of Angiopep-2 monomers (synthetic and recombinant) as well as Angiopep-2 dimers and trimers in lean mice at 50 nM concentration using the in situ brain perfusion assay. A comparison using recombinant Angiopep-2 in diet-induced obese (DIO) mice is also shown.

FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram showing the structure of an Exendin-4-Angiopep-2 dimmer conjugate (Ex4(Lys39 (MHA))-AN2-AN2). The compound has the structure HGEGTFTSDLSKQMEEEAVRLFIEWLKNGGPSSGAPPPK (SEQ ID NO: 134)-(MHA)-TFFYGGSRGKRNNFKTEEYC-(MPA)-TFFYGGSRGKRNNFKTEEY (SEQ ID NO: 178)-OH, where MHA is maleimido hexanoic acid and MPA is maleimido propionic acid.

FIG. 9B is a schematic structure of an Exendin-4-scramble-Angiopep-2 (Ex4(Cys32)-ANS4 (N-Term) or Exen-S4) that was used a control. This compound has the structure HGEGTFTSDLSKQMEEEAVRLFIEWLKNGGPCSGAPPPS-(MHA)-GYKGERYRGFKETNFNTES-OH (SEQ ID NO: 123), where MHA is maleimido hexanoic acid.

FIG. 10 is a graph showing the ability of, in order from left to right, Exendin-4, Exendin-4-Angiopep-2 conjugates C3, C6, and C11 (where the number indicates the length of the carbon chain connecting the Angiopep-2 and Exendin-4, as described in U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/105,618, filed Oct. 15, 2008), Exen-S4, and Exendin-4 when conjugated to a dimeric form of Angiopep-2, to cross the BBB.

FIG. 11 is a graph showing the ability of Exendin-4 and Exen-An2-An2 to reduce glycemia in mice as compared to a control.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

We have now developed multimeric forms of peptide vectors that are able to cross the blood-brain barrier (BBB) or are able to enter particular cell types (e.g., liver, spleen, kidney, muscle, ovary) with enhanced efficiency. These multimeric forms, when conjugated to a therapeutic agent, can transport the agent across the BBB or into particular cells. In some cases, the multimeric (e.g., dimeric) form of the peptide vector is capable of crossing the BBB or entering particular cell types more efficiently, and in certain cases as described herein, far more efficiently, than the monomeric form of the peptide vector. This increased efficiency in transport may allow for lower dosages of the therapeutic as compared either to the unconjugated agent or to the agent conjugated to a monomeric form of the peptide vector. In other cases, by directing the agent more efficiently to its target tissue(s), the compounds of the invention may administered in higher dosages than either the unconjugated agent or the agent conjugated to a monomeric form of the peptide vector, as the greater targeting efficiency can reduce side effects. Compounds including such multimers and their use in treatment of disease are described in detail below.

Multimeric Peptide Vectors

The compounds of the invention feature a multimeric (e.g., dimeric) form of the peptide vectors described herein. The peptide vectors are joined by a chemical bond either directly (e.g., a covalent bond such as a disulfide or a peptide bond) or indirectly (e.g., through a linker such as those described herein). Exemplary multimeric peptides are described below.

Peptides Joined by Linkers

In some embodiments, the peptide vectors described herein are joined by a chemical linker. Such chemical linkers are known in the art and are described herein. Any appropriate linker can be used to produce a multimer of the invention. Exemplary chemical linkers include those described below.

In certain embodiments, the multimeric peptide vector is a dimer having the formula:
A¹-X-A²
where A¹ and A² are each, independently, a peptide vector (e.g., any peptide vector described herein) and X is a linker. The linker may be any linker described herein. In particular embodiments, the linker contains a maleimido moiety and binds to a cysteine present in the peptide vector (e.g., a peptide vector to which an N-terminal or C-terminal cysteine residue has been added).

In other embodiments, the multimeric peptide vector has or includes a formula selected from the group consisting of:

where A¹, A², A³, A^m, and each A^p are, independently, a peptide vector (e.g., any peptide vector described herein); X, X¹, and each X^p are, independently, a linker (e.g., any linker described herein) that joins together two peptide vectors; n is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10; m is n+2; and p is an integer from 2 to n+1. In particular embodiments, n is 1, and the compound has the formula:

Higher order multimers can also be described by the formula:

where A¹, A², each A^q, each A^r, and each A^s are, independently, peptide vectors (e.g., any of those described herein); A³ is a peptide vector or is absent; X, each X^q, each X^r, and each X^s are, independently, linkers that join peptide vectors; m, n, and p are each, independently, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10; q is an integer from 4 to m+3; r is an integer from m+4 to m+n+3; and s is an integer from m+n+4 to m+n+p+3.

Fusion Protein Multimers

In other embodiments, the multimeric peptide is in the form of a fusion protein. The fusion protein may contain 2, 3, 4, 5, or more peptide vectors, either joined directly by a peptide bond, or through peptide linkers. In one example, fusion protein dimers are described by the formula:
A¹-X-A²
where A¹ and A² are, independently, a peptide vector (e.g., an amino acid sequence substantially identical to a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO:1-105 and 107-117, or a functional fragment thereof) and X is either (a) a peptide bond that joins A¹ and A² or (b) one or more amino acids joined to A¹ and A² by peptide bonds. In certain embodiments, the peptide is a single amino acid (e.g., a naturally occurring amino acid), a flexible linker, a rigid linker, or an a-helical linker. Exemplary peptide linkers that can be used in the invention are described in the section entitled “peptide linkers” below. In certain embodiments A¹ and A² are the same peptide vector.

Fusion protein multimers can be described by the formula:
A¹-(Xⁿ-A^m)_n
where n is or is at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10; m is an integer from 2 to n+1; A¹ and each A^m are, independently, a peptide vector (e.g., an amino acid sequence substantially identical to a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO:1-105 and 107-117, or a functional fragment thereof); and each Xⁿ is, independently, either (a) a peptide bond that joins A¹ and A² or (b) one or more amino acids joined to the adjacent peptide vector (A¹ or Aⁿ) by peptide bonds.

The peptide vectors forming the multimer, in certain embodiments, may each be fewer than 100, 50, 40, 35, 30, 25, 24, 23, 22, 21, 20, 19, 18, 17, 16, or 15 amino acids in length. The fusion protein may be fewer than 1,000, 500, 250, 150, 100, 90, 80, 75, 70, 65, 60, 55, 50, 45, 40, or 35 amino acids in length.

Linkers

The peptide vectors may be bound to each other or to a therapeutic agent either directly (e.g., through a covalent bond such as a peptide bond) or may be bound through a linker. Linkers include chemical linking agents (e.g., cleavable linkers) and peptides. Any of the linkers described below may be used in the compounds of the invention.

Chemical Linking Agents

In some embodiments, the linker is a chemical linking agent. The peptide vector may be conjugated through sulfhydryl groups, amino groups (amines), or any appropriate reactive group. Homobifunctional and heterobifunctional cross-linkers (conjugation agents) are available from many commercial sources. Sites available for cross-linking may be found on the peptides and agents described herein. The cross-linker may comprise a flexible arm, e.g., 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, or 15 carbon atoms. Exemplary cross-linkers include BS³ ([Bis(sulfosuccinimidyl)suberate]; BS³ is a homobifunctional N-hydroxysuccinimide ester that targets accessible primary amines), NHS/EDC (N-hydroxysuccinimide and 1-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide; NHS/EDC allows for the conjugation of primary amine groups with carboxyl groups), sulfo-EMCS ([N-ε-maleimidocaproic acid]hydrazide; sulfo-EMCS are heterobifunctional reactive groups (maleimide and NHS-ester) that are reactive toward sulfhydryl and amino groups), hydrazide (most proteins contain exposed carbohydrates and hydrazide is a useful reagent for linking carboxyl groups to primary amines), SATA (N-succinimidyl-S-acetylthioacetate; SATA is reactive towards amines and adds protected sulfhydryls groups), and BMOE (bis-maleimidoethane).

To form covalent bonds, one can use as a chemically reactive group a wide variety of active carboxyl groups (e.g., esters) where the hydroxyl moiety is physiologically acceptable at the levels required to modify the peptide. Particular agents include N-hydroxysuccinimide (NHS), N-hydroxy-sulfosuccinimide (sulfo-NHS), maleimide-benzoyl-succinimide (MBS), gamma-maleimido-butyryloxy succinimide ester (GMBS), maleimido propionic acid (MPA), maleimido hexanoic acid (MHA), and maleimido undecanoic acid (MUA).

Primary amines are the principal targets for NHS esters. Accessible α-amine groups present on the N-termini of proteins and the 8-amine of lysine react with NHS esters. Thus, compounds of the invention can include a linker having a NHS ester conjugated to an N-terminal amino of a peptide or to an ε-amine of lysine. An amide bond is formed when the NHS ester conjugation reaction reacts with primary amines releasing N-hydroxysuccinimide. These succinimide containing reactive groups are herein referred to as succinimidyl groups. In certain embodiments of the invention, the functional group on the protein will be a thiol group and the chemically reactive group will be a maleimido-containing group such as gamma-maleimide-butrylamide (GMBA or MPA). Such maleimide containing groups are referred to herein as maleido groups.

The maleimido group is most selective for sulfhydryl groups on peptides when the pH of the reaction mixture is 6.5-7.4. At pH 7.0, the rate of reaction of maleimido groups with sulfhydryls (e.g., thiol groups on proteins such as serum albumin or IgG) is 1000-fold faster than with amines. Thus, a stable thioether linkage between the maleimido group and the sulfhydryl can be formed. Accordingly, a compound of the invention can include a linker having a maleimido group conjugated to a sulfhydryl group of a peptide vector or of an agent.

Amine-to-amine linkers include NHS esters and imidoesters. Exemplary NHS esters are DSG (disuccinimidyl glutarate), DSS (disuccinimidyl suberate), BS³ (bis[sulfosuccinimidyl]suberate), TSAT (tris-succinimidyl aminotriacetate), variants of bis-succinimide ester-activated compounds that include a polyethylene glycol spacer such as BS(PEG)_n, where n is 1-20 (e.g., BS(PEG)₅ and BS(PEG)₉), DSP (Dithiobis[succinimidyl propionate]), DTSSP (3,3′-dithiobis[sulfosuccinimidylpropionate]), DST (disuccinimidyl tartarate), BSOCOES (bis[2-(succinimidooxycarbonyloxy)ethyl]sulfone), EGS (ethylene glycol bis[succinimidylsuccinate]), and sulfo-EGS (ethylene glycol bis[sulfosuccinimidylsuccinate]). Imidoesters include DMA (dimethyl adipimidate.2 HCl), DMP (dimethyl pimelimidate.2HCl), DMS (dimethyl suberimidate.2HCl), and DTBP ( dimethyl 3,3′-dithiobispropionimidate.2HCl). Other amine-to-amine linkers include DFDNB (1,5-difluoro-2,4-dinitrobenzene) and THPP (β-[tris(hydroxymethyl)phosphino]propionic acid (betaine)).

The linker may be a sulfhydryl-to-sulfhydry linker. Such linkers include maleimides and pyridyldithiols. Exemplary maleimides include BMOE (bis-maleimidoethane), BMB (1,4-bismaleimidobutane), BMH (bismaleimidohexane), TMEA (tris[2-maleimidoethyl]amine), BM(PEG)2 1,8-bis-maleimidodiethyleneglycol) or BM(PEG)_n, where n is 1 to 20 (e.g., 2 or 3), BMDB (1,4 bismaleimidyl-2,3-dihydroxybutane), and DTME (dithio-bismaleimidoethane). Exemplary pyridyldithiols include DPDPB (1,4-di-[3′-(2′-pyridyldithio)-propionamido]butane). Other sulfhydryl linkers include HBVS (1,6-hexane-bis-vinylsulfone).

The linker may be an amine-to-sulfhydryl linker, which includes NHS ester/maliemide compounds. Examples of these compounds are AMAS (N-(α-maleimidoacetoxy)succinimide ester), BMPS(N-[β-maleimidopropyloxy]succinimide ester), GMBS (N-[γ-maleimidobutyryloxy]succinimide ester), sulfo-GMBS (N-[γ-maleimidobutyryloxy]sulfosuccinimide ester), MBS (m-maleimidobenzoyl-N-hydroxysuccinimide ester), sulfo-MBS (m-maleimidobenzoyl-N-hydroxysulfosuccinimide ester), SMCC (succinimidyl 4-[N-maleimidomethyl]cyclohexane-1-carboxylate), sulfo-SMCC (Sulfosuccinimidyl 4-[N-maleimidomethyl]cyclohexane-1-carboxylate), EMCS ([N-ε-maleimidocaproyloxy]succinimide ester), Sulfo-EMCS ([N-ε-maleimidocaproyloxy]sulfosuccinimide ester), SMPB (succinimidyl 4-[p-maleimidophenyl]butyrate), sulfo-SMPB (sulfosuccinimidyl 4-[p-maleimidophenyl]butyrate), SMPH (succinimidyl-6-[β-maleimidopropionamido]hexanoate), LC-SMCC (succinimidyl-4-[N-maleimidomethyl]cyclohexane-1-carboxy-[6-amidocaproate]), sulfo-KMUS (N-[κ-maleimidoundecanoyloxy]sulfosuccinimide ester), SM(PEG)_n(succinimidyl-([N-maleimidopropionamido-polyethyleneglycol) ester), where n is 1 to 30 (e.g., 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, or 24), SPDP(N-succinimidyl 3-(2-pyridyldithio)-propionate), LC-SPDP (succinimidyl 6-(3-[2-pyridyldithio]-propionamido)hexanoate), sulfo-LC-SPDP (sulfosuccinimidyl 6-(3′-[2-pyridyldithio]-propionamido)hexanoate), SMPT (4-succinimidyloxycarbonyl-α-methyl-α-[2-pyridyldithio]toluene), Sulfo-LC-SMPT (4-sulfosuccinimidyl-6-[α-methyl-α-(2-pyridyldithio)toluamido]hexanoate), SIA (N-succinimidyl iodoacetate), SBAP (succinimidyl 3-[bromoacetamido]propionate), SIAB (N-succinimidyl[4-iodoacetyl]aminobenzoate), and sulfo-SIAB (N-sulfosuccinimidyl[4-iodoacetyl]aminobenzoate).

In other embodiments, the linker is an amino-to-nonselective linker. Examples of such linkers include NHS ester/aryl azide and NHS ester/diazirine linkers. NHS ester/aryl azide linkers include NHS-ASA (N-hydroxysuccinimidyl-4-azidosalicylic acid), ANB-NOS(N-5-azido-2-nitrobenzoyloxysuccinimide), sulfo-HSAB (N-hydroxysulfosuccinimidyl-4-azidobenzoate), sulfo-NHS-LC-ASA (sulfosuccinimidyl[4-azidosalicylamido]hexanoate), SANPAH (N-succinimidyl-6-(4′-azido-2′-nitrophenylamino)hexanoate), sulfo-SANPAH (N-sulfosuccinimidyl-6-(4′-azido-2′-nitrophenylamino)hexanoate), sulfo-SFAD (sulfosuccinimidyl-(perfluoroazidobenzamido)-ethyl-1,3′-dithioproprionate), sulfo-SAND (sulfosuecinimidyl-2-(m-azido-o-nitrobenzamido)-ethyl-1,3′-proprionate), and sulfo-SAED (sulfosuccinimidyl 2-[7-amino-4-methylcoumarin-3-acetamido]ethyl-1,3′dithiopropionate). NHS ester/diazirine linkers include SDA ( succinimidyl 4,4′-azipentanoate), LC-SDA (succinimidyl 6-(4,4′-azipentanamido)hexanoate), SDAD (succinimidyl 2-([4,4′-azipentanamido]ethyl)-1,3′-dithioproprionate), sulfo-SDA ( sulfosuccinimidyl 4,4′-azipentanoate), sulfo-LC-SDA (sulfosuccinimidyl 6-(4,4′-azipentanamido)hexanoate), and sulfo-SDAD (sulfosuccinimidyl 2-([4,4′-azipentanamido]ethyl)-1,3′-dithioproprionate).

Exemplary amine-to-carboxyl linkers include carbodiimide compounds (e.g., DCC(N,N-dicyclohexylcarbodimide) and EDC (1-ethyl-3-[3-dimethylaminopropyl]carbodiimide)). Exemplary sulfhydryl-to-nonselective linkers include pyridyldithiol/aryl azide compounds (e.g., APDP((N-[4-(p-azidosalicylamido)butyl]-3′-(2′-pyridyldithio)propionamide)). Exemplary sulfhydryl-to-carbohydrate linkers include maleimide/hydrazide compounds (e.g., BMPH(N-[β-maleimidopropionic acid]hydrazide), EMCH ([N-ε-maleimidocaproic acid]hydrazide), MPBH 4-(4-N-maleimidophenyl)butyric acid hydrazide), and KMUH(N-[κ-maleimidoundecanoic acid]hydrazide)) and pyridyldithiol/hydrazide compounds (e.g., PDPH (3-(2-pyridyldithio)propionyl hydrazide)). Exemplary carbohydrate-to-nonselective linkers include hydrazide/aryl azide compounds (e.g., ABH (p-azidobenzoyl hydrazide)). Exemplary hydroxyl-to-sulfhydryl linkers include isocyanate/maleimide compounds (e.g., (N-[p-maleimidophenyl]isocyanate)). Exemplary amine-to-DNA linkers include NHS ester/psoralen compounds (e.g., SPB (succinimidyl-[4-(psoralen-8-yloxy)]-butyrate)).

In other embodiments, the linker is a trifunctional, tetrafunctional, or greater linking agent. Exemplary trifunctional linkers include TMEA, THPP, TSAT, LC-TSAT (tris-succinimidyl (6-aminocaproyl)aminotriacetate), tris-succinimidyl-1,3,5-benzenetricarboxylate, MDSI (maleimido-3,5-disuccinimidyl isophthalate), SDMB (succinimidyl-3,5-dimaleimidophenyl benzoate, Mal-4 (tetrakis-(3-maleimidopropyl)pentaerythritol, NHS-4 (tetrakis-(N-succinimidylcarboxypropyl)pentaerythritol)).

TMEA has the structure:

TMEA, through its maleimide groups, can react with sulfhydryl groups (e.g., through cysteine amino acid side chains).

THPP has the structure:

The hydroxyl groups and carboxy group of THPP can react with primary or secondary amines.

Linkers are also described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,680,338 having the formula Y═C═N-Q-A-C(O)—Z, where Q is a homoaromatic or heteroaromatic ring system; A is a single bond or an unsubstituted or substituted divalent C_1-30 bridging group, Y is O or S; and Z is Cl, Br, I, N₃, N-succinimidyloxy, imidazolyl, 1-benzotriazolyloxy, OAr where Ar is an electron-deficient activating aryl group, or OC(O)R where R is -A-Q-N═C═Y or C₄-20 tertiary-alkyl.

Linkers are also described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,306,809, which describes linkers having the formula

where R₁ is H, C_1-6 alkyl, C_2-6 alkenyl, C_6-12 aryl or aralkyl or these coupled with a divalent organic —O—, —S—, or

where R′ is C_1-6 alkyl, linking moiety; R₂ is H, C_1-12 alkyl, C_6-12 aryl, or C_6-12 aralkyl, R₃ is

or another chemical structure which is able to delocalize the lone pair electrons of the adjacent nitrogen and R₄ is a pendant reactive group capable of linking R₃ to a peptide vector or to an agent.

Amino Acid and Peptide Linkers

In other embodiments, the linker includes at least one amino acid (e.g., a peptide of at least 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, 40, or 50 amino acids). In certain embodiments, the linker is a single amino acid (e.g., any naturally occurring amino acid such as Cys). In other embodiments, a glycine-rich peptide such as a peptide having the sequence [Gly-Gly-Gly-Gly-Ser]_n (SEQ ID NO: 124) where n is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 is used, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,271,149. In other embodiments, a serine-rich peptide linker is used, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,525,491. Serine rich peptide linkers include those of the formula [X-X-X-X-Gly]_y (SEQ ID NO: 125) where up to two of the X are Thr, and the remaining X are Ser, and y is 1 to 5 (e.g., Ser-Ser-Ser-Ser-Gly, (SEQ ID NO: 126) where y is greater than 1). In some cases, the linker is a single amino acid (e.g., any amino acid, such as Gly or Cys).

Amino acid linkers may be selected for flexibility (e.g., flexible or rigid) or may be selected on the basis of charge (e.g., positive, negative, or neutral). Flexible linkers typically include those with Gly resides (e.g., [Gly-Gly-Gly-Gly-Ser]_n (SEQ ID NO : 124) where n is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6). Other linkers include rigid linkers (e.g., PAPAP (SEQ ID NO: 127) and (PT)_nP (SEQ ID NO : 128), where n is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7) and α-helical linkers (e.g., A(EAAAK)_n A (SEQ ID NO : 129), where n is 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5).

Examples of suitable linkers are succinic acid, Lys, Glu, and Asp, or a dipeptide such as Gly-Lys. When the linker is succinic acid, one carboxyl group thereof may form an amide bond with an amino group of the amino acid residue, and the other carboxyl group thereof may, for example, form an amide bond with an amino group of the peptide or substituent. When the linker is Lys, Glu, or Asp, the carboxyl group thereof may form an amide bond with an amino group of the amino acid residue, and the amino group thereof may, for example, form an amide bond with a carboxyl group of the substituent. When Lys is used as the linker, a further linker may be inserted between the ε-amino group of Lys and the substituent. In one particular embodiment, the further linker is succinic acid, which can form an amide bond with the ε-amino group of Lys and with an amino group present in the substituent. In one embodiment, the further linker is Glu or Asp (e.g., which forms an amide bond with the ε-amino group of Lys and another amide bond with a carboxyl group present in the substituent), that is, the substituent is a N^ε-acylated lysine residue.

In other embodiments, the peptide linker is a branched polypeptide. Exemplary branched peptide linkers are described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,759,509. Such linkers includes those of the formula:

where A is a thiol acceptor; W is a bridging moiety; c is an integer of 0 to 1; a is an integer of 2 to 12; Q is O, NH, or N-lower alkyl; p is an integer of 0 or 1; d is an integer of 0 or 1; E is a polyvalent atom; each b is an integer of 1 to 10; each X is of the formula:
—CO—Y—Z_m-G_n
where Y is two amino acid residues in the L form; Z is one or two amino acid residues; m is an integer of 0 or 1; G is a self-immolative spacer; and n is a integer of 0 or 1; provided that when n is 0 then —Y—Z_m is Ala-Leu-Ala-Leu or Gly-Phe-Leu-Gly; or each X is of the formula:

where each X¹ is of the formula —CO—Y—Z_m-G_n; and where Y, Z, Q, E, G, m, d, p, a, b, and n are as defined above; or each X¹ is of the formula:

where each X² is of the formula —CO—Y—Z_m-G_n; and where Y, Z, G, Q, E, m, d, p, a, b, and n are as defined above; or each X² is of the formula:

where each X³ is of the formula —CO—Y—Z_m-G_n; and wherein Y, Z, G, Q, E, m, d, p, a, b, and n are as defined above; or each X³ is of the formula

where each X⁴ is of the formula —CO—Y—Z_m-G_n; and where Y, Z, G, Q, E, m, d, p, a, b, and n are as defined above.

The branched linker may employ an intermediate self-immolative spacer moiety (G), which covalently links together the agent or peptide vector and the branched peptide linker. A self-immolative spacer can be a bifunctional chemical moiety capable of covalently linking together two chemical moieties and releasing one of said spaced chemical moieties from the tripartate molecule by means of enzymatic cleavage (e.g., any appropriate linker described herein. In certain embodiments, G is a self-immolative spacer moiety which spaces and covalently links together the agent or peptide vector and the peptide linker, where the spacer is linked to the peptide vector or agent via the T moiety (as used in the following formulas “T” represents a nucleophilic atom which is already contained in the agent or peptide vector), and which may be represented by

where T is O, N or S; —HN—R¹—COT, where T is O, N or S, and R¹ is C_1-5 alkyl;

where T is O, N, or S, and R² is H or C_1-5 alkyl;

where T is O, N or S; or

where T is O, N, or S. Preferred Gs include PABC (p-aminobenzyl-carbamoyl), GABA (γ-aminobutyric acid), α,α-dimethyl GABA, and β,β-dimethyl GABA.

In the branched linker, the thiol acceptor “A” is linked to a peptide vector or agent by a sulfur atom derived from the peptide vector or agent. The thiol acceptor can be, for example, an α-substituted acetyl group. Such a group has the formula:

where Y is a leaving group such as Cl, Br, I, mesylate, tosylate, and the like. If the thiol acceptor is an alpha-substituted acetyl group, the thiol adduct after linkage to the ligand forms the bond —S—CH₂—. Preferably, the thiol acceptor is a Michael Addition acceptor. A representative Michael Addition acceptor of this invention has the formula

After linkage the thiol group of the ligand, the Michael Addition acceptor becomes a Michael Addition adduct, e.g.,

where L is an agent or peptide vector.
The bridging group “W” is a bifunctional chemical moiety capable of covalently linking together two spaced chemical moieties into a stable tripartate molecule. Examples of bridging groups are described in S. S. Wong, Chemistry of Protein Conjugation and Crosslinking. CRC Press, Florida, (1991); and G. E. Means and R. E. Feeney, Bioconjugate Chemistry, vol. 1, pp. 2-12, (1990), the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. W can covalently link the thiol acceptor to a keto moiety. An exemplary a bridging group has the formula —(CH₂)_f—(Z)_g—(CH₂)_h—, where f is 0 to 10; h is 0 to 10; g is 0 or 1, provided that when g is 0, then f+h is 1 to 10; Z is S, O, NH, SO₂, phenyl, naphthyl, a polyethylene glycol, a cycloaliphatic hydrocarbon ring containing 3 to 10 carbon atoms, or a heteroaromatic hydrocarbon ring containing 3 to 6 carbon atoms and 1 or 2 heteroatoms selected from O, N, or S. Preferred cycloaliphatic moieties include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and the like. Preferred heteroaromatic moieties include pyridyl, polyethlene glycol (1-20 repeating units), furanyl, pyranyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl, oxazinyl, pyrrolyl, thiazolyl, morpholinyl, and the like. In the bridging group, it is preferred that when g is 0, f+h is an integer of 2 to 6 (e.g., 2 to 4 such as 2). When g is 1, it is preferred that f is 0, 1 or 2; and that h is 0, 1 or 2. Preferred bridging groups coupled to thiol acceptors are shown in the Pierce Catalog, pp. E-12, E-13, E-14, E-15, E-16, and E-17 (1992).
Joining of the Peptide Vector Multimer to an Agent

In addition to the multimeric peptide vectors described above, the invention features compounds where the multimeric peptide vector is joined (e.g., by a covalent bond) to one or more agents (e.g., a diagnostic or therapeutic agent, such as any of those described herein). The agent may be joined to the peptide vector directly through a covalent bond such as a peptide bond or disulfide bond, or may be joined to the peptide vector through a linker (e.g., any linker described herein). The agent may be joined to the peptide vector through any appropriate reactive moiety on the vector, e.g., through a primary amine such as an N-terminal amine or a ε-amino group on a lysine side chain, through a thiol bond (e.g., through a cysteine side chain), or through a carboxyl group (e.g., a C-terminal carboxyl group or a aspartic acid or glutamic acid side chain). In embodiments where the agent is a peptide or polypeptide, the agent may be joined to the peptide vector by a peptide bond (e.g., produced synthetically or recombinantly as a fusion protein).

Dimeric Conjugates

Compounds including an agent and dimeric peptide vector can be conjugated either through the peptide vector portion of the molecule or through the linker portion of the molecule.

Compounds of the invention in which the agent is joined (e.g., through a linker where the linker is a chemical linker, peptide, or a covalent bond such as a peptide bond) to the peptide vector can be represented by the formula:

where A¹ and A² are each, independently, peptide vectors (e.g., any described herein); X is a linker (e.g., chemical linker, peptide, or covalent bond) that joins A¹ and A²; B¹ is an agent; and Y′ is a linker that joins B¹ and A¹. In certain embodiments, two or more (e.g., 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10) agents are joined to one or both of the peptide vectors. Such compounds can be represented by the formula:

where A¹, A², and X are as defined above; m is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10; n is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10; p is an integer from 1 to m; q is an integer from m+1 to m+n; each B^p and each B^q are, independently, an agent (e.g., any described herein); and each Y^p and each Y^q are, independently, a linker that joins each B^p or each B^q to A¹ or A², respectively.

In other embodiments, the agent is joined (e.g., through a covalent bond or a chemical linker such as those described herein) to the dimer through the linker that joins the peptide vectors forming the dimer. Such compounds can have the formula:

where A¹ and A² are peptide vectors (e.g., any described herein); B is an agent; and X is a linker that joins A¹, A², and B.

In other embodiments, agents can be joined to both the linker and a peptide vector. Such compounds can be represented by the formula:

where A¹ and A² are, independently, peptide vectors; B^Z is an agent or is absent; m is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10; n is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10; p is an integer from 1 to m; q is an integer from m+1 to m+n; Each B^p and B^q is, independently, an agent (e.g., any described herein); and each Y^p and Y^q is, independently, a linker that joins each B^p or each B^q to A¹ or A², respectively, where at least one (e.g., at least two) of the following is true (i) B1 is present; (ii) m is at least 1; and (iii) n is at least 1.

Trimeric Conjugates

Compounds of the invention can also include a trimeric peptide vector. Where the trimeric peptide vector is joined to a single agent through one of the peptide vectors, the compound can have one of the following formulas:

where A¹, A², and A³ are each, independently, a peptide vector (e.g., any described herein); X¹ and X² are linkers; B¹ is an agent; and Y¹ is a linker that joins B¹ to a peptide vector (e.g., A¹, A², and A³) or to the linker X¹.

In other embodiments, the trimeric peptide vector is conjugated to one or more than one agent. Such conjugation can be through either the peptide vector, or through the linker(s). Such compounds can include one of the following formulas:

where A¹, A², and A³ are peptide vectors; n, m, and j are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10; Each B^p, each B^q, and each B^r are, independently, agents (e.g., any agent described herein); B^z and B^y are, independently, agents or are absent; X¹ is a linker joining A¹, A², and B^z, if present; X² is a linker joining A², A³, and B^y, if present. In certain embodiments, at least one of n, m, or j is at least one, B^z is present, or B^y is present. In other embodiments, at least two (e.g., at least 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, or 30) of B^p, B^q, B^r, B^y, and B^z are present.

Higher Order Multimer Conjugates

The compounds of the invention can also include peptide multimers of a higher order (e.g., quatromers, pentomers, etc.). Such multimers can be described by the formula:

where A¹, A², each A^q, each A^r, and each A^s are, independently, peptide vectors; A³ is a peptide vector or is absent; X, each X^q, X^r, and X^s are, independently, linkers that join peptide vectors; m, n, and p are each, independently, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10; q is an integer from 4 to m+3; r is an integer from m+4 to m+n+3; and s is an integer from m+n+4 to m+n+p+3. One or more agents can be joined to either the linkers (X, any X^q, X^r, or X^s) or the peptide vectors (A¹, A², A³, each A^q, each A^r, and each A^s) of this formula in order to form higher order multimer conjugates.
Peptide Vectors

The compounds of the invention can feature any of polypeptides described herein, for example, any of the peptides described in Table 1 (e.g., Angiopep-1, Angiopep-2, Angiopep-7, or reversed Angiopep-2), or a fragment or analog thereof. In certain embodiments, the polypeptide may have at least 35%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, 99%, or even 100% identity to a polypeptide described herein. The polypeptide may have one or more (e.g., 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, or 15) substitutions relative to one of the sequences described herein. Other modifications are described in greater detail below.

The invention also features fragments of these polypeptides (e.g., a functional fragment). In certain embodiments, the fragments are capable of efficiently being transported to or accumulating in a particular cell type (e.g., liver, eye, lung, kidney, or spleen) or are efficiently transported across the BBB. Truncations of the polypeptide may be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, or more amino acids from either the N-terminus of the polypeptide, the C-terminus of the polypeptide, or a combination thereof. Other fragments include sequences where internal portions of the polypeptide are deleted.

Additional polypeptides may be identified by using one of the assays or methods described herein. For example, a candidate polypeptide may be produced by conventional peptide synthesis, conjugated with paclitaxel and administered to a laboratory animal. A biologically-active polypeptide conjugate may be identified, for example, based on its ability to increase survival of an animal injected with tumor cells and treated with the conjugate as compared to a control which has not been treated with a conjugate (e.g., treated with the unconjugated agent). For example, a biologically active polypeptide may be identified based on its location in the parenchyma in an in situ cerebral perfusion assay.

Assays to determine accumulation in other tissues may be performed as well. Labeled conjugates of a polypeptide can be administered to an animal, and accumulation in different organs can be measured. For example, a polypeptide conjugated to a detectable label (e.g., a near-IR fluorescence spectroscopy label such as Cy5.5) allows live in vivo visualization. Such a polypeptide can be administered to an animal, and the presence of the polypeptide in an organ can be detected, thus allowing determination of the rate and amount of accumulation of the polypeptide in the desired organ. In other embodiments, the polypeptide can be labelled with a radioactive isotope (e.g., ¹²⁵I). The polypeptide is then administered to an animal. After a period of time, the animal is sacrificed and the organs are extracted. The amount of radioisotope in each organ can then be measured using any means known in the art. By comparing the amount of a labeled candidate polypeptide in a particular organ relative to the amount of a labeled control polypeptide, the ability of the candidate polypeptide to access and accumulate in a particular tissue can be ascertained. Appropriate negative controls include any peptide or polypeptide known not to be efficiently transported into a particular cell type (e.g., a peptide related to Angiopep that does not cross the BBB, or any other peptide).

Additional sequences are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,807,980 (e.g., SEQ ID NO:102 herein), U.S. Pat. No. 5,780,265 (e.g., SEQ ID NO:103), U.S. Pat. No. 5,118,668 (e.g., SEQ ID NO:105). An exemplary nucleotide sequence encoding an aprotinin analog atgagaccag atttctgcct cgagccgccg tacactgggc cctgcaaagc tcgtatcatc cgttacttct acaatgcaaa ggcaggcctg tgtcagacct tcgtatacgg cggctgcaga gctaagcgta acaacttcaa atccgcggaa gactgcatgc gtacttgcgg tggtgcttag; SEQ ID NO:6; Genbank accession No. X04666). Other examples of aprotinin analogs may be found by performing a protein BLAST (Genbank: www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/BLAST/) using the synthetic aprotinin sequence (or portion thereof) disclosed in International Application No. PCT/CA2004/000011. Exemplary aprotinin analogs are also found under accession Nos. CAA37967 (GI:58005) and 1405218C (GI:3604747).

Agents

Any therapeutic or diagnostic agent may be conjugated to a multimer (e.g., a dimer) of the invention. Such agents may be chemically conjugated to one or more of the peptide vectors, or may be conjugated to a linker that joins two (or more) of the peptide vectors (e.g., a trifunetional linker). Agents of particular interest include anticancer agents (e.g., paclitaxel, etoposide, doxorubicin and analogs thereof), RNAi agents, and peptide and polypeptide therapeutics (e.g., GLP-1 agonists, neurotensin and neurotensin receptor agonists, leptin and OB receptor agonists, GDNF, BDNF, and analogs thereof).

In certain embodiments, the agent is a small molecule drug, an antibiotic, a medicine, a detectable label, a protein (e.g., an enzyme), protein-based compound (e.g., a protein complex comprising one or polypeptide chain) and a peptide or polypeptide. Exemplary peptide and polypeptide therapeutics that can be used in the present invention are described, for example in U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/200,947, filed Dec. 5, 2008, which is hereby incorporated by reference. The agent may be more particularly, a molecule which is active at the level of the central nervous system. The agent may be any agent for treating or detecting a neurological disease.

The agent may be a small molecule drug, an antibiotic, a medicine, a detectable label, a protein (e.g., an enzyme), protein-based compound (e.g., a protein complex comprising one or polypeptide chain) and a peptide or polypeptide. The agent may be more particularly, a molecule that is active at the level of the central nervous system. The agent may be any agent for treating or detecting a neurological disease.

The detectable label may be a radioimaging agent. Other label include an isotope, a fluorescent label (e.g., rhodamine), a reporter molecule (e.g., biotin), etc. Other examples of detectable labels include, for example, a green fluorescent protein, biotin, a histag protein and β-galactosidase.

Protein or protein-based compound which may be conjugated to a multimer of the invention include an antibody, an antibody fragment (e.g., an antibody binding fragment such as Fv fragment, F(ab)₂, F(ab)₂′ and Fab and the like), a peptidic- or protein-based drug (e.g., a positive pharmacological modulator (agonist) or an pharmacological inhibitor (antagonist)). Other examples of agents are cellular toxins (e.g., monomethyl auristatin E (MMAE), toxins from bacteria endotoxins and exotoxins; diphtheria toxins, botunilum toxins, tetanus toxins, perussis toxins, staphylococcus enterotoxins, toxin shock syndrome toxin TSST-1, adenylate cyclase toxin, shiga toxin, cholera enterotoxin, and others) and anti-angiogenic compounds (endostatin, catechins, nutriceuticals, chemokine IP-10, inhibitors of matrix metalloproteinase (MMPIs), anastellin, vironectin, antithrombin, tyrosine kinase inhibitors, VEGF inhibitors, antibodies against receptor, trastuzumab (Herceptin®), Bevacizumab (Avastin®), and panitumumab and others).

Particular agents are described in greater detail below.

Anticancer Agents

Also in accordance with the present invention, the agent may be an anticancer drug. An anticancer drug encompassed by the present invention may include, for example, a drug having a group allowing its conjugation to the carrier of the invention. Particular anticancer drugs include those selected from the group consisting of paclitaxel (Taxol), vinblastine, vincristine, etoposide, doxorubicin, cyclophosphamide, docetaxel (Taxotere®), melphalan, and chlorambucil; pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; or a combination thereof. In particular embodiments, the anticancer agent is paclitaxel, etoposide, or doxorubicin; a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; or a derivative thereof.

Other exemplary agents include abarelix, aldesleukin, alemtuzumab, alitertinoin, allopurinol, altretamine, amifostine, anakinra, anastrozole, arsenic trioxide, asparaginase, azacitidine, BCG Live, bevacuzimab, bexarotene, bleomycin, bleomycin, bortezombi, bortezomib, busulfan, busulfan, calusterone, capecitabine, carboplatin, carmustine, celecoxib, cetuximab, cisplatin, cladribine, clofarabine, cytarabine, dacarbazine, dactinomycin, actinomycin D, dalteparin (e.g., sodium), darbepoetin alfa, dasatinib, daunorubicin, daunomycin, decitabine, denileukin, denileukin diftitox, dexrazoxane, dromostanolone propionate, eculizumab, epirubicin (e.g., HCl), epoetin alfa, erlotinib, estramustine, exemestane, fentanyl (e.g., citrate), filgrastim, floxuridine, fludarabine, fluorouracil, 5-FU, fulvestrant, gefitinib, gemcitabine (e.g., HCl), gemtuzumab ozogamicin, goserelin (e.g., acetate), histrelin (e.g., acetate), hydroxyurea, ibritumomab tiuxetan, idarubicin, ifosfamide, imatinib (e.g., mesylate), Interferon alfa-2b, irinotecan, lapatinib ditosylate, lenalidomide, letrozole, leucovorin, leuprolide (e.g., acetate), levamisole, lomustine, CCNU, meclorethamine (nitrogen mustard), megestrol, mercaptopurine (6-MP), mesna, methotrexate, methoxsalen, mitomycin C, mitotane, mitoxantrone, nandrolone phenpropionate, nelarabine, nofetumomab, oprelvekin, oxaliplatin, palifermin, pamidronate, panitumumab, pegademase, pegaspargase, pegfilgrastim, peginterferon alfa-2b, pemeterxed (e.g., disodium), pentostatin, pipobroman, plicamycin (mithramycin), porfimer (e.g., sodium), procarbazine, quinacrine, rasburicase, rituximab, sargramostim, sorafenib, streptozocin, sunitinib (e.g., maleate), talc, tamoxifen, temozolomide, teniposide (VM-26), testolactone, thalidomide, thioguanine (6-TG), thiotepa, thiotepa, thiotepa, topotecan (e.g., hcl), toremifene, Tositumomab/1-131 (tositumomab), trastuzumab, trastuzumab, tretinoin (ATRA), uracil mustard, vairubicin, vinorelbine, vorinostat, zoledronate, and zoledronic acid.

Paclitaxel Derivatives

In certain embodiments, the agent is a derivative of paclitaxel. Structural analogs of paclitaxel are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,911,549 and can be described by the formula:

where R₁ is selected from the group consisting of —CH₃; —C₆H₅, or phenyl substituted with one, 2 or 3 C₁-C₄ alkyl, C₁-C₃ alkoxy, halo, C₁-C₃ alkylthio, trifluoromethyl, C₂-C₆, dialkylamino, hydroxyl, or nitro; and -2-furyl, 2-thienyl, 1-naphthyl, 2-naphthyl or 3,4-methylenedioxyphenyl; R₂ is selected from the group consisting of —H, —NHC(O)H, —NHC(O)C₁-C₁₀ alkyl (preferably —NHC(O)C₄-C₆ alkyl), —NHC(O)phenyl, —NHC(O)phenyl substituted with one, 2, or 3 C₁-C₄ alkyl, C₁-C₃ alkoxy, halo, C₁-C₃ alkylthio, trifluoromethyl, C₂-C₆ dialkylamino, hydroxy or nitro, —NHC(O)C(CH₃)═CHCH₃, —NHC(O)OC(CH₃)₃, —NHC(O)OCH₂ phenyl, —NH₂, —NHSO₂-4-methylphenyl, —NHC(O)(CH₂)₃COOH, —NHC(O)-4-(SO₃H)phenyl, —OH, —NHC(O)-1-adamantyl, —NHC(O)O-3-tetrahydrofuranyl, —NHC(O)O-4-tetrahydropyranyl, —NHC(O)CH₂C(CH₃)₃, —NHC(O)C(CH₃)₃, —NHC(O)OC₁-C₁₀ alkyl, —NHC(O)NHC₁-C₁₀ alkyl, —NHC(O)NHPh, —NHC(O)NHPh substituted with one, 2, or 3 C₁-C₄ alkyl, C₁-C₃ alkoxy, halo, C₁-C₃ alkylthio, trifluoromethyl, C₂-C₆ dialkylamino, or nitro, —NHC(O)C₃-C₈ cycloalkyl, —NHC(O)C(CH₂CH₃)₂CH₃, —NHC(O)C(CH₃)₂CH₂Cl, —NHC(O)C(CH₃)₂CH₂CH₃, phthalimido, —NHC(O)-1-phenyl-1-cyclopentyl, —NHC(O)-1-methyl-1-cyclohexyl, —NHC(S)NHC(CH₃)₃, —NHC(O)NHCC(CH₃)₃ or —NHC(O)NHPh; R₃ is selected from the group consisting of —H, —NHC(O)phenyl or —NHC(O)OC(CH₃)₃, with the overall proviso that one of R₂ and R₃ is —H but R₂ and R₃ are not both —H; R₄ is —H or selected from the group consisting of —OH, —OAc (—OC(O)CH₃), —OC(O)OCH₂C(Cl)₃, —OCOCH₂CH₂ NH₃ ⁺ HCOO⁻, —NHC(O)phenyl, —NHC(O)OC(CH₃)₃, —OCOCH₂CH₂ COOH and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, —OCO(CH₂)₃COOH and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, and —OC(O)—Z—C(O)—R′ [where Z is ethylene (—CH₂CH₂), propylene (—CH₂CH₂CH₂—), —CH═CH—, 1,2-cyclohexane or 1,2-phenylene, R′ s —OH, —OH base, —NR′₂R′₃, —OR′₃, —SR′₃, —OCH₂C(O)NR′₄R′₅ where R′₂ is —H or —CH₃, R′₃ s —(CH₂)_nNR′₆R′₇ or (CH₂)_nN⁺R′₆R′₇R′₈X⁻ where n is 1-3, R′₄ is —H or —C₁-C₄ alkyl, R′₅ is —H. —C₁-C₄ alkyl, benzyl, hydroxyethyl, —CH₂CO₂H or dimethylaminoethyl, R′₆ and R′₇ are —CH₃, —CH₂CH₃, benzyl or R′₆ and R′₇ together with the nitrogen of NR′₆R′₇ form a pyrrolidino, piperidino, morpholino, or N-methylpiperizino group; R′₈ s —CH₃, —CH₂CH₃ or benzyl, X⁻ is halide, and base is NH₃, (HOC₂H₄)₃N,N(CH₃)₃, CH₃N(C₂H₄)₂NH, NH₂(CH₂)₆NH₂, N-methylglucamine, NaOH or KOH], —OC(O)(CH₂)_nNR²R³ [where n is 1-3, R² is —H or —C₁-C₃ alkyl and R³ is —H or —C₁-C₃ alkyl], —OC(O)CH(R″)NH₂ [where R″ is selected from the group consisting of —H, —CH₃, —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂, —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₃, —CH(CH₃)₂, —CH₂ phenyl, —(CH₂)₄NH₂, —CH₂CH₂COON, —(CH₂)₃NHC(═NH)NH₂], the residue of the amino acid proline, —OC(O)CH═CH₂, —C(O)CH₂CH₂C(O)NHCH₂CH₂SO₃ ⁻Y⁺, —OC(O)CH₂CH₂C(O)NHCH₂CH₂CH₂SO₃ ⁻Y⁺ wherein Y⁺ is Na⁺ or N⁺(Bu)₄, —OC(O)CH₂CH₂C(O)OCH₂CH₂OH; R₅ is —H or —OH, with the overall proviso that when R₅ s —OH, R₄ is —H and with the further proviso that when R₅ is —H, R₄ is not —H; R₆ is —H:—H when R₇ is α-R₇₁:β-R₇₂ where one of R₇₁ and R₇₂ is —H and the other of R₇₁ and R₇₂ s —X where X is halo and R₈ s —CH₃; R₆ is —H:—H when R₇ is α-H: β-R₇₄ where R₇₄ and R₈ are taken together to form a cyclopropyl ring; R₁₀ is —H or —C(O)CH₃; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof when the compound contains either an acidic or basic functional group.

Particular paclitaxel analogs include ((azidophenyl)ureido)taxoid, (2α,5α,7β,9α,10β,13α)-5,10,13,20-tetraacetoxytax-11-ene-2,7,9-triol, (2α,5α,9α,10β)-2,9,10-triacetoxy-5-(β-D-glucopyranosyl)oxy)-3,11-cyclotax-11-en-13-one, 1β-hydroxybaccatin I, 1,7-dihydroxytaxinine, 1-acety-5,7,10-deacetyl-baccatin I, 1-dehydroxybaccatin VI, 1-hydroxy-2-deacetoxy-5-decinnamoyl-taxinine j, 1-hydroxy-7,9-dideacetylbaccatin I, 1-hydroxybaccatin I, 10-acetyl-4-deacetyltaxotere, 10-deacetoxypaclitaxel, 10-Deacetyl baccatin III dimethyl sulfoxide disolvate, 10-deacetyl-10-(3-aminobenzoyl)paclitaxel, 10-deacetyl-10-(7-(diethylamino)coumarin-3-carbonyl)paclitaxel, 10-deacetyl-9-dihydrotaxol, 10-deacetylbaccatine III, 10-deacetylpaclitaxel, 10-deacetyltaxinine, 10-deacetyltaxol, 10-deoxy-10-C-morpholinoethyl docetaxel, 10-O-acetyl-2-O-(cyclohexylcarbonyl)-2-debenzoyltaxotere, 10-O-sec-aminoethyl docetaxel, 11-desmethyllaulimalide, 13-deoxo-13-acetyloxy-7,9-diacetyl-1,2-dideoxytaxine, 13-deoxybaccatin III, 14-hydroxy-10-deacetyl-2-O-debenzoylbacatin III, 14-hydroxy-10-deacetylbaccatin III, 14β-benzoyloxy-13-deacetylbaccatin IV, 14β-benzoyloxy-2-deacetylbaccatin VI, 14β-benzoyloxybaccatin IV, 19-hydroxybaccatin III, 2′,2″-methylenedocetaxel, 2′,2″-methylenepaclitaxel, 2′-(valyl-leucyl-lysyl-PABC)paclitaxel, 2′-acetyltaxol, 2′-O-acetyl-7-O—(N-(4′-fluoresceincarbonyl)alanyl)taxol, 2,10,13-triacetoxy-taxa-4(20),11-diene-5,7,9-triol, 2,20-O-diacetyltaxumairol N, 2-(4-azidobenzoyl)taxol, 2-deacetoxytaxinine J, 2-debenzoyl-2-m-methoxybenozyl-7-triethylsilyl-13-oxo-14-hydroxybaccatin III 1,14-carbonate, 2-O-(cyclohexylcarbonyl)-2-debenzoylbaccatin III 13-O—(N-(cyclohexylcarbonyl)-3-cyclohexylisoserinate), 2α, 7β,9α,10β,13α-pentaacetoxyltaxa-4 (20), 11-dien-5-ol, 2α,5α,7β,9α,13α-pentahydroxy-10β-acetoxytaxa-4(20),11-diene, 2α,7β,9α,10β,13-pentaacetoxy-11β-hydroxy-5α-(3′-N,N-dimethylamino-3′-phenyl)-propionyloxytaxa-4(20),12-diene, 2α,7β-diacetoxy-5α,10β,13β-trihydroxy-2(3-20)abeotaxa-4(20),11-dien-9-one, 2α,9α-dihydroxy-10β,13α-diacetoxy-5α-(3′-methylamino-3′-phenyl)-propionyloxytaxa-4(20),11-diene, 2α-hydroxy-7β,9α,10β,13α-tetraacetoxy-5α-(2′-hydroxy-3′-N,N-dimethylamino-3′-phenyl)-propionyloxytaxa-4(20),11-diene, 3′-(4-azidobenzamido)taxol, 3′-N-(4-benzoyldihydrocinnamoyl)-3′-N-debenzoylpaclitaxel, 3′-N-m-aminobenzamido-3′-debenzamidopaclitaxel, 3′-p-hydroxypaclitaxel, 3,11-cyclotaxinine N,N-2,4-deacetyltaxol, 5,13-diacetoxy-taxa-4(20),11-diene-9,10-diol, 5-O-benzoylated taxinine K, 5-O-phenylpropionyloxytaxinine A, 5α,13α-diacetoxy-10β-cinnamoyloxy-4(20),11-taxadien-9α-ol, 6,3′-p-dihydroxypaclitaxel, 6-α-hydroxy-7-deoxy-10-deacetylbaccatin-III, 6-fluoro-10-acetyldocetaxel, 6-hydroxytaxol, 7,13-diacetoxy-5-climamyloxy-2(3-20)-abeo-taxa-4(20),11-diene-2,10-diol, 7,9-dideacetylbaccatin VI, 7-(5′Biotinylamidopropanoyl)paclitaxel, 7-acetyltaxol, 7-deoxy-10-deacetylbaccatin-III, 7-deoxy-9-dihydropaclitaxel, 7-epipaclitaxel, 7-methylthiomethylpaclitaxel, 7-O-(4-benzoyldihydrocinnamoyl)paclitaxel, 7-O—(N-(4′-fluoresceincarbonyl)alanyetaxol, 7-xylosyl-10-deacetyltaxol, 8,9-single-epoxy brevifolin, 9-dihydrobaccatin III, 9-dihydrotaxol, 9α-hydroxy-2α,10β,13α-triacetoxy-5α-(3′-N,N-dimethylamino-3′-phenyl)-propionyloxytaxa-4(20),11-diene, baccatin III, baccatin III 13-O-(N-benzoyl-3-cyclohexylisoserinate), BAY59, benzoyltaxol, BMS 181339, BMS185660, BMS188797, brevifoliol, butitaxel, cephalomannine, dantaxusin A, dantaxusin B, dantaxusin C, dantaxusin D, dibromo-10-deacetylcephalomannine, DJ927, docetaxel, Flutax 2, glutarylpaclitaxel 6-aminohexanol glucuronide, IDN 5109, IDN 5111, IDN 5127, IDN 5390, isolaulimalide, laulimalide, MST 997, N-(paclitaxel-2′-O-(2-amino)phenylpropionate)-O-(β-glucuronyl)carbamate, N-(paclitaxel-2′-O-3,3-dimethyl butanoate)-O-(β-glucuronyl)carbamate, N-debenzoyl-N-(3-(dimethylamino)benzoyl)paclitaxel, nonataxel, octreotide-conjugated paclitaxel, Paclitaxel, paclitaxel-transferrin, PNU 166945, poly(ethylene glycol)-conjugated paclitaxel-2′-glycinate, polyglutamic acid-paclitaxel, protax, protaxel, RPR 109881A, SB T-101187, SB T-1102, SB T-1213, SB T-1214, SB T-1250, SB T-12843, tasumatrol E, tasumatrol F, tasumatrol G, taxa-4(20),11(12)-dien-5-yl acetate, taxa-4(20),11(12)-diene-5-ol, taxane, taxchinin N, taxcultine, taxezopidine M, taxezopidine N, taxine, taxinine, taxinine A, taxinine M, taxinine NN-1, taxinine N,N-7, taxol C-7-xylose, taxol-sialyl conjugate, taxumairol A, taxumairol B, taxumairol G, taxumairol H, taxumairol I, taxumairol K, taxumairol M, taxumairol N, taxumairol 0, taxumairol U, taxumairol V, taxumairol W, taxumairol-X, taxumairol-Y, taxumairol-Z, taxusin, taxuspinanane A, taxuspinanane B, taxuspine C, taxuspine D, taxuspine F, taxuyunnanine C, taxuyunnanine S, taxuyunnanine T, taxuyunnanine U, taxuyunnanine V, tRA-96023, and wallifoliol. Other paclitaxel analogs include 1-deoxypaclitaxel, 10-deacetoxy-7-deoxypaclitaxel, 10-O-deacetylpaclitaxel 10-monosuccinyl ester, 10-succinyl paclitaxel, 12b-acetyloxy-2a,3,4,4a,5,6,9,10,11,12,12a,12b-dodecahydro-4,11-dihydroxy-12-(2,5-dimethoxybenzyloxy)-4a,8,13,13-tetramethyl-5-oxo-7,11-methano-1H-cyclodeca(3,4)benz(1,2-b)oxet-9-yl 3-(tert-butyloxycarbonyl)amino-2-hydroxy-5-methyl-4-hexaenoate, 130-nm albumin-bound paclitaxel, 2′-paclitaxel methyl 2-glucopyranosyl succinate, 3′-(4-azidophenyl)-3′-dephenylpaclitaxel, 4-fluoropaclitaxel, 6,6,8-trimethyl-4,4a,5,6,7,7a,8,9-octahydrocyclopenta(4,5)cyclohepta(1,2-c)-furan-4,8-diol 4-(N-acetyl-3-phenylisoserinate), 6,6,8-trimethyl-4,4a,5,6,7,7a,8,9-octahydrocyclopenta(4,5)cyclohepta(1,2-c)-furan-4,8-diol 4-(N-tert-butoxycarbonyl-3-phenylisoserinate), 7-(3-methyl-3-nitrosothiobutyryl)paclitaxel, 7-deoxypaclitaxel, 7-succinylpaclitaxel, A-Z-CINN 310, AI-850, albumin-bound paclitaxel, AZ 10992,isotaxel, MAC321, MBT-0206, NK105, Pacliex, paclitaxel poliglumex, paclitaxel-EC-1 conjugate, polilactofate, and TXD 258. Other paclitaxel analogs are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,814,470, 4,857,653, 4,942,184, 4,924,011, 4,924,012, 4,960,790; 5,015,744; 5,157,049; 5,059,699; 5,136,060; 4,876,399; and 5,227,400

Etoposide Derivatives

Etoposide derivatives may also be used in the compounds of the invention. In some embodiments, the podophyllotoxin derivative is a compound having a structure according to the formula:

or a stereoisomer thereof; where each R₁, R₂, and R₃ is selected, independently, from H, optionally substituted C_1-6 alkyl, C(O)R₈, P(O)(OR₉)(OR₁₀), S(O)₂(OR₉), or a hydrolyzable linker Y that comprises a covalent bond to an amino acid of the polypeptide; X is O or NR₇; each R₄, R₅, and R₇ is selected, independently, from H, optionally substituted C_1-6 alkyl, C(O)R₈, or a hydrolyzable linker Y that comprises a covalent bond to an amino acid of the polypeptide; R₆ is H, optionally substituted C_1-6 alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl; R₈ is selected from optionally substituted C_1-6 alkyl or optionally substituted aryl; each R₉ and R₁₀ is selected, independently, from H, optionally substituted C_1-6 alkyl, or optionally substituted aryl; and n is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8. In certain embodiments, the etoposide derivative is conjugated at the 2′ or 3′ hydroxyl group. Further examples of such conjugation strategies are described in U.S. Provisional Application Nos. 61/105,654, filed Oct. 15, 2008, and 61/171,010, filed Apr. 20, 2009.

Other derivatives of etoposide include etoposide phosphate (ETOPOPHOS®), where the phenolic —OH is replaced with —OP(O)(OH)₂, or any pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof (e.g., —OP(O)(ONa)₂). Etoposide phosphate has improved water solubility compared to etoposide.

Other etoposide derivatives include those where the phenolic —OH is replaced with an acyloxy group (e.g., —OC(O)R₈, as described herein) such as the following compound:

These acylated etoposide derivatives can also show improved water solubility relative to etoposide when covalently attached to any of the polypeptides described herein.

Other exemplary podophyllotoxin derivatives include teniposide and NK611.

Still other podophyllotoxin derivatives suitable for use in the invention are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,567,253; 4,609,644; 4,900,814; 4,958,010; 5,489,698; 5,536,847; 5,571,914; 6,051,721; 6,107,284; 6,475,486; 6,610,299; 6,878,746; 6,894,075; 7,087,641; 7,176,236; 7,241,595; 7,342,114; and 7,378,419; and in U.S. Patent Publication Nos. 20030064482, 20030162722, 20040044058, 20060148728, and 20070249651, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference.

Doxorubicin Derivatives

In some embodiments, the anti-cancer agent is doxorubicin (hydroxydaunorubicin or Adriamycin®) or a doxorubicin derivative such as epirubicin (Ellence® or Pharmorubicie®). The structures of these exemplary compounds are shown below. Doxorubicin and doxorubicin derivatives can be covalently attached to an amino acid in any of the polypeptides described herein through a hydrolyzable covalent linker bonded to, for example, the 14-hydroxyl group.

Doxorubicin derivatives can be described generally by the following formula:

where each X₁, X₂, X₃, X₄, and X₅ is selected, independently, from a covalent bond, O, or NR₂₅; each R₁₇, R₁₈, R₁₉, R₂₀, R₂₀, R₂₁, R₂₂, R₂₃, R₂₄, and R₂₅, is selected, independently, from H, optionally substituted C_1-6 alkyl, optionally substituted C_2-6 alkenyl, optionally substituted C_2-6 alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, or is a hydrolyzable linker Y as defined herein.

When a compound of Formula (II) is attached to any of the polypeptides described herein, one of R₁₇, R₁₈, R₁₉, R₂₀, R₂₀, R₂₁, R₂₂, R₂₃, R₂₄, and R₂₅ is Y. In certain embodiments, R₂₁ is Y.

Other doxorubicin derivatives can be found in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,098,884, 4,301,277, 4,314,054, 4,464,529, 4,585,859, 4,672,057, 4,684,629, 4,826,964, 5,200,513, 5,304,687, 5,594,158, 5,625,043, and 5,874,412, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference.

Nucleic Acids

The multimeric peptide vectors may be conjugated to any nucleic acid, including expression vectors (e.g., a plasmid) and therapeutic nucleic acids (e.g., RNAi agents). The expression vector may encode a polypeptide (e.g., a therapeutic polypeptide such as an interferon, a therapeutic cytokine (e.g., IL-12), or FGF-2) or may encode a therapeutic nucleic acid (e.g., an RNAi agent such as those described herein). Nucleic acids include any type known in the art, such as double and single-stranded DNA and RNA molecules of any length, conformation, charge, or shape (i.e., linear, concatemer, circular (e.g., a plasmid), nicked circular, coiled, supercoiled, or charged. Additionally, the nucleic acid can contain 5′ and 3′ terminal modifications and include blunt and overhanging nucleotides at these termini, or combinations thereof. In certain embodiments of the invention the nucleic acid is or encodes an RNA interference sequence (e.g., an siRNA, shRNA, miRNA, or dsRNA nucleotide sequence) that can silence a targeted gene product. The nucleic acid can be, for example, a DNA molecule, an RNA molecule, or a modified form thereof.

Exemplary RNAi targets include growth factors (e.g., epidermal growth factor (EGF), vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF), transforming growth factor-β (TGF-β)), growth factor receptors, including receptor tyrosine kinases (e.g., EGF receptor (EGFR), including Her2/neu (ErbB), VEGF receptor (VEGFR), platelet-derived growth factor receptor (PDGFR), cytokines, chemokines, kinases, including cytoplasmic tyrosine and serine/threonine kinases (e.g., focal adhesion kinase, cyclin-dependent kinase, SRC kinases, syk-ZAP70 kinases, BTK kinases, RAF kinase, MAP kinases (including ERIC), and Wnt kinases), phosphatases, regulatory GTPases (e.g., Ras protein), transcription factors (e.g., MYC), hormones and hormone receptors (e.g., estrogen and estrogen receptor), anti-apoptotic molecules (e.g., survivin, Bcl-2, Bcl-xL), oncogenes (e.g., tumor suppressor regulators such as mdm2), enzymes (e.g., superoxide dismutase 1 (SOD-1), α, β (BACE), and γ secretases, alpha-L-iduronidase, iduronate sulfatase, heparan N-sulfatase, alpha-N-acetylglucosaminidase, acetyl-CoAlpha-glucosaminide acetyltransferase, N-acetylglucosamine 6-sulfatase, N-acetylgalactosamine 4-sulfatase, beta-galactosidase, sphingomyelinase, glucocerebrosidase, alpha-galactosidase-A, ceramidase, galactosylceramidase, arylsulfatase A, aspartoacylase, phytanoyl-CoA hydroxylase, peroxin-7, beta-hexosaminidase A, aspartylglucosaminidase, fucosidase, and alpha-mannosidase, sialidase), and other proteins (e.g., Huntingtin (Htt protein), amyloid precursor protein (APP), sorting nexins (including SNX6), α-synuclein, LINGO-1, Nogo-A, and Nogo receptor 1 (NgR-1)), and glial fibrillary acidic protein. Table 2 illustrates the relationship between exemplary RNAi targets and diseases.

Exemplary RNAi sequences to silence EGFR are SEQ ID NO:117 (GGAGCUGCCCAUGAGAAAU) and SEQ ID NO:118 (AUUUCUCAUGGGCAGCUCC). Likewise, VEGF can be silenced with an RNAi molecule having the sequence, for example, set forth in SEQ ID NO:119 (GGAGTACCCTGATGAGATC). Additional RNAi sequences for use in the agents of the invention may be either commercially available (e.g., Dharmacon, Ambion) or the practitioner may use one of several publicly available software tools for the construction of viable RNAi sequences (e.g., The siRNA Selection Server, maintained by MIT/Whitehead; available at: http://jura.wi.mit.edu/bioc/siRNAext/). Examples of diseases or conditions, and RNAi target that may be useful in treatment of such diseases, are shown in Table 3.

TABLE 2
Exemplary Diseases and Target Molecules

Disease/Condition	RNAi Target Molecules
Cancer
Glioblastoma	Epidermal growth factor receptor (EGFR), Vascular
	endothelial growth factor (VEGF)
Glioma	EGFR, VEGF
Astrocytoma	EGFR, VEGF
Neuroblastoma	EGFR, VEGF
Lung cancer	EGFR, VEGF
Breast cancer	EGFR, VEGF
Hepatocellular carcinoma	EGFR, VEGF
Neurodegenerative Disease
Huntington's disease	Huntingtin (Htt)
Parkinson's disease	Alpha-synuclein
Alzheimer's disease	Amyloid precursor protein (APP), Presenilin-1 or -2,
	Apolipoprotein E (ApoE)
Amyotropic lateral schlerosis	Superoxide dismutase 1 (SOD-1)
Multiple schlerosis	Sorting nexin-6 (SNX6), LINGO-1, Nogo-A, NgR-1,
	APP
Lysosomal Storage Disease
MPS-I (Hurler, Scheie diseases)	Alpha-L-iduronidase
MPS-II (Hunter syndrome)	Iduronate sulfatase
MPS-IIIA (Sanfilippo syndrome A)	Heparan N-sulfatase
MPS-IIIB (Sanfilippo syndrome B)	Alpha-N-acetylglucosaminidase
MPS-IIIC (Sanfilippo syndrome C)	Acetyl-CoAlpha-glucosaminide acetyltransferase
MPS-IIID (Sanfilippo syndrome D)	N-acetylglucosamine 6-sulfatase
MPS-VI (Maroteaux-Lamy syndrome)	N-acetylgalactosamine 4-sulfatase
MPS-VII (Sly syndrome)	Beta-glucuronidase
Niemann-Pick disease	Sphingomyelinase
Gaucher's disease	Glucocerebrosidase
Fabry disease	Alpha-galactosidase-A
Farber's disease	Ceramidase
Krabbé disease	Galactosylceramidase
Metachromatic leukodystrophy	Arylsulfatase A
Alexander disease	Glial fibrillary acidic protein
Canavan disease	Aspartoacylase
Refsum's disease	Phytanoyl-CoA hydroxylase or peroxin-7
GM1 gangliosidoses	Beta-galactosidase
GM2 gangliosidoses (e.g., Tay-Sachs,	Beta-hexosaminidase A
Sandhoff diseases)
Aspartylglucosaminuria	Aspartylglucosaminidase (AGA).
Fucosidosis	Fucosidase
Mannosidosis	Alpha-mannosidase
Mucolipodosis (sialidosis	Sialidase

GLP-1 Agonists

The multimers described herein can be conjugated to GLP-1 agonist known in the art. Particular GLP-1 agonists include GLP-1, exendin-4, and analogs thereof. Exemplary analogs are described below.

Exendin-4 and exendin-4 analogs. Exendin-4 and exendin-4 analogs can also be used in the compositions, methods, and kits of the invention. The compounds of the invention can include fragments of the exendin-4 sequence. Exendin-4 has the sequence.
His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Leu-Ser-Lys-Gln-Met-Glu-Glu-Glu-Ala-Val-Arg-Leu-Phe-Ile-Glu-Trp-Leu-Lys-Asn-Gly-Gly-Pro-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-Pro-Pro-Pro-Ser-NH₂ (SEQ ID NO: 132)

Particular exendin-4 analogs include those having a cysteine substitution (e.g., [Cys³²]exendin-4 (SEQ ID NO : 133)) or a lysine substitution (e.g., [Lys³⁹]exendin-4 (SEQ ID NO: 134)).

Exendin analogs are also described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,157,555 and include those of the formula:
X₁-X₂-X₃-Gly-Thr-X₄-X₅-X₆-X₇-X₈-Ser-Lys-Gln-X₉-Glu-Glu-Glu-Ala-Val-Arg-Leu-X₁₀-X₁₁-X₁₂-X₁₃-Leu-Lys-Asn-Gly-Gly-X₁₄-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-X₁₅-X₁₆-X₁₇-X₁₈-Z (SEQ ID NO: 135)
where X₁ is His, Arg or Tyr; X₂ is Ser, Gly, Ala or Thr; X₃ is Asp or Glu; X₄ is Phe, Tyr or NaI; X₅ is Thr or Ser; X₆ is Ser or Thr; X₇ is Asp or Glu; X₈ is Leu, Ile, Val, pGly or Met; X₉ is Leu, Ile, pGly, Val or Met; X₁₀ is Phe, Tyr, or NaI; X₁₁ is Ile, Val, Leu, pGly, t-BuG or Met; X₁₂ is Glu or Asp; X₁₃ is Trp, Phe, Tyr, or NaI; X₁₄, X₁₅, X₁₆ and X₁₇ are independently Pro, HPro, 3Hyp, 4Hyp, TPro, N-alkylglycine, N-alkyl-pGly or N-alkylalanine; X₁₈ is Ser, Thr, or Tyr; and Z s —OH or —NH₂ (e.g., with the proviso that the compound is not exendin-3 or exindin-4.)

Preferred N-alkyl groups for N-alkylglycine, N-alkyl-pGly and N-alkylalanine include lower alkyl groups (e.g., C_1-6 alkyl or C_1-4 alkyl).

In certain embodiments, X₁ is His or Tyr (e.g., His). X₂ can be Gly. X₉ can be Leu, pGly, or Met. X₁₃ can be Trp or Phe. X₄ can be Phe or NaI; X₁₁ can be Ile or Val, and X₁₄, X₁₅, X₁₆ and X₁₇ can be independently selected from Pro, HPro, TPro, or N-alkylalanine (e.g., where N-alkylalanine has a N-alkyl group of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms). In one aspect, X₁₅, X₁₆, and X₁₇ are the same amino acid residue. X₁₈ may be Ser or Tyr (e.g., Ser). Z can be —NH₂.

In other embodiments, X₁ is His or Tyr (e.g., His); X₂ is Gly; X₄ is Phe or NaI; X₉ is Leu, pGly, or Met; X₁₀ is Phe or NaI; X₁₁ is Ile or Val; X₁₄, X₁₅, X₁₆, and X₁₇ are independently selected from Pro, HPro, TPro, or N-alkylalanine; and X₁₈ is Ser or Tyr, (e.g., Ser). Z can be —NH₂.

In other embodiments, X₁ is His or Arg; X₂ is Gly; X₃ is Asp or Glu; X₄ is Phe or napthylalanine; X₅ is Thr or Ser; X₆ is Ser or Thr; X₇ is Asp or Glu; X₈ is Leu or pGly; X₉ is Leu or pGly; X₁₀ is Phe or NaI; X₁₁ is Ile, Val, or t-butyltylglycine; X₁₂ is Glu or Asp; X₁₃ is Trp or Phe; X₁₄, X₁₅, X₁₆, and X₁₇ are independently Pro, HPro, TPro, or N-methylalanine; X₁₈ is Ser or Tyr: and Z s —OH or —NH₂ (e.g., where the compound is not exendin-3 or exendin-4). Z can be —NH₂.

In another embodiment, X₉ is Leu, Ile, Val, or pGly (e.g., Leu or pGly) and X₁₃ is Phe, Tyr, or NaI (e.g., Phe or NaI). These compounds can exhibit advantageous duration of action and be less subject to oxidative degradation, both in vitro and in vivo, as well as during synthesis of the compound.

Other exendin analogs also described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,157,555 and 7,223,725, include compounds of the formula:
X₁-X₂-X₃-Gly-X₅-X₆-X₇-X₈-X₉-X₁₀-X₁₁-X₁₂-X₁₃-X₁₄-X₁₅-X₁₆-X₁₇-Ala-X₁₉-X₂₀-X₂₁-X₂₂-X₂₃-X₂₄-X₂₅-X₂₆-X₂₇-X₂₈-Z₁ (SEQ ID NO: 179)
where X₁ is His, Arg, or Tyr; X₂ is Ser, Gly, Ala, or Thr; X₃ is Asp or Glu; X₅ is Ala or Thr; X₆ is Ala, Phe, Tyr, or NaI; X₇ is Thr or Ser; X₈ is Ala, Ser, or Thr; X₉ is Asp or Glu; X₁₀ is Ala, Leu, Ile, Val, pGly, or Met; X₁₁ is Ala or Ser; X₁₂ is Ala or Lys; X₁₃ is Ala or Gln; X₁₄ is Ala, Leu, Ile, pGly, Val, or Met; X₁₅ is Ala or Glu; X₁₆ is Ala or Glu; X₁₇ is Ala or Glu; X₁₉ is Ala or Val; X₂₀ is Ala or Arg; X₂₁ is Ala or Leu; X₂₂ is Phe, Tyr, or NaI; X₂₃ is Ile, Val, Leu, pGly, t-BuG, or Met; X₂₄ is Ala, Glu, or Asp; X₂₅ is Ala, Trp, Phe, Tyr, or NaI; X₂₆ is Ala or Leu; X₂₇ is Ala or Lys; X₂₈ is Ala or Asn; Z₁ s —OH, —NH₂, Gly-Z₂, Gly-Gly-Z₂, Gly-Gly-X₃₁-Z₂, Gly-Gly-X₃₁-Ser-Z₂, Gly-Gly-X₃₁-Ser-Ser-Z₂, Gly-Gly-X₃₁-Ser-Ser-Gly-Z₂, Gly-Gly-X₃₁-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-Z₂, Gly-Gly-X₃₁-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-X₃₆-Z₂, Gly-Gly-X₃₁-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-X₃₆-X₃₇-Z₂ Or Gly-Gly-X₃₁-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-X₃₆-X₃₇-X₃₈-Z₂; X₃₁, X₃₆, X₃₇, and X₃₈ are independently Pro, HPro, 3Hyp, 4Hyp, TPro, N-alkylglycine, N-alkyl-pGly or N-alkylalanine; and Z₂ s —OH or —NH₂ (e.g., provided that no more than three of X₅, X₆, X₈, X₁₀, X₁₁, X₁₂, X₁₃, X₁₄, X₁₅, X₁₆, X₁₇, X₁₉, X₂₀, X₂₁, X₂₄, X₂₅, X₂₆, X₂₇ and X₂₈ are Ala). Preferred N-alkyl groups for N-alkylglycine, N-alkyl-pGly and N-alkylalanine include lower alkyl groups of 1 to about 6 carbon atoms (e.g., 1 to 4 carbon atoms).

In certain embodiments, X₁ is His or Tyr (e.g., His). X₂ can be Gly. X₁₄ can be Leu, pGly, or Met. X₂₅ can be Trp or Phe. In some embodiments, X₆ is Phe or NaI, X₂₂ is Phe or NaI, and X₂₃ is Ile or Val. X₃₁, X₃₆, X₃₇, and X₃₈ can be independently selected from Pro, HPro, TPro, and N-alkylalanine. In certain embodiments, Z₁ s —NH₂ or Z₂ s —NH₂.

In another embodiment, X₁ is His or Tyr (e.g., His); X₂ is Gly; X₆ is Phe or NaI; X₁₄ is Leu, pGly, or Met; X₂₂ is Phe or NaI; X₂₃ is Ile or Val; X₃₁, X₃₆, X₃₇, and X₃₈ are independently selected from Pro, HPro, TPro, or N-alkylalanine. In particular embodiments, Z₁ s —NH₂.

In another embodiment, X₁ is His or Arg; X₂ is Gly or Ala; X₃ is Asp or Glu; X₅ is Ala or Thr; X₆ is Ala, Phe, or naphthylalanine; X₇ is Thr or Ser; X₈ is Ala, Ser, or Thr; X₉ is Asp or Glu; X₁₀ is Ala, Leu, or pGly; X₁₁ is Ala or Ser; X₁₂ is Ala or Lys; X₁₃ is Ala or Gln; X₁₄ is Ala, Leu, or pGly; X₁₅ is Ala or Glu; X₁₆ is Ala or Glu; X₁₇ is Ala or Glu; X₁₉ is Ala or Val; X₂₀ is Ala or Arg; X₂₁ is Ala or Len; X₂₂ is Phe or NaI; X₂₃ is Ile, Val or t-BuG; X₂₄ is Ala, Glu or Asp; X₂₅ is Ala, Trp or Phe; X₂₆ is Ala or Leu; X₂₇ is Ala or Lys; X₂₈ is Ala or Asn; Z₁ s —OH, —NH₂, Gly-Z₂, Gly-Gly-Z₂, Gly-Gly-X₃₁-Z₂, Gly-Gly X₃₁-Ser-Z₂, Gly-Gly-X₃₁ Ser-Ser-Z₂, Gly-Gly-X₃₁ Ser-Ser-Gly-Z₂, Gly-Gly-X₃₁ Ser-Ser-Gly Ala-Z₂, Gly-Gly-X₃₁ Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-X₃₆-Z₂, Gly-Gly-X₃₁-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-X₃₆-X₃₇-Z₂, Gly-Gly-X₃₁-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-X₃₆-X₃₇-X₃₈-Z₂; X₃₁, X₃₆, X₃₇ and X₃₈ being independently Pro HPro, TPro or N-methylalanine; and Z₂ being —OH or —NH₂ (e.g., provided that no more than three of X₃, X₅, X₆, X₈, X₁₀, X₁₁, X₁₂, X₁₃, X₁₄, X₁₅, X₁₆, X₁₇, X₁₉, X₂₀, X₂₁, X₂₄, X₂₅, X₂₆, X₂₇ and X₂₈ are Ala).

In yet another embodiment, X₁₄ is Leu, Ile, Val, or pGly (e.g., Leu or pGly), and X₂₅ is Phe, Tyr or NaI (e.g., Phe or NaI).

Exendin analogs described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,220,721 include compounds of the formula:
X₁-X₂-X₃-X₄-X-₅-X₆-X₇-X₈-X₉-X₁₀-X₁₁-X₁₂-X₁₃-X₁₄-X₁₅-X₁₆-X₁₇-Ala-X₁₉-X₂₀-X₂₁-X₂₂-X₂₃-X₂₄-X₂₅-X₂₆-X₂₇-X₂₈-Z₁ (SEQ ID NO: 180)
where X₁ is His, Arg, Tyr, Ala, Norval, Val, or Norleu; X₂ is Ser, Gly, Ala, or Thr; X₃ is Ala, Asp, or Glu; X₄ is Ala, Norval, Val, Norleu, or Gly; X₅ is Ala or Thr; X₆ is Phe, Tyr or NaI; X₇ is Thr or Ser; X₈ is Ala, Ser or Thr; X₉ is Ala, Norval, Val, Norleu, Asp, or Glu; X₁₀ is Ala, Leu, Ile, Val, pGly, or Met; X₁₁ is Ala or Ser; X₁₂ is Ala or Lys; X₁₃ is Ala or Gln; X₁₄ is Ala, Leu, Ile, pGly, Val, or Met; X₁₅ is Ala or Glu; X₁₆ is Ala or Glu; X₁₇ is Ala or Glu; X₁₉ is Ala or Val; X₂₀ is Ala or Arg; X₂₁ is Ala or Leu; X₂₂ is Phe, Tyr, or NaI; X₂₃ is Ile, Val, Leu, pGly, t-BuG, or Met; X₂₄ is Ala, Glu, or Asp; X₂₅ is Ala, Trp, Phe, Tyr, or NaI; X₂₆ is Ala or Leu; X₂₇ is Ala or Lys; X₂₈ is Ala or Asn; Z₁ s —OH, —NH₂, Gly-Z₂, Gly-Gly-Z₂, Gly-Gly-X₃₁-Z₂, Gly-Gly-X₃₁-Ser-Z₂, Gly-Gly-X₃₁-Ser-Ser-Z₂, Gly-Gly-X₃₁-Ser-Ser-Gly-Z₂, Gly-Gly-X₃₁ Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-Z₂, Gly-Gly-X₃₁-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-X₁₃-Z₂, Gly-Gly-X₃₁, Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-X₃₆-X₃₇-Z₂, Gly-Gly X₃₁ Ser Ser Gly Ala X₃₆X₃₇ X₃₁-Z₂ or Gly Gly X₃₁ Ser Ser Gly Ala X₃₆ X₃₇X₃₈ X₃₉-Z₂; where X₃₁, X₃₆, X₃₇, and X₃₈ are independently Pro, HPro, 3Hyp, 4Hyp, TPro, N-alkylglycine, N-alkyl-pGly, or N-alkylalanine; and Z₂ is —OH or —NH₂ (e.g., provided that no more than three of X₃, X₄, X₅, X₈, X₉, X₁₀, X₁₁, X₁₂, X₁₃, X₁₄, X₁₅, X₁₆, X₁₇, X₁₉, X₂₀, X₂₁, X₂₄, X₂₅, X₂₆, X₂₇ and X₂₈ are Ala and/or provided also that, if X₁ is His, Arg, or Tyr, then at least one of X₃, X₄ and X₉ is Ala).

U.S. Pat. No. 7,329,646 describes exendin-4 analogs having the general formula:
His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Leu-Ser-Lys-Gln-X₁₄-Glu-Glu-Glu-Ala-Val-X₂₀-Leu-Phe-Ile-Glu-Trp-Leu-Lys-Asn-Gly-Gly-Pro-Ser-Ser-Gly-Ala-Pro-Pro-Pro-Ser-X₄₀(SEQ ID NO: 136).
where X₁₄ is Arg, Leu, Ile, or Met; X₂₀ is His, Arg, or Lys; X₄₀ is Arg-OH, —OH, —NH₂ or Lys-OH. In certain embodiments, when X₁₄ is Met and X₂₀ is Arg, X₄₀ cannot be —NH₂. Other exendin-4 derivatives include [(Ile/Leu/Met)¹⁴,(His/Lys)²⁰,Arg⁴⁰]exendin-4; [(not Lys/not Arg)¹²,(not Lys/not Arg)²⁰,(not Lys/not Arg)²⁷,Arg⁴⁰]exendin-4; and [(not Lys/not Arg)²⁰,Arg⁴⁰]exendin-4. Particular exendin-4 analogs include [Lys²⁰,Arg⁴⁰]exendin-4,[His²⁰,Arg⁴⁰]exendin-4; and [Leu¹⁴,Lys²⁰,Arg⁴⁰]exendin-4.

The invention may also use truncated forms of exendin-4 or any of the exendin analogs described herein. The truncated forms may include deletions of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20 amino acids from the N-terminus, from the C-terminus, or a combination thereof. Particular exendin-4 fragments include Exendin-4(1-31). Other fragments of exendin-4 are described in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2007/0037747 and have the formula:
His-Gly-Glu-Gly-Thr-X₆-Thr-Ser-Asp-Leu-Ser-Lys-Gln-X₁₄-Glu-Glu-Glu-Ala-Val-X₂₀-Leu-Phe-Ile-Glu-Trp-Leu-Lys-Asn-Gly-X₃₀-Pro-X₃₂ (SEQ ID NO: 137)
where X₆ is Phe or Tyr, X₁₄ is Met, Ile or Leu, X₂₀ is Lys; X₃₀ is Gly or is absent; and X₃₂ is Arg or is absent.

GLP-1 and GLP-1 analogs. The GLP-1 agonist used in the compositions, methods, and kits of the invention can be GLP-1 or a GLP-1 analog. In certain embodiments, the GLP-1 analog is a peptide, which can be truncated, may have one or more substitutions of the wild type sequence (e.g., the human wild type sequence), or may have other chemical modifications. GLP-1 agonists can also be non-peptide compounds, for example, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,927,214. Particular analogs include LY548806, CJC-1131, and Liraglutide.

The GLP-1 analog can be truncated form of GLP-1. The GLP-1 peptide may be truncated by 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 20, or more residues from its N-terminus, its C-terminus, or a combination thereof. In certain embodiments, the truncated GLP-1 analog is the GLP-1(7-34), GLP-1(7-35), GLP-1(7-36), or GLP-1(7-37) human peptide or the C-terminal amidated forms thereof.

In other embodiments of the invention, modified forms of truncated GLP-1 peptides are used. Exemplary analogs are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,545,618 and have the amino acid sequence:
His-Ala-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-Gly-Gln-Ala-Ala-Lys-Glu-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-Val-Lys-(Gly)-(Arg)-(Gly) (SEQ ID NO: 138)
where (Gly), (Arg), and (Gly) are present or absent depending on indicated chain length, with at least one modification selected from the group consisting of (a) substitution of a neutral amino acid, Arg, or a D form of Lys for Lys at position 26 and/or 34 and/or a neutral amino acid, Lys, or a D form of Arg for Arg at position 36; (b) substitution of an oxidation-resistant amino acid for Trp at position 31; (c) substitution according to at least one of Tyr for Val at position 16; Lys for Ser at position 18; Asp for Glu at position 21; Ser for Gly at position 22; Arg for Gln at position 23; Arg for Ala at position 24; and Gln for Lys at position 26; (d) a substitution comprising at least one of an alternative small neutral amino acid for Ala at position 8; an alternative acidic amino acid or neutral amino acid for Glu at position 9; an alternative neutral amino acid for Gly at position 10; and an alternative acidic amino acid for Asp at position 15; and (e) substitution of an alternative neutral amino acid or the Asp or N-acylated or alkylated form of His for His at position 7. With respect to modifications (a), (b), (d), and (e), the substituted amino acids may be in the D form. The amino acids substituted at position 7 can also be the N-acylated or N-alkylated amino acids. Exemplary GLP-1 analogs include [D-His⁷]GLP-1(7-37), [Tyr⁷]GLP-1(7-37), [N-acetyl-His⁷]GLP-1 (7-37), [N-isopropyl-His⁷]GLP-1(7-37), [D-Ala⁸]GLP-1(7-37), [D-Glu⁹]GLP-1(7-37), [Asp⁹]GLP-1(7-37), [D-Asp⁹]GLP-1(7-37), [D-Phe¹⁰]GLP-1(7-37), [Ser²²,Arg²³,Arg²⁴,Gln²⁶]GLP-1(7-37), and [Ser⁸,Gln⁹, Tyr¹⁶,Lys¹⁸,Asp²¹]GLP-1(7-37).

Other GLP-1 fragments are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,574,008 have the formula:
R₁-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-Gly-Gln-Ala-Ala-Lys-Glu-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-Val-X-Gly-Arg-R₂ (SEQ ID NO: 181)
where R₁ is H₂N; H₂N-Ser; H₂N-Val-Ser; H₂N-Asp-Val-Ser; H₂N-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser; H₂N-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser; H₂N-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser; H₂N-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser; H₂N-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser; H₂N-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser; or H₂N-Ala-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser; X is Lys or Arg; and R₂ is NH₂, OH, Gly-NH₂, or Gly-OH.

Other GLP-1 analogs, described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,118,666, include the sequence His-Ala-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-Gly-Gln-Ala-Ala-Lys-Glu-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-Val-X (SEQ ID NO: 139), where X is Lys, Lys-Gly, or Lys-Gly-Arg.

GLP-1 analogs also include peptides of the formula: H₂N—X—CO—R₁, where R₁ is OH, OM, or —NR₂R₃; M is a pharmaceutically acceptable cation or a lower branched or unbranched alkyl group (e.g., C_1-6 alkyl); R₂ and R₃ are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and a lower branched or unbranched alkyl group (e.g., C_1-6 alkyl); X is a peptide comprising the sequence His-Ala-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-Gly-Gln-Ala-Ala-Lys-Glu-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-Val-Lys-Gly-Arg; (SEQ ID NO: 203); NH₂ is the amine group of the amino terminus of X; and CO is the carbonyl group of the carboxy terminus of X; acid addition salts thereof; and the protected or partially protected derivatives thereof. These compounds may have insulinotropic activity exceeding that of GLP-1(1-36) or GLP-1(1-37).

Other GLP-1 analogs are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,981,488 and have the formula:
R₁-X-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Y-Gly-Gln-Ala-Ala-Lys-Z-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-Val-Lys-Gly-Arg-R₂ (SEQ ID NO: 142)
where R₁ is His, D-His, desamino-His, 2-amino-His, β-hydroxy-His, homohistidine, α-fluoromethyl-His, or α-methyl-His; X is Met, Asp, Lys, Thr, Leu, Asn, Gln, Phe, Val, or Tyr; Y and Z are independently selected from Glu, Gln, Ala, Thr, Ser, and Gly; and R₂ is selected from NH₂ and Gly-OH (e.g., provided that, if R₁ is His, X is Val, Y is Glu, and Z is Glu, then R₂ is NH₂).

Other GLP-1 analogs are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,512,549 and have the formula:
R₁-Ala-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-Gly-Gln-Ala-Ala-Xaa-Glu-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-Val-Lys(R₂)-Gly-Arg-R₃ (SEQ ID NO: 143)
where R₁ is 4-imidazopropionyl (des-amino-histidyl), 4-imidazoacetyl, or 4-imidazo-α, adimethyl-acetyl; R₂, which is bound to the side chain of the Lys (e.g., through the ε amino group), is C_6-10 unbranched acyl or is absent; R₃ is Gly-OH or NH₂; and Xaa is Lys or Arg.

Still other GLP-1 analogs are described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,084,243. In one embodiment, the GLP-1 analog has the formula:
His-X₈-Glu-Gly-X₁₁-X₁₂-Thr-Ser-Asp-X₁₆-Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-X₂₂-X₂₃-X₂₄-Ala-X₂₆-X₂₇-Phe-Ile-Ala-X₃₁-Leu-X₃₃-X₃₄-X₃₅-X₃₆-R (SEQ ID NO: 144)
where X₈ is Gly, Ala, Val, Leu, Ile, Ser, or Thr; X₁₁ is Asp, Glu, Arg, Thr, Ala, Lys, or His; X₁₂ is His, Trp, Phe, or Tyr; X₁₆ is Leu, Ser Thr, Trp, His, Phe, Asp, Val, Tyr, Glu, or Ala; X₂₂ is Gly, Asp, Glu, Gln, Asn, Lys, Arg, Cys, or Cya; X₂₃ is His, Asp, Lys, Glu, or Gln; X₂₄ is Glu, His, Ala, or Lys; X₂₆ is Asp, Lys, Glu, or His; X₂₇ is Ala, Glu, His, Phe, Tyr, Trp, Arg, or Lys; X₃₀ is Ala, Glu, Asp, Ser, or His; X₃₃ is Asp, Arg, Val, Lys, Ala, Gly, or Glu; X₃₄ is Glu, Lys, or Asp; X₃₅ is Thr, Ser, Lys, Arg, Trp, Tyr, Phe, Asp, Gly, Pro, His, or Glu; X₃₆ is Arg, Glu, or His; R is Lys, Arg, Thr, Ser, Glu, Asp, Trp, Tyr, Phe, His, —NH₂, Gly, Gly-Pro, or Gly-Pro-NH₂, or is deleted (e.g., provided that the polypeptide does not have the sequence of GLP-1(7-37)OH or GLP-1(7-36)-NH₂ and provided that the polypeptide is not Gly⁸-GLP-1(7-37)OH, Gly⁸-GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, Val⁸-GLP-1(7-37)OH, Val⁸-GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, Leu⁸-GLP-1(7-37)OH, Leu⁸-GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, Ile⁸-GLP-1(7-37)OH, Ile⁸-GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, Ser⁸-GLP-1(7-37)OH, Ser⁸-GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, Thr⁸-GLP-1(7-37)OH, or Thr⁸-GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, Ala¹¹-Glp-1(7-37)OH, Ala¹⁶-Glp-1(7-36)NH₂, Ala¹⁶-Glp-1(7-37)OH, Ala¹⁶-Glp-1(7-36)NH₂, Ala²⁷-Glp-1(7-37)OH, Ala²⁷-Glp-1(7-36)NH₂, Ala²⁷-Glp-1(7-37)OH, Ala²⁷-Glp-1(7-36)NH₂, Ala³³-Glp-1 (7-37)OH, or Ala³³-Glp-1(7-36)NH₂).

In another embodiment, the polypeptide has the amino acid sequence:
His-X₈-Glu-Gly-Thr-X₁₂-Thr-Ser-Asp-X₁₆-Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-X₂₂-X₂₃-Ala-Ala-X₂₆-Glu-Phe-Ile-X₃₀-Trp-Leu-Val-Lys-X₃₅-Arg-R (SEQ ID NO: 145)
where X₈ is Gly, Ala, Val, Leu, Ile, Ser, or Thr; X₁₂ is His, Trp, Phe, or Tyr; X₁₆ is Leu, Ser, Thr, Trp, His, Phe, Asp, Val, Glu, or Ala; X₂₂ is Gly, Asp, Glu, Gln, Asn, Lys, Arg, Cys, or Cya; X₂₃ is His, Asp, Lys, Glu, or Gln; X₂₆ is Asp, Lys, Glu, or His; X₃₀ is Ala, Glu, Asp, Ser, or His; X₃₅ is Thr, Ser, Lys, Arg, Trp, Tyr, Phe, Asp, Gly, Pro, His, or Glu; R is Lys, Arg, Thr, Ser, Glu, Asp, Trp, Tyr, Phe, His, —NH₂, Gly, Gly-Pro, Gly-Pro-NH₂, or is deleted, (e.g., provided that the polypeptide does not have the sequence of GLP-1 (7-37)OH or GLP-1(7-36)-NH₂ and provided that the polypeptide is not Gly⁸GLP-1(7-37)OH, Gly⁸-GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, Val⁸-GLP-1(7-37)OH, Val⁸-GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, Leu⁸-GLP-1(7-37)OH, Leu⁸-GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, Ile⁸-GLP-1(7-37)OH, Ile⁸-GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, Ser⁸-GLP-1(7-37)OH, Ser⁸-GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, Thr⁸-GLP-1(7-37)OH, Thr⁸-GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, Ala¹⁶-GLP(7-37)OH, or Ala¹⁶-GLP-1(7-36)NH₂).

In another embodiment, the polypeptide has the amino acid sequence:
His-X₈-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-X₂₂-X₂₃-Ala-Ala-Lys-X₂₇-Phe-Ile-X₃₀-Trp-Leu-Val-Lys-Gly-Arg-R (SEQ ID NO: 146)
where X₈ is Gly, Ala, Val, Leu, Ile, Ser, or Thr; X₂₂ is Gly, Asp, Glu, Gln, Asn, Lys, Arg, Cys, or Cya; X₂₃ is His, Asp, Lys, Glu, or Gln; X₂₇ is Ala, Glu, His, Phe, Tyr, Trp, Arg, or Lys X₃₀ is Ala, Glu, Asp, Ser, or His; R is Lys, Arg, Thr, Ser, Glu, Asp, Trp, Tyr, Phe, His, —NH₂, Gly, Gly-Pro, or Gly-Pro-NH₂, or is deleted (e.g., provided that the polypeptide does not have the sequence of GLP-1(7-37)OH or GLP-1(7-36)NH₂ and provided that the polypeptide is not Gly⁸-GLP-1(7-37)OH, Gly⁸-GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, Val⁸-GLP-1(7-37)OH, Val⁸-GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, Leu⁸-GLP-1(7-37)OH, Leu⁸-GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, Ile⁸-GLP-1(7-37)OH, Ile⁸-GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, Ser⁸-GLP-1(7-37)OH, Ser^b-GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, Thr⁸-GLP-1(7-37)OH, Thr⁸-GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, Ala¹⁶-GLP-1(7-37)OH, Ala¹⁶-Glp-1(7-36) NH₂, Glu²⁷-Glp-1(7-37)OH, or Glu²⁷-Glp-1(7-36)NH₂.

In another embodiment, the polypeptide has the amino acid sequence:
X₇-X₈-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-Val-Ser-Ser-Tyr-Leu-Glu-X₂₂-Gln-Ala-Ala-Lys-Glu-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-Val-Lys-Gly-Arg-R (SEQ ID NO: 147)
where X₇ is L-His, D-His, desamino-His, 2-amino-His, β-hydroxy-His, homo-His, α-fluoromethyl-His or α-methyl-His; X₈ is Gly, Ala, Val, Leu, Ile, Ser or Thr (e.g., Gly, Val, Leu, Ile, Ser, or Thr); X₂₂ is Asp, Glu, Gln, Asn, Lys, Arg, Cys, or Cya, and R is —NH₂ or Gly(OH).

In another embodiment, the GLP-1 compound has an amino acid other than alanine at position 8 and an amino acid other than glycine at position 22. Specific examples of GLP-1 compounds include [Glu²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Asp²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Arg²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Lys²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Cya²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,Asp²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,Arg²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,Cya²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Gly⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Gly⁸,Asp²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Gly⁸,Arg²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Gly⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1 (7-37)OH, [Gly⁸,Cya²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Glu²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Asp²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Arg²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Lys²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Cya²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Val⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Val⁸,Asp²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Val⁸,Arg²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Val⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Val⁸,Cya²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Gly⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Gly⁸,Asp²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Gly⁸,Arg²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Gly⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Gly⁸,Cya²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Val⁸,Lys²³]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,Ala²⁷]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,Glu³⁰]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Gly⁸,Glu³⁰]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,His³⁵]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,His³⁷]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,Glu²²,Lys²³]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,Glu²²,Glu²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,Glu²²,Ala²⁷]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,Gly³⁴,Lys³⁵]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,His³⁷]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Gly⁸,His³⁷]GLP-1(7-37)OH.

Other GLP-1 analogs are described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,101,843 and include those having the formula:
X₇-X₈-Glu-Gly-Thr-X₁₂-Thr-Ser-Asp-X₁₆-Ser-X₁₈-X₁₉-X₂₀-Glu-X₂₂-Gln-Ala-X₂₅-Lys-X₂₇-Phe-Ile-X₃₀-Trp-Leu-X₃₃-Lys-Gly-Arg-X₃₇ (SEQ ID NO: 148)
wherein: X₇ is L-His, D-His, desamino-His, 2-amino-His, β-hydroxy-His, homohistidine, α-fluoromethyl-His, or α-methyl-His; X₈ is Ala, Gly, Val, Leu, Ile, Ser, or Thr; X₁₂ is Phe, Trp, or Tyr; X₁₆ is Val, Trp, Ile, Leu, Phe, or Tyr; X₁₈ is Ser, Trp, Tyr, Phe, Lys, Ile, Leu, or Val; X₁₉ is Tyr, Trp, or Phe; X₂₀ is Leu, Phe, Tyr, or Trp; X₂₂ is Gly, Glu, Asp, or Lys; X₂₅ is Ala, Val, Ile, or Leu; X₂₇ is Glu, Ile, or Ala; X₃₀ is Ala or Glu X₃₃ is Val, or Ile; and X₃₇ is Gly, His, NH₂, or is absent (e.g., provided that the compound does not have the sequence GLP-1(7-37)OH, GLP-1(7-36)—NH₂, [Gly⁸]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Gly⁸]GLP-1 (7-36)NH₂, [Val⁸]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Leu⁸]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Leu⁸]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Ile]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Ile⁸]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Ser⁸]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Ser⁸]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Thr⁸]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Thr⁸]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Val⁸,Tyr¹²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,Tyr¹²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Val⁸,Tyr¹⁶]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,Tyr¹⁶]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Val⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Gly⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Gly⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Val⁸,Asp²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,Asp²²]GLP-1 (7-36)NH₂, [Gly⁸,Asp²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Gly⁸,Asp²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Val⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Gly⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Gly⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Leu⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Leu⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Ile⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Ile⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Leu⁸,Asp²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Leu⁸,Asp²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Ile⁸,Asp²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Ile⁸,Asp²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Leu⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Leu⁸,Lys²²]GLP 1(7-36)NH₂, [Ile⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Ile⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Ser⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Ser⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Thr⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Thr⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Ser⁸,Asp²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Ser⁸,Asp²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Thr⁸,Asp²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Thr⁸,Asp²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Ser⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Ser⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Thr⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Thr⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Glu²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Glu²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Asp²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Asp²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Lys²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Lys²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Val⁸,Ala²⁷]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,Glu²²,Ala²⁷]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,Glu³⁰]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,Glu³⁰]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Gly⁸,Glu³⁰]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Gly⁸,Glu³⁰]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Leu⁸,Glu³⁰]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Leu⁸,Glu³⁰]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Ile⁸,Glu³⁰]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Ile⁸,Glu³⁰]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Ser⁸,Glu³⁰]GLP-1 (7-37)OH, [Ser⁸,Glu³⁰]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Thr⁸,Glu³⁰]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Thr⁸,Glu³⁰]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Val⁸,His³⁷]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,His³⁷]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Gly⁸,His³⁷]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Gly⁸,His³⁷]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Leu⁸,His³⁷]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Leu⁸,His³⁷]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Ile⁸,His³⁷]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Ile⁸,His³⁷]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Ser⁸,His³⁷]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Ser⁸,His³⁷]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Thr⁸,His³⁷]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Thr⁸,His³⁷]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂).

Other GLP-1 analogs described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,101,843 have the formula:
X₇-X₈-Glu-Gly-Thr-Phe-Thr-Ser-Asp-X₁₆-Ser-X₁₈-Tyr-Leu-Glu-X₂₂-Gln-Ala-X₂₅-Lys-Glu-Phe-Ile-Ala-Trp-Leu-X₃₃-Lys-Gly-Arg-X₃₇ (SEQ ID NO: 149)
wherein: X₇ is L-His, D-His, desamino-His, 2-amino-His, β-hydroxy-His, homohistidine, α-fluoromethyl-His, or α-methyl-His; X₈ is Gly, Ala, Val, Leu, Ile, Ser, or Thr; X₁₆ is Val, Phe, Tyr, or Trp; X₁₈ is Ser, Tyr, Trp, Phe, Lys, Ile, Leu, or Val; X₂₂ is Gly, Glu, Asp, or Lys; X₂₅ is Ala, Val, Ile, or Leu; X₃₃ is Val or Ile; and X₃₇ is Gly, NH₂, or is absent (e.g., provided that the GLP-1 compound does not have the sequence of GLP-1(7-37)OH, GLP-1(7-36)-NH₂, [Gly⁸]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Gly⁸]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Val⁸]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Leu⁸]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Leu⁸]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Ile⁸]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Ile⁸]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Ser⁸]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Ser⁸]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Thr⁸]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Thr⁸]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Val⁸-Tyr¹⁶]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸-Tyr¹⁶]GLP 1(7-36)NH₂, [Val⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Gly⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Gly⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Val⁸,Asp²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,Asp²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Gly⁸,Asp22]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Gly⁸,Asp²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Val⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Val⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Gly⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Gly⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Leu⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Leu⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Ile⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Ile⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Leu⁸,Asp²²]GLP1(7-37)OH, [Leu⁸,Asp²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Ile⁸,Asp²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Ile⁸,Asp²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Leu⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Leu⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Ile⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Ile⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Ser⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Ser⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Thr⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Thr⁸,Glu²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Ser₈,Asp²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Ser⁸, Asp²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Thr⁸,Asp²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Thr⁸,Asp²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Ser⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Ser⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Thr⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Thr⁸,Lys²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Glu²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Glu²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Asp²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Asp²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂, [Lys²²]GLP-1(7-37)OH, [Lys²²]GLP-1(7-36)NH₂).

GLP-1 analogs are also described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,238,670 and have the structure:
A-X₁-X₂-X₃-X₄-X₅-X₆-X₇-X₈-X₉-Y-Z-B
where each of X_1-9 is a naturally or nonnaturally occurring amino acid residue; Y and Z are amino acid residues; and one of the substitutions at the α-carbon atoms of Y and Z may each independently be substituted with a primary substituent group selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocyclylalkyl, arylalkyl and heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclylalkyl said primary substituent optionally being substituted with a secondary substituent selected from a cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group; any of said primary or secondary substituents may further be substituted with one or more of H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, arylalkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, alkenyl, alkynyl, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, nitro, cyano, amino, acylamino, azido, guanidino, amidino, carboxyl, carboxamido, carboxamido alkyl, formyl, acyl, carboxyl alkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, arylalkyloxy, heteroaryloxy, heterocycleoxy, acyloxy, mercapto, mercapto alkyl, mercaptoaryl, mercapto acyl, halo, cyano, nitro, azido, amino, guanidino alkyl, guanidino acyl, sulfonic, sulfonamido, alkyl sulfonyl, aryl sulfonyl or phosphonic group; wherein, the primary or secondary substitutents may optionally be bridged by covalent bonds to form one or more fused cyclic or heterocyclic systems with each other; where, the other substitution at the alpha-carbon of Y may be substituted with H, C_1-6 alkyl, aminoalkyl, hydroxyalkyl or carboxyalkyl; where the other substitution at the alpha-carbon of Z may be substituted with hydrogen, C_1-12 alkyl, aminoalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, or carboxyalkyl;

A and B are optionally present, where A is present and A is H, an amino acid or peptide containing from about 1-15 amino acid residues, an R group, an R—C(O) (amide) group, a carbamate group RO—C(O), a urea R₄R₅N—C(O), a sulfonamido R—SO₂, or R₄R₅N—SO₂; where R is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C_1-12 alkyl, C_3-10 cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, aryloxyalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, and heteroaryloxyalkyl; R₄ and R₅ are each independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, aryloxyalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, and heteroaryloxyalky; where the α-amino group of X₁ is substituted with H or an alkyl group, said alkyl group may optionally form a ring with A; where B is present and B is OR₁, NR₁R₂, or an amino acid or peptide containing from 1 to 15 amino acid residues (e.g., 1 to 10 or 1 to 5) terminating at the C-terminus as a carboxamide, substituted carboxamide, an ester, a free carboxylic acid, or an amino-alcohol; where R₁ and R₂ are independently chosen from H, C_1-12 alkyl, C_3-10 cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, aryloxyalkyl, heteroarylalkyl or heteroaryloxyalkyl.

Exemplary substitutions on the α-carbon atoms of Y and Z include heteroarylarylmethyl, arylheteroarylmethyl, and biphenylmethyl forming biphenylalanine residues, any of which is also optionally substituted with one or more, hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, arylalkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, alkenyl, alkynyl, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, nitro, cyano, amino, acylamino, azido, guanidino, amidino, carboxyl, carboxamido, carboxamido alkyl, formyl, acyl, carboxyl alkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, arylalkyloxy, heteroaryloxy, heterocycleoxy, acyloxy, mercapto, mercapto alkyl, mercaptoaryl, mercapto acyl, halo, cyano, nitro, azido, amino, guanidino alkyl, guanidino acyl, sulfonic, sulfonamido, alkyl sulfonyl, aryl sulfonyl and phosphonic group.

Other embodiments include isolated polypeptides where the other substitution at the α-carbon of Y is substituted with H, methyl, or ethyl; and where the other substitution at the α-carbon of Z is substituted with H, methyl, or ethyl.

Further embodiments include isolated polypeptides as described above where X₁ is naturally or non-naturally occurring amino acid residue in which one of the substitutions at the α-carbon is a primary substituent selected from the group consisting of heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylkalkyl and arylalkyl, said primary substituent optionally being substituted with secondary substituent selected from heteroaryl or heterocyclyl; and in which the other substitution at the α-carbon is H or alkyl; X₂ is naturally or nonnaturally occurring amino acid residue in which one of the substitutions at the α-carbon is an alkyl or cycloalkyl where the alkyl group may optionally form a ring with the nitrogen of X₂; and wherein the other substitution at the α-carbon is H or alkyl; X₃ is a naturally or nonnaturally occurring amino acid residue in which one of the substitutions at the α-carbon is a carboxyalkyl, bis-carboxyalkyl, sulfonylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or mercaptoalkyl; and where the other substitution at the α-carbon is hydrogen or alkyl; X₄ is a naturally or nonnaturally occurring amino acid residue in which the α-carbon is not substituted, or in which one of the substitutions at the α-carbon is aminoalkyl, carboxyalkyl heteroarylalkyl, or heterocycylalkyl; X₅ is a naturally or nonnaturally occurring amino acid residue in which one of the substitutions at the α-carbon is an alkyl or hydroxyalkyl, and in which the other substitution at the α-carbon is hydrogen or alkyl; X₆ is a naturally or nonnaturally occurring amino acid residue in which one of the substitutions at the α-carbon is C_1-12 alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocyclylalkyl, arylalkyl, or heteroarylalkyl group, and the other substitution at the α-carbon is H or alkyl; X₇ is a naturally or nonnaturally occurring amino acid residue in which one of the substitutions at the α-carbon is a hydroxylalkyl group; X₈ is a naturally or nonnaturally occurring amino acid residue in which one of the substitutions at the α-carbon is C_1-12 alkyl, hydroxylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, or carboxamidoalkyl, and the other substitution at the α-carbon is H or alkyl; X₉ is a naturally or nonnaturally occurring amino acid residue in which one of the substitutions at α-carbon is carboxylalkyl, bis-carboxylalkyl, carboxylaryl, sulfonylalkyl, carboxylamidoalkyl, or heteroarylalkyl; and where A is H, an amino acid or peptide containing from about 1 to about 5 amino acid residues, an R group, an R—C(O) amide group, a carbamate group RO—C(O), a urea R₄R₅N—C(O), a sulfonamido R—SO₂ or a R₄R₅N—SO₂.

In certain embodiments, X₁ is His, D-His, N-Methyl-His, D-N-Methyl-His, 4-ThiazolylAla, or D-4-ThiazolylAla; X₂ is Ala, D-Ala, Pro, Gly, D-Ser, D-Asn, Nma, D-Nma, 4-ThioPro, 4-Hyp, L-2-Pip, L-2-Azt, Aib, S- or R-Iva and Acc3; X₃ is Glu, N-Methyl-Glu, Asp, D-Asp, His, Gla, Adp, Cys, or 4-ThiazolyAla; X₄ is Gly, His, Lys, or Asp; X₅ is Thr, D-Thr, Nle, Met, Nva, or L-Aoc; X₆ is Phe, Tyr, Tyr(Bzl), Tyr(3-NO₂), Nle, Trp, Phe(penta-fluoro), D-Phe(penta-fluoro), Phe(2-fluoro), Phe(3-fluoro), Phe(4-fluoro), Phe(2,3-di-fluoro), Phe(3,4-di-fluoro), Phe(3,5-di-fluoro), Phe(2,6-di-fluoro), Phe(3,4,5-tri-fluoro), Phe(2-iodo), Phe(2-OH), Phe(2-OMe), Phe(3-OMe), Phe(3-cyano), Phe(2-chloro), Phe(2-NH₂), Phe(3-NH₂), Phe(4-NH₂), Phe(4-NO₂), Phe(4-Me), Phe(4-allyl), Phe(n-butyl), Phe(4-cyclohexyl), Phe(4-cyclohexyloxy), Phe(4-phenyloxy), 2-NaI, 2-pyridylAla, 4-thiazolylAla, 2-Thi, α-Me-Phe, D-α-Me-Phe, α-Et-Phe, D-α-Et-Phe, α-Me-Phe(2-fluoro), D-α-Me-Phe(2-fluoro), α-Me-Phe(2,3-di-fluoro), D-α-Me-Phe(2,3-di-fluoro), α-Me-Phe(2,6-di-fluoro), D-α-Me-Phe(2,6-di-fluoro), α-Me-Phe(penta-fluoro) and D-α-Me-Phe(penta-fluoro); X₇ is Thr, D-Thr, Ser, or hSer; X₈ is Ser, hSer, His, Asn, or α-Me-Ser; and X₉ is Asp, Glu, Gla, Adp, Asn, or His.

Additional embodiments include those where Y is Bip, D-Bip, L-Bip(2-Me), D-Bip(2-Me), L-Bip(2′-Me), L-Bip(2-Et), D-Bip(2-Et), L-Bip(3-Et), L-Bip(4-Et), L-Bip(2-n-propyl), L-Bip(2-n-propyl, 4-OMe), L-Bip(2-n-propyl,2′-Me), L-Bip(3-Me), L-Bip(4-Me), L-Bip(2,3-di-Me), L-Bip(2,4-di-Me), L-Bip(2,6-di-Me), L-Bip(2,4-di-Et), L-Bip(2-Me, 2′-Me), L-Bip(2-Et, 2′-Me), L-Bip(2-Et, 2′-Et), L-Bip(2-Me,4-OMe), L-Bip(2-Et,4-OMe), D-Bip(2-Et,4-OMe), L-Bip(3-OMe), L-Bip(4-OMe), L-Bip(2,4,6-tri-Me), L-Bip(2,3-di-OMe), L-Bip(2,4-di-OMe), L-Bip(2,5-di-OMe), L-Bip(3,4-di-OMe), L-Bip(2-Et,4,5-di-OMe), L-Bip(3,4-Methylene-di-oxy), L-Bip(2-Et, 4,5-Methylene-di-oxy), L-Bip(2-CH₂OH, 4-OMe), L-Bip(2-Ac), L-Bip(3-NH—Ac), L-Bip(4-NH—Ac), L-Bip(2,3-di-chloro), L-Bip(2,4-di-chloro), L-Bip(2,5-di-chloro), L-Bip(3,4-di-chloro), L-Bip(4-fluoro), L-Bip(3,4-di-fluoro), L-Bip(2,5-di-fluoro), L-Bip(3-n-propyl), L-Bip(4-n-propyl), L-Bip(2-iso-propyl), L-Bip(3-iso-propyl), L-Bip(4-iso-propyl), L-Bip(4-tert-butyl), L-Bip(3-phenyl), L-Bip(2-chloro), L-Bip(3-chloro), L-Bip(2-fluoro), L-Bip(3-fluoro), L-Bip(2-CF₃), L-Bip(3-CF₃), L-Bip(4-CF₃), L-Bip(3-NO₂), L-Bip(3-OCF₃), L-Bip(4-OCF₃), L-Bip(2-OEt), L-Bip(3-OEt), L-Bip(4-OEt), L-Bip(4-SMe), L-Bip(2-OH), L-Bip(3-OH), L-Bip(4-OH), L-Bip(2-CH₂—COOH), L-Bip(3-CH₂—COOH), L-Bip(4-CH₂—COOH), L-Bip(2-CH₂—NH₂), L-Bip(3-CH₂—NH₂), L-Bip(4-CH₂—NH₂), L-Bip(2-CH₂—OH), L-Bip(3-CH₂—OH), L-Bip(4-CH₂—OH), L-Phe[4-(1-propargyl)], L-Phe[4-(1-propenyl)], L-Phe[4-n-butyl], L-Phe[4-cyclohexyl], Phe(4-phenyloxy), L-Phe(penta-fluoro), L-2-(9,10-dihydrophenanthrenyl)-Ala, 4-(2-benzo(b)furan)-Phe, 4-(4-Dibenzofuran)-Phe, 4-(4-phenoxathiin)-Phe, 4-(2-Benzo(b)thiophene)-Phe, 4-(3-thiophene)-Phe, 4-(3-Quinoline)-Phe, 4-(2-naphthyl)-Phe, 4-(1-Naphthyl)-Phe, 4-(4-(3,5-dimethylisoxazole))-Phe, 4-(2,4-dimethoxypyrimidine)-Phe, homoPhe, Tyr(Bzl), Phe(3,4-di-chloro), Phe(4-Iodo), 2-Naphthyl-Ala, L-α-Me-Bip, or D-α-Me-Bip; Z is L-Bip, D-Bip, L-Bip(2-Me), D-Bip(2-Me), L-Bip(2′-Me), L-Bip(2-Et), D-Bip(2-Et), L-Bip(3-Me), L-Bip(4-Me), L-Bip(3-OMe), L-Bip(4-OMe), L-Bip(4-Et), L-Bip(2-n-propyl,2′-Me), L-Bip(2,4-di-Me), L-Bip(2-Me, 2′-Me), L-Bip(2-Me,4-OMe), L-Bip(2-Et, 4-OMe), D-Bip(2-Et,4-OMe), L-Bip(2,6-di-Me), L-Bip(2,4,6-tri-Me), L-Bip(2,3,4,5,-tetra-Me), L-Bip(3,4-di-OMe), L-Bip(2,5-di-OMe), L-Bip(3,4-Methylene-di-oxy), L-Bip(3-NH—Ac), L-Bip(2-iso-propyl), L-Bip(4-iso-propyl), L-Bip(2-Phenyl), L-Bip(4-Phenyl), L-Bip(2-fluoro), L-Bip(4-CF₃), L-Bip(4-OCF₃), L-Bip(2-OEt), L-Bip(4-OEt), L-Bip(4-SMe), L-Bip(2-CH₂—COOH), D-Bip(2-CH₂—COOH), L-Bip(T-CH₂—COOH), L-Bip(3-CH₂—COOH), L-Bip(4-CH₂—COOH), L-Bip(2-CH₂—NH₂), L-Bip(3-CH₂—NH₂), L-Bip(4-CH₂—NH₂), L-Bip(2-CH₂—OH), L-Bip(3-CH₂—OH), L-Bip(4-CH₂—OH), L-Phe(3-Phenyl), L-Phe[4-n-Butyl], L-Phe[4-cyclohexyl], Phe(4-Phenyloxy), L-Phe(penta-fluoro), L-2-(9,10-Dihydrophenanthrenyl)-Ala, 4-(3-Pyridyl)-Phe, 4-(2-Naphthyl)-Phe, 4-(1-naphthyl)-Phe, 2-naphthyl-Ala, 2-fluorenyl-Ala, L-α-Me-Bip, D-α-Me-Bip, L-Phe(4-NO₂), or L-Phe(4-Iodo); A is H, acetyl, 13-Ala, Ahx, Gly, Asp, Glu, Phe, Lys, Nva, Asn, Arg, Ser, Thr, Val, Trp, Tyr, caprolactam, Bip, Ser(Bzl), 3-pyridylAla, Phe(4-Me), Phe(penta-fluoro), 4-methylbenzyl, 4-fluorobenzyl, n-propyl, n-hexyl, cyclohexylmethyl, 6-hydroxypentyl, 2-thienylmethyl, 3-thienylmethyl, penta-fluorobenzyl, 2-naphthylmethyl, 4-biphenylmethyl, 9-anthracenylmethyl, benzyl, (S)-(2-amino-3-phenyl)propyl, methyl, 2-aminoethyl, or (S)-2-aminopropyl; and B is OH, NH₂, Trp-NH₂, 2-naphthylAla-NH₂, Phe(penta-fluoro)-NH₂, Ser(Bzl)-NH₂, Phe(4-NO₂)—NH₂, 3-pyridylAla-NH₂, Nva-NH₂, Lys-NH₂, Asp-NH₂, Ser-NH₂, His-NH₂, Tyr-NH₂, Phe-NH₂, L-Bip-NH₂, D-Ser-NH₂, Gly-OH, beta.-Ala-OH, GABA-OH, or APA-OH.

In certain embodiments, when A is not present, and X₁ is an R group, an R—C(O) (amide) group, a carbamate group RO—C(O), a urea R₄R₅N—C(O), a sulfonamido R—SO₂, or a R₄R₅N—SO₂; wherein R is H, C_1-12 alkyl, C_3-10 cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, aryloxyalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroaryloxyalkyl, or heteroarylalkoxyalkyl; and where R₄ and R₅ are each independently H, C_1-12 alkyl, C_3-10 cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, aryloxyalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, or heteroaryloxyalky.

In certain embodiments, when B is not present and Z is OR₁, NR₁R₂, or an amino-alcohol; where R₁ and R₂ are independently H, C_1-12 alkyl, C_3-10 cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycle, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, aryloxyalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, or heteroaryloxyalkyl. In certain embodiments, X₁ (where applicable), X₂, and X₃ are N—H or N-alkylated, (e.g., N-methylated) amino acid residues. The polypeptide may be a 10-mer to 15-mer and capable of binding to and activating the GLP-1 receptor.

The following abbreviations are used above. NaI=naphthylalanine; pGly=pentylglycine; t-BuG=t-butylglycine; TPro=thioproline; HPro=homoproline; NmA=N-methylalanine; Cya=cysteic acid; Thi=β2-Thienyl-Ala; hSer=homoserine; Aib=α-aminoisobutyric acid; Bip=biphenylalanine; Nle=norleucine; Ahx=2-aminohexanoic acid; Nva=norvaline.

Leptin and Leptin Derivatives

The compounds of the invention can include leptin and leptin derivatives. Leptin is an adipokine, and thus the proteins or peptides used in the invention can include an adipokine or an analog thereof. Adipokines include adiponectin, leptin, and resistin. Adiponectins include human, mouse, and rat adiponectin. Leptins include leptin (116-130), leptin (22-56), leptin (57-92), leptin (93-105), LY396623, meterleptin, murine leptin analog, pegylated leptin, and methionyl human leptin. Resistins include human, mouse, and rat resistin. The leptin may be a cleaved sequence or the full length protein. The polypeptide used in the invention may be any of these peptides or proteins or may be substantially identical to any of these peptides or proteins.

Neurotensin and Neurotensin Derivatives

Neurotensin (NT) is a 13 amino acid peptide found in the central nervous system and in the gastrointestinal tract. In brain, NT is associated with dopaminergic receptors and other neurotransmitter system. Peripheral NT acts as a paracrine and endocrine peptide on both the digestive and cardiovascular systems. To exert its biological effects in the brain NT has to be injected or delivered directly to the brain because NT does not cross the BBB and is rapidly degraded by peptidases following systematic administration. Preclinical pharmacological studies, most of which involve direct injection of NT into the brain, strongly suggest that an agonist of NT receptors would be clinically useful for the treatment of neuropsychiatric conditions including psychosis, schizophrenia, Parkinson's disease, pain, and the abuse of psychostimulants. In particular, in various animal studies, intraventricular injection of NT led to hypothermia and analgesia in antinociception experiments.

The peptide therapeutic may be neurotensin or analog thereof. Human neurotensin is a thirteen amino acid peptide having the sequence QLYENKPRRPYIL. Exemplary neurotensin analogs include (VIP-neurotensin) hybrid antagonist, acetylneurotensin(8-13), JMV 1193, KK13 peptide, neuromedin N, neuromedin N precursor, neurotensin(1-10), neurotensin(1-11), neurotensin(1-13), neurotensin(1-6), neurotensin(1-8), neurotensin(8-13), Asp(12)-neurotensin(8-13), Asp(13)-neurotensin(8-13), Lys(8)-neurotensin(8-13), N-methyl-Arg(8)-Lys(9)-neo-Trp(11)-neo-Leu(12)-neurotensin(8-13), neurotensin(9-13), neurotensin 69 L, Arg(9)-neurotensin, azidobenzoyl-Lys(6)-Trp(11)-neurotensin, Gln(4)-neurotensin, iodo-Tyr(11)-neurotensin, iodo-Tyr(3)-neurotensin, N-α-(fluoresceinylthiocarbamyl)glutamyl(1)-neurotensin, Phe(11)-neurotensin, Ser(7)-neurotensin, Trp(11)-neurotensin, Tyr(11)-neurotensin, rat NT77, PD 149163, proneurotensin, stearyl-Nle(17)-neurotensin(6-11)VIP(7-28), ^99mTc-NT-XI, TJN 950, and vasoactive intestinal peptide-neurotensin hybrid.

Other neurotensin analogs include NT64L [L-neo-Trp11]NT(8-13), NT72D [D-Lys9,D-neo-Trp11,tert-Leu12]NT(9-13), NT64D [D-neo-Trp11]NT(8-13), NT73L [D-Lys9,L-neo-Trp11]NT(9-13), NT65L [L-neo-Trp11, tert-Leu12]NT(8-13), NT73D [D-Lys9,D-neo-Trp11]NT(9-13), NT65D [D-neo-Trp11, tert-Leu12]NT(8-13), NT74L [DAB9,L-neo-Trp11,tert-Leu12]NT(9-13), NT66L [D-Lys8, L-neo-Trp11, tert-Leu12]NT(8-13), NT74D [DAB9,Pro,D-neo-Trp11,tert-Leu12]NT(9-13), NT66D [D-Lys8, D-neo-Trp11, tert-Leu12]NT(8-13), NT75L [DAB8 L-neo-Trp11]NT(8-13), NT67L [D-Lys8, L-neo-Trp11]NT(8-13), NT75D [DAB8,D-neo-Trp11]NT(8-13), NT67D [D-Lys8, D-neo-Trp11]NT(8-13), NT76L [D-Orn9,L-neo-Trp11]NT(8-13), NT69L [N-methyl-Arg8,L-Lys9 L-neo-Trp11,tert-Leu12]NT(8-13), NT76D [D-Orn9,D-neo-Trp11]NT(8-13), NT69D [N-methyl-Arg8 L-Lys9,D-neo-Trp11,tert-Leu12]NT(8-13), NT71L [D-Orn9,L-neo-Trp11,tert-Leu12]NT(8-13), NT71L [N-methyl-Arg8,DAB9 L-neo-Trp11,tert-leu12]NT(8-13), NT77D [D-Orn9,D-neo-Trp11,tert-Leu12]NT(8-13), NT71D [N-methyl-Arg8,DAB9,D-neo-Trp11,tert-leu12]NT(8-13), NT78L [N-methyl-Arg8,D-Orn9 L-neo-Trp11,tert-Leu12]NT(8-13), NT72L [D-Lys9,L-neo-Trp11,tert-Leu12]NT(9-13), and NT78D [N-methyl-Arg8,D-Orn9,D-neo-Trp11,tert-Leu12]NT(8-13), where neo-Trp is (2-amino-3-[1H-indolyl]propanoic acid). Other neurotensin analogs include Beta-lactotensin (NTR2 selective), JMV-449, and PD-149 or PD-163 (NTR1 selective; reduced amide bond 8-13 fragment of neurotensin).

Other neurotensin analogs include those with modified amino acids (e.g., any of those described herein). The neurotensin analog may be selective for NTR1, NTR2, or NTR3 (e.g., may bind to or activate one of NTR1, NTR2, or NTR3 at least 2, 5, 10, 50, 100, 500, 1000, 5000, 10,000, 50,000, or 100,000 greater) as compared to at least one of the other NTR receptors or both.

GDNF and GDNF Derivatives

In certain embodiments, the peptide vector is attached to GDNF, a GDNF analog, a GDNF fragment, or a modified form thereof. In certain embodiments, the GDNF analog is a sequence substantially identical (e.g., at least 60%, 70%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, 99% identical) to GDNF, a GDNF analog, or to a fragment thereof.

GDNF is secreted as a disulfide-linked homodimer, and is able to support survival of dopaminergic neurons, Purkinje cells, motoneurons, and sympathetic neurons. GDNF analogs or fragments having one or more of these activities may be used in the present invention, and activity of such analogs and fragments can be tested using any means known in the art.

Human GDNF is expressed as a 211 amino acid protein (isoform 1); a 185 amino acid protein (isoform 2), and a 133 amino acid protein. Mature GDNF is a 134 amino acid sequence that includes amino acids 118-211 of isoform 1, amino acids 92-185 of isoform 2. Isoform 3 includes a transforming growth factor like domain from amino acids 40-133.

In certain embodiments, the GDNF analog is a splice variant of GDNF. Such proteins are described in PCT Publication No. WO 2009/053536, and include the pre-(α)pro-GDNF, pre-(β)pro-GDNF, and pre-(γ)pro-GDNF splice variant, as well as the variants lacking the pre-pro region: (α)pro-GDNF, (β)pro-GDNF, and pre-(γ)pro-GDNF.

GDNF analogs are also described in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2009/0069230, which include a GDNF analog having the sequence:
Xaa₁-Pro-Xaa₃-Pro-Xaa₅-Xaa₆-Xaa₇-Xaa₈ (SEQ ID NO: 182)
where Xaa₁ is Phe, Trp, or Tyr; Xaa₃ is Leu, Ala, Ile, or Val; Xaa₅ is Ala, Leu, Ile, or Val; Xaa₆ is Gly, is any amino acid residue of the D configuration or is absent; Xaa₇ is Lys, Arg, or His or is absent; and Xaa₈ is Arg, Lys, or His or is absent. Xaa represents an amino acid, which we may also refer to as an amino acid residue. The subscripts (here, the subscripts 1-8) represent the positions of each amino acid in the peptide sequence. Thus, Xaa₁ represents the first amino acid residue in a fragment of a GDNF precursor protein.

In specific embodiments, the fragments of a GDNF precursor protein can have a sequence represented by (1) Phe-Pro-Xaa₃-Pro-Xaa₅-Xaa₆-Xaa₇-Xaa₈ (SEQ ID NO: 183), (e.g., Phe-Pro-Leu-Pro-Ala-Gly-Lys-Arg (SEQ ID NO: 151); (2) Xaa₁-Pro-Leu-Pro-Xaa₅-Xaa₆-Xaa₇-Xaa₈ (SEQ ID NO: 184); (3) Phe-Pro-Leu-Pro-Xaa₅-Xaa₆-Xaa₇-Xaa₈ (SEQ ID NO: 152); (4) Xaa₁-Pro-Xaa₃-Pro-Ala-Xaa₆-Xaa₇-Xaa₈ (SEQ ID NO: 185); (5) Phe-Pro-Xaa₃-Pro-Ala-Xaa₆-Xaa₇-Xaa₈ (SEQ ID NO: 153); (6) Phe-Pro-Leu-Pro-Ala-Xaa₆-Xaa₇-Xaa₈ (SEQ ID NO: 154); (7) Xaa₁-Pro-Xaa₃-Pro-Xaa₅-Gly Xaa₇-Xaa₈ SEQ ID NO : 186); (8) Phe-Pro-Xaa₃-Pro-Xaa₅-Gly-Xaa₇-Xaa₈ (SEQ ID NO: 155); (9) Phe-Pro-Leu-Pro-Xaa₅-Gly-Xaa₇-Xaa₈ (SEQ ID NO : 156); (10) Phe-Pro-Leu-Pro-Ala-Gly-Xaa₇-Xaa₈ (SEQ ID NO: 157); (11) Xaa₁-Pro-Xaa₃-Pro-Xaa₅-Xaa₆-Lys-Xaa₈ (SEQ ID NO: 187); (12) Phe-Pro-Xaa₃-Pro-Xaa₅-Xaa₆-Lys-Xaa₈ (SEQ ID NO: 158); (13) Phe-Pro-Leu-Pro-Xaa₅-Xaa₆-Lys-Xaa₈ (SEQ ID NO: 159); (14) Phe-Pro-Leu-Pro-Ala-Xaa₆-Lys-Xaa₈ (SEQ ID NO: 160); (15) Phe-Pro-Leu-Pro-Ala-Gly-Lys-Xaa₈ (SEQ ID NO: 161); (16) Xaa₁-Pro-Xaa₃-Pro-Xaa₅-Xaa₆-Xaa₇-Arg (SEQ ID NO: 188); (17) Phe-Pro-Xaa₃-Pro-Xaa₅-Xaa₆-Xaa₇-Arg (SEQ ID NO: 162); (18) Phe-Pro-Leu-Pro-Xaa₅-Xaa₆-Xaa₇-Arg (SEQ ID NO: 163); (19) Phe-Pro-Leu-Pro-Ala-Xaa₆-Xaa₇-Arg (SEQ ID NO: 164); and (20) Phe-Pro-Leu-Pro-Ala-Gly-Xaa₇-Arg (SEQ ID NO: 165).

In another embodiment, the fragment of a GDNF precursor protein can be a fragment or portion of a GDNF precursor protein conforming to Formula I, where Xaa₁ is Phe, Xaa₃ is Leu, Xaa₅ is Ala, Xaa₆ is Gly, Xaa₇ is Lys and Xaa₈ is Arg (i.e., Phe-Pro-Leu-Pro-Ala-Gly-Lys-Arg). At least one (e.g., one, two, or three) of the amino acid residues represented by Formula I can be absent. For example, Xaa₆, Xaa₇, and/or Xaa₈ can be absent.

In another embodiment, the fragment of a GDNF precursor protein or the biologically active variants can have, or can include, a sequence of amino acid residues conforming to the amino acid sequence:

Pro-Pro-Xaa₃-Xaa₄-Pro-Xaa₆-Xaa₇-Xaa₈-Xaa₉-Xa-a₁₀-Xaa₁₁-Xaa₁₂-Xaa₁₃-Xaa₁₄ (SEQ ID NO: 189) where Xaa₃ is Glu or Asp; Xaa₄ is Ala, Gly, Ile, Leu, Met, or Val; Xaa₆ is Ala, Gly, Ile, Leu, Met, or Val; Xaa₇ is Glu or Asp; Xaa₈ is Asp or Glu; Xaa₉ is Arg, His, or Lys; Xaa₁₀ is Ser, Asn, Gln, or Thr; Xaa₁₁ is Leu, Ala, Gly, Ile, Leu, Met or Val; Xaa₁₂ is Gly, is any amino acid residue of the D-configuration, or is not present; Xaa₁₃ is Arg, His, or Lys or is not present; Xaa₁₄ is Arg, His, or Lys or is not present. An exemplary peptide conforming to Formula II can have the sequence Pro-Pro-Glu-Ala-Pro-Ala-Glu-Asp-Arg-Ser-Leu-Gly-Arg-Arg (SEQ ID NO: 190).

In another embodiment, the fragments of a GDNF precursor protein or the biologically active variants can have, or can include, a sequence of amino acid residues conforming to the amino acid sequence of Formula III:
Xaa₁-Xaa₂-Xaa₃-Xaa₄-Xaa₅-Xaa₆-Xaa_rXaa₈-Xaa₉-Xaa₁₀-Xaa₁₁-Xaa₁₂-Xaa_t3-Xaa₁₄-Xaa₁₅-Xaa₁₆-Xaa₁₇-Xaa₁₈-Xaa₁₉-Xaa₂₀-Xaa₂₁-Xaa₂₂(SEQ ID NO: 191)  (III).

where Xaa₁ and Xaa₂ are, independently, Arg, Lys, or His or are absent; Xaa₃ is Glu or Asp; Xaa₄ is Arg, Lys, or His; Xaa₅ is Asn, Gln, Ser, or Thr; Xaa₆ is Arg, Lys, or His; Xaa₇ is Gln, Asn, Ser, or Thr; Xaa₈, Xaa₉, Xaa₁₀, and Xaa₁₁ are, independently, Ala, Gly, Ile, Leu, Met, or Val; Xaa₁₂ is Asn, Gln, Ser, or Thr; Xaa₁₃ is Pro or Ser; Xaa₁₄ is Glu or Asp; Xaa₁₅ is Asn, Gln, Ser, or Thr; Xaa₁₆ is Ser, Asn, Gln, or Thr; Xaa₁₇ is Lys, Arg, or His; Xaa₁₈ is Gly, Ala, Ile, Leu, Met, or Val; Xaa₁₉ is Lys, Arg, or His; Xaa₂₀ is Gly, is any amino acid residue of the D-configuration, or is not present; and Xaa₂₁ and Xaa₂₂ are, independently, Arg, Lys, His, or are not present. An exemplary peptide conforming to Formula III can have the sequence Arg-Arg-Glu-Arg-Asn-Arg-Gln-Ala-Ala-Ala-Ala-Asn-Pro-Glu-Asn-Ser-Arg-Gly-Lys-Gly-Arg-Arg (SEQ ID NO: 192).

Other GDNF analogs are described in PCT Publication No. WO 2008/069876. These analogs include ERNRQAAAANPENSRGK-amide (SEQ ID NO : 200); FPLPA-amide (SEQ ID NO: 194); and PPEAPAEDRSL-amide (SEQ ID NO: 195).

Still other GDNF analogs are described in PCT Publication No. WO 2007/019860. The analogs include those having the formula:
X_a-(x)-X_b-X_c-X_d-X_f(SEQ ID NO: 193)
where X_a is D, E, A or G, (x) is a sequence of 2-3 amino acid residues or a single amino acid residue selected from the group consisting of amino acid residues A, D, E, G, I, K, L, P, Q, S, T and V, X_b is amino acid residue Y or H, or a hydrophobic amino acid residue, and at least one of X_c, X_d, or X_f is a charged or hydrophobic amino acid residue. The analog may be 6-22 amino acids in length.

Further GDNF analogs are described in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2006/0258576. These analogs include FPLPA-amide, (SEQ ID NO: 194), PPEAPAEDRSL-amide (SEQ ID NO: 195), LLEAPAEDHSL-amide (SEQ ID NO: 196), SPDKQMAVLP (SEQ ID NO: 197), SPDKQAAALP (SEQ ID NO: 198), SPDKQTPIFS (SEQ ID NO: 199), ERNRQAAAANPENSRGK-amide (SEQ ID NO: 200), ERNRQAAAASPENSRGK-amide (SEQ ID NO: 201), and ERNRQSAATNVENSSKK-amide (SEQ ID NO: 202).

Additional GDNF analogs can include functional fragments (e.g., any of the fragments described herein), peptides having any of the modifications described herein, or peptidomimetics thereof. Activity of such analogs and fragments can be tested using any means known in the art.

Brain-Derived Neurotrophic Factor (BDNF) and BDNF Derivatives

The compounds of the invention may be or may include BDNF, BDNF analogs, or BDNF fragments. BDNF is glycoprotein of the nerve growth factor family of proteins. The protein is encoded as a 247 amino acid polypeptide (isoform A), a 255 amino acid polypeptide (isoform B), a 262 amino acid polypeptide (isoform C), a 276 amino acid polypeptide (isoform D), a 329 amino acid polylpeptide (isoform E). The mature 119 amino acid glycoprotein is processed from the larger precursor to yield a neutrophic factor that promotes the survival of neuronal cell populations. The mature protein includes amino acids 129-247 of the isoform A preprotein, amino acids 137-255 of the isoform B preprotein, amino acids 144-162 of isoform C preprotein, amino acids 158-276 of the isoform D preprotein, or amino acids 211 (or 212)-329 of the isoform E preprotein. BDNF acts at the TrkB receptor and at low affinity nerve growth factor receptor (LNGFR or p75). BDNF is capable of supporting neuronal survival of existing neurons and can also promote growth and differentiation of new neurons. The BDNF fragments or analogs of the invention may have any of the aforementioned activities. Activity of such analogs and fragments can be tested using any means known in the art.

BDNF analogs are described in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2004/0072291, which include those having a substitution of A, C, D, E, G, H, K, N P, Q R, S, or T at one more positions selected from the group consisting of 10, 16, 20, 29, 31, 36, 38, 39, 42, 44, 49, 52, 53, 54, 61, 63, 71, 76, 86, 87, 90, 92, 98, 100, 102, 103, and 105. Additional substitutions are described in Table 3 below.

TABLE 3
Residue	WT
#	Residue	Possible substitutions

9	E	A C F G I L M P V W Y
10	L	I M F V W Y
11	S	A C F G I L M P V W Y
13	C	D E F H I K N P Q R S T V Y
14	D	A C F G I L M P V W Y
15	S	D F H I L N P Q W Y
16	I	W M Y
17	S	A C G P
18	E	T F H I P Q S
19	W	A C D E G H K N P Q R S T
20	V	W Y
21	T	D F H I L P W Y
22	A	D E H K N P Q R S T
23	A	H T
24	D	H P T
28	A	H T
31	M	W Y
32	S	A C G P
34	G	T D E H K N P Q R S
35	T	A C G P
36	V	F I L M W Y
38	V	W Y F I M
39	L	F I M V W Y
41	K	A C G H P S
42	V	I
44	V	F L M W Y
45	S	A C F P V Y
46	K	A C G P Q S T
47	G	D E H N P Q R S T
48	Q	A C G P
49	L	F I M V W Y
50	K	I P T
51	Q	A C G P
52	Y	I M V W
53	F	M W Y
55	E	A C G H N P Q S T
56	T	A C G P
57	K	A C G H P Q S T
58	C	D E G H K N P Q R S T
59	N	A C G P T
60	P	T
61	M	I V W Y
87	V	F I M W Y
88	R	A C G P
89	A	D E H K N Q R T
90	L	F I M V W Y
91	T	A C P G P
92	H	I W Y
93	D	P T
94	S	A C G P
95	K	H P
96	K	P
97	R	A C G P
98	I	H W
101	R	P T
102	F	I M V W Y
103	I	F M W Y
104	R	A C G P T
105	I	M W
106	D	A C G H I M P T
107	T	A C D E G H K N P Q S
108	S	A C D G H P
109	C	D E H K N P Q R S T
110	V	T
111	C	D E F H I K N P Q R S T V W Y
112	T	A C F G I L H P V W Y
113	L	Any amino acid

BDNF analogs are also described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,800,607, which describes BDNF modified with 1-acyl-glycerol. These analogs include a modified BDNF, where is the compound of the formula:
A(X—B)_n
where A is a residue of brain-derived neurotrophic factor, B is a residue of a 1-acyl-glycerol derivative having a hydroxyl group at the 2-position of the glycerol moiety, which is prepared by removing a hydrogen atom from the hydroxyl group, X is a chemical cross-linkage, and m is an average number of the introduction and is not less than about 0.5; (3) A modified BDNF according to the above (2), wherein X is a group of the formula (2):

where R¹ is an alkylene group, or a group of the formula (3):

where R² and R³ are independently an alkylene group; (4) A modified BDNF according to the above (2), wherein the 1-acyl-glycerol derivative is 1-acyl-glycero-3-phosphoryl choline, 1-acyl-glycero-3-phosphoryl serine, or 1-acyl-grycero-3-phosphoryl ethylamine; (5) A modified BDNF according to the above (2), wherein B is a 1-acyl-glycero-3-phosphoryl choline residue of the formula (4):

where R⁴ is an acyl group, a 1-acyl-glycero-3-phosphoryl serine residue of the formula (5):

where R⁴ is an acyl group, or a 1-acyl-glycero-phosphoryl ethylamine residue of the formula (6):

where R⁴ is an acyl group; (6) A modified BDNF according to the above (2) or (3), where B is a group of the formula (4):

where R⁴ is an acyl group; (7) A modified BDNF according to any one of the above (2), (3), (4), (5) and (6), where the acyl group is an alkanoyl group having 8 to 30 carbon atoms; (8) A modified BDNF according to any one of the above (2), (3), (4), (5), (6) and (7), where the acyl group is palmitoyl group; (9) A modified BDNF according to any one of the above (2), (3), (4), (5), (6), (7) and (8), where m is in the range of from about 1 to about 6; (11) A modified BDNF according to the above (10), where R¹ is a straight chain alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms; (12) A modified BDNF according to the above (10), where R¹ is trimethylene.

Other BDNF analogs include those described in PCT Publication No. WO 96/15146, which described conjugates of BDNF to water soluble polymers such as polyethylene glycol. Additional BDNF analogs can include functional fragments (e.g., any of the fragments described herein), peptides having any of the modifications described herein, or peptidomimetics thereof. Activity of such analogs can be tested using any method known in the art.

Modified Polypeptides

The peptide vectors and peptide/polypeptide agents used in the invention may have a modified amino acid sequence. In certain embodiments, the modification does not destroy significantly a desired biological activity (e.g., ability to cross the BBB or agonist activity). The modification may reduce (e.g., by at least 5%, 10%, 20%, 25%, 35%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 90%, or 95%), may have no effect, or may increase (e.g., by at least 5%, 10%, 25%, 50%, 100%, 200%, 500%, or 1000%) the biological activity of the original polypeptide. The modified peptide or polypeptide may have or may optimize a characteristic of a polypeptide, such as in vivo stability, bioavailability, toxicity, immunological activity, immunological identity, and conjugation properties.

Modifications include those by natural processes, such as posttranslational processing, or by chemical modification techniques known in the art. Modifications may occur anywhere in a polypeptide including the polypeptide backbone, the amino acid side chains and the amino- or carboxy-terminus. The same type of modification may be present in the same or varying degrees at several sites in a given polypeptide, and a polypeptide may contain more than one type of modification. Polypeptides may be branched as a result of ubiquitination, and they may be cyclic, with or without branching. Cyclic, branched, and branched cyclic polypeptides may result from posttranslational natural processes or may be made synthetically. Other modifications include pegylation, acetylation, acylation, addition of acetomidomethyl (Acm) group, ADP-ribosylation, alkylation, amidation, biotinylation, carbamoylation, carboxyethylation, esterification, covalent attachment to flavin, covalent attachment to a heme moiety, covalent attachment of a nucleotide or nucleotide derivative, covalent attachment of drug, covalent attachment of a marker (e.g., fluorescent or radioactive), covalent attachment of a lipid or lipid derivative, covalent attachment of phosphatidylinositol, cross-linking, cyclization, disulfide bond formation, demethylation, formation of covalent crosslinks, formation of cystine, formation of pyroglutamate, formylation, gamma-carboxylation, glycosylation, GPI anchor formation, hydroxylation, iodination, methylation, myristoylation, oxidation, proteolytic processing, phosphorylation, prenylation, racemization, selenoylation, sulfation, transfer-RNA mediated addition of amino acids to proteins such as arginylation and ubiquitination.

A modified polypeptide can also include an amino acid insertion, deletion, or substitution, either conservative or non-conservative (e.g., D-amino acids, desamino acids) in the polypeptide sequence (e.g., where such changes do not substantially alter the biological activity of the polypeptide). In particular, the addition of one or more cysteine residues to the amino or carboxy terminus of any of the polypeptides of the invention can facilitate conjugation of these polypeptides by, e.g., disulfide bonding. For example, Angiopep-1 (SEQ ID NO:67), Angiopep-2 (SEQ ID NO:97), or Angiopep-7 (SEQ ID NO:112) can be modified to include a single cysteine residue at the amino-terminus (SEQ ID NOS: 71, 113, and 115, respectively) or a single cysteine residue at the carboxy-terminus (SEQ ID NOS: 72, 114, and 116, respectively). Amino acid substitutions can be conservative (i.e., wherein a residue is replaced by another of the same general type or group) or non-conservative (i.e., wherein a residue is replaced by an amino acid of another type). In addition, a non-naturally occurring amino acid can be substituted for a naturally occurring amino acid (i.e., non-naturally occurring conservative amino acid substitution or a non-naturally occurring non-conservative amino acid substitution).

Polypeptides made synthetically can include substitutions of amino acids not naturally encoded by DNA (e.g., non-naturally occurring or unnatural amino acid). Examples of non-naturally occurring amino acids include D-amino acids, an amino acid having an acetylaminomethyl group attached to a sulfur atom of a cysteine, a pegylated amino acid, the omega amino acids of the formula NH₂(CH₂)_nCOOH wherein n is 2-6, neutral nonpolar amino acids, such as sarcosine, t-butyl alanine, t-butyl glycine, N-methyl isoleucine, and norleucine. Phenylglycine may substitute for Trp, Tyr, or Phe; citrulline and methionine sulfoxide are neutral nonpolar, cysteic acid is acidic, and ornithine is basic. Proline may be substituted with hydroxyproline and retain the conformation conferring properties.

Analogs may be generated by substitutional mutagenesis and retain the biological activity of the original polypeptide. Examples of substitutions identified as “conservative substitutions” are shown in Table 4. If such substitutions result in a change not desired, then other type of substitutions, denominated “exemplary substitutions” in Table 4, or as further described herein in reference to amino acid classes, are introduced and the products screened.

Substantial modifications in function or immunological identity are accomplished by selecting substitutions that differ significantly in their effect on maintaining (a) the structure of the polypeptide backbone in the area of the substitution, for example, as a sheet or helical conformation. (b) the charge or hydrophobicity of the molecule at the target site, or (c) the bulk of the side chain. Naturally occurring residues are divided into groups based on common side chain properties:

(1) hydrophobic: norleucine, methionine (Met), Alanine (Ala), Valine (Val), Leucine (Leu), Isoleucine (Ile), Histidine (His), Tryptophan (Trp), Tyrosine (Tyr), Phenylalanine (Phe),

(2) neutral hydrophilic: Cysteine (Cys), Serine (Ser), Threonine (Thr)

(3) acidic/negatively charged: Aspartic acid (Asp), Glutamic acid (Glu)

(4) basic: Asparagine (Asn), Glutamine (Gln), Histidine (His), Lysine (Lys), Arginine (Arg)

(5) residues that influence chain orientation: Glycine (Gly), Proline (Pro);

(6) aromatic: Tryptophan (Trp), Tyrosine (Tyr), Phenylalanine (Phe), Histidine (His),

(7) polar: Ser, Thr, Asn, Gln

(8) basic positively charged: Arg, Lys, His, and;

(9) charged: Asp, Glu, Arg, Lys, His

Other amino acid substitutions are listed in Table 4.

TABLE 4
Amino acid substitutions

Original	Exemplary	Conservative
residue	substitution	substitution
Ala (A)	Val, Leu, Ile	Val
Arg (R)	Lys, Gln, Asn	Lys
Asn (N)	Gln, His, Lys, Arg	Gln
Asp (D)	Glu	Glu
Cys (C)	Ser	Ser
Gln (Q)	Asn	Asn
Glu (E)	Asp	Asp
Gly (G)	Pro	Pro
His (H)	Asn, Gln, Lys, Arg	Arg
Ile (I)	Leu, Val, Met, Ala,	Leu
	Phe, norleucine
Leu (L)	Norleucine, Ile, Val,	Ile
	Met, Ala, Phe
Lys (K)	Arg, Gln, Asn	Arg
Met (M)	Leu, Phe, Ile	Leu
Phe (F)	Leu, Val, Ile, Ala	Leu
Pro (P)	Gly	Gly
Ser (S)	Thr	Thr
Thr (T)	Ser	Ser
Trp (W)	Tyr	Tyr
Tyr (Y)	Trp, Phe, Thr, Ser	Phe
Val (V)	Ile, Leu, Met, Phe,	Leu
	Ala, norleucine

Polypeptide Derivatives and Peptidomimetics

In addition to polypeptides consisting of naturally occurring amino acids, peptidomimetics or polypeptide analogs are also encompassed by the present invention and can form the peptide vectors or peptide/polypeptide agents used in the compounds of the invention. Polypeptide analogs are commonly used in the pharmaceutical industry as non-peptide drugs with properties analogous to those of the template polypeptide. The non-peptide compounds are termed “peptide mimetics” or peptidomimetics (Fauchere et al., Infect. Immun. 54:283-287, 1986 and Evans et al., J. Med. Chem. 30:1229-1239, 1987). Peptide mimetics that are structurally related to therapeutically useful peptides or polypeptides may be used to produce an equivalent or enhanced therapeutic or prophylactic effect. Generally, peptidomimetics are structurally similar to the paradigm polypeptide (i.e., a polypeptide that has a biological or pharmacological activity) such as naturally-occurring receptor-binding polypeptides, but have one or more peptide linkages optionally replaced by linkages such as —CH₂NH—, —CH₂S—, —CH₂—CH₂—, —CH═CH—(cis and trans), —CH₂SO—, —CH(OH)CH₂—, —COCH₂— etc., by methods well known in the art (Spatola, Peptide Backbone Modifications, Vega Data, 1:267, 1983; Spatola et al., Life Sci. 38:1243-1249, 1986; Hudson et al., Int. J. Pept. Res. 14:177-185, 1979; and Weinstein, 1983, Chemistry and Biochemistry, of Amino Acids, Peptides and Proteins, Weinstein eds., Marcel Dekker, New York). Such polypeptide mimetics may have significant advantages over naturally occurring polypeptides including more economical production, greater chemical stability, enhanced pharmacological properties (e.g., half-life, absorption, potency, efficiency), reduced antigenicity, and others.

While the peptide vectors described herein may efficiently cross the BBB or target particular cell types (e.g., those described herein), their effectiveness may be reduced by the presence of proteases. Likewise, the effectiveness of the peptide/polypeptide agents used in the invention may be similarly reduced. Serum proteases have specific substrate requirements, including L-amino acids and peptide bonds for cleavage. Furthermore, exopeptidases, which represent the most prominent component of the protease activity in serum, usually act on the first peptide bond of the polypeptide and require a free N-terminus (Powell et al., Pharm. Res. 10:1268-1273, 1993). In light of this, it is often advantageous to use modified versions of polypeptides. The modified polypeptides retain the structural characteristics of the original L-amino acid polypeptides, but advantageously are not readily susceptible to cleavage by protease and/or exopeptidases.

Systematic substitution of one or more amino acids of a consensus sequence with D-amino acid of the same type (e.g., an enantiomer; D-lysine in place of L-lysine) may be used to generate more stable polypeptides. Thus, a polypeptide derivative or peptidomimetic as described herein may be all L-, all D-, or mixed D, L polypeptides. The presence of an N-terminal or C-terminal D-amino acid increases the in vivo stability of a polypeptide because peptidases cannot utilize a D-amino acid as a substrate (Powell et al., Pharm. Res. 10:1268-1273, 1993). Reverse-D polypeptides are polypeptides containing D-amino acids, arranged in a reverse sequence relative to a polypeptide containing L-amino acids. Thus, the C-terminal residue of an L-amino acid polypeptide becomes N-terminal for the D-amino acid polypeptide, and so forth. Reverse D-polypeptides retain the same tertiary conformation and therefore the same activity, as the L-amino acid polypeptides, but are more stable to enzymatic degradation in vitro and in vivo, and thus have greater therapeutic efficacy than the original polypeptide (Brady and Dodson, Nature 368:692-693, 1994 and Jameson et al., Nature 368:744-746, 1994). In addition to reverse-D-polypeptides, constrained polypeptides including a consensus sequence or a substantially identical consensus sequence variation may be generated by methods well known in the art (Rizo et al., Ann. Rev. Biochem. 61:387-418, 1992). For example, constrained polypeptides may be generated by adding cysteine residues capable of forming disulfide bridges and, thereby, resulting in a cyclic polypeptide. Cyclic polypeptides have no free N- or C-termini. Accordingly, they are not susceptible to proteolysis by exopeptidases, although they are, of course, susceptible to endopeptidases, which do not cleave at polypeptide termini. The amino acid sequences of the polypeptides with N-terminal or C-terminal D-amino acids and of the cyclic polypeptides are usually identical to the sequences of the polypeptides to which they correspond, except for the presence of N-terminal or C-terminal D-amino acid residue, or their circular structure, respectively.

A cyclic derivative containing an intramolecular disulfide bond may be prepared by conventional solid phase synthesis while incorporating suitable S-protected cysteine or homocysteine residues at the positions selected for cyclization such as the amino and carboxy termini (Sah et al., J. Pharm. Pharmacol. 48:197, 1996). Following completion of the chain assembly, cyclization can be performed either (1) by selective removal of the S-protecting group with a consequent on-support oxidation of the corresponding two free SH-functions, to form a S—S bonds, followed by conventional removal of the product from the support and appropriate purification procedure or (2) by removal of the polypeptide from the support along with complete side chain de-protection, followed by oxidation of the free SH-functions in highly dilute aqueous solution.

The cyclic derivative containing an intramolecular amide bond may be prepared by conventional solid phase synthesis while incorporating suitable amino and carboxyl side chain protected amino acid derivatives, at the position selected for cyclization. The cyclic derivatives containing intramolecular —S-alkyl bonds can be prepared by conventional solid phase chemistry while incorporating an amino acid residue with a suitable amino-protected side chain, and a suitable S-protected cysteine or homocysteine residue at the position selected for cyclization.

Another effective approach to confer resistance to peptidases acting on the N-terminal or C-terminal residues of a polypeptide is to add chemical groups at the polypeptide termini, such that the modified polypeptide is no longer a substrate for the peptidase. One such chemical modification is glycosylation of the polypeptides at either or both termini. Certain chemical modifications, in particular N-terminal glycosylation, have been shown to increase the stability of polypeptides in human serum (Powell et al., Pharm. Res. 10:1268-1273, 1993). Other chemical modifications which enhance serum stability include, but are not limited to, the addition of an N-terminal alkyl group, consisting of a lower alkyl of from one to twenty carbons, such as an acetyl group, and/or the addition of a C-terminal amide or substituted amide group. In particular, the present invention includes modified polypeptides consisting of polypeptides bearing an N-terminal acetyl group and/or a C-terminal amide group.

Also included by the present invention are other types of polypeptide derivatives containing additional chemical moieties not normally part of the polypeptide, provided that the derivative retains the desired functional activity of the polypeptide. Examples of such derivatives include (1) N-acyl derivatives of the amino terminal or of another free amino group, wherein the acyl group may be an alkanoyl group (e.g., acetyl, hexanoyl, octanoyl) an aroyl group (e.g., benzoyl) or a blocking group such as F-moc (fluorenylmethyl-O—CO—); (2) esters of the carboxy terminal or of another free carboxy or hydroxyl group; (3) amide of the carboxy-terminal or of another free carboxyl group produced by reaction with ammonia or with a suitable amine; (4) phosphorylated derivatives; (5) derivatives conjugated to an antibody or other biological ligand and other types of derivatives.

Longer polypeptide sequences which result from the addition of additional amino acid residues to the polypeptides described herein are also encompassed in the present invention. Such longer polypeptide sequences can be expected to have the same biological activity and specificity (e.g., cell tropism) as the polypeptides described above. While polypeptides having a substantial number of additional amino acids are not excluded, it is recognized that some large polypeptides may assume a configuration that masks the effective sequence, thereby preventing binding to a target (e.g., a member of the LRP receptor family such as LRP or LRP2). These derivatives could act as competitive antagonists. Thus, while the present invention encompasses polypeptides or derivatives of the polypeptides described herein having an extension, desirably the extension does not destroy the cell targeting activity of the polypeptides or its derivatives.

Other derivatives included in the present invention are dual polypeptides consisting of two of the same, or two different polypeptides, as described herein, covalently linked to one another either directly or through a spacer, such as by a short stretch of alanine residues or by a putative site for proteolysis (e.g., by cathepsin, see e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,126,249 and European Patent No. 495 049): Multimers of the polypeptides described herein consist of a polymer of molecules formed from the same or different polypeptides or derivatives thereof.

The present invention also encompasses polypeptide derivatives that are chimeric or fusion proteins containing a polypeptide described herein, or fragment thereof, linked at its amino- or carboxy-terminal end, or both, to an amino acid sequence of a different protein. Such a chimeric or fusion protein may be produced by recombinant expression of a nucleic acid encoding the protein. For example, a chimeric or fusion protein may contain at least 6 amino acids shared with one of the described polypeptides which desirably results in a chimeric or fusion protein that has an equivalent or greater functional activity.

Assays to Identify Peptidomimetics

As described above, non-peptidyl compounds generated to replicate the backbone geometry and pharmacophore display (peptidomimetics) of the polypeptides described herein often possess attributes of greater metabolic stability, higher potency, longer duration of action, and better bioavailability.

Peptidomimetics compounds can be obtained using any of the numerous approaches in combinatorial library methods known in the art, including biological libraries, spatially addressable parallel solid phase or solution phase libraries, synthetic library methods requiring deconvolution, the ‘one-bead one-compound’ library method, and synthetic library methods using affinity chromatography selection. The biological library approach is limited to peptide libraries, while the other four approaches are applicable to peptide, non-peptide oligomer, or small molecule libraries of compounds (Lam, Anticancer Drug Des. 12:145, 1997). Examples of methods for the synthesis of molecular libraries can be found in the art, for example, in: DeWitt et al. (Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:6909, 1993); Erb et al. (Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91:11422, 1994); Zuckermann et al. (J. Med. Chem. 37:2678, 1994); Cho et al. (Science 261:1303, 1993); Carell et al. (Angew. Chem, Int. Ed. Engl. 33:2059, 1994 and ibid 2061); and in Gallop et al. (Med. Chem. 37:1233, 1994). Libraries of compounds may be presented in solution (e.g., Houghten, Biotechniques 13:412-421, 1992) or on beads (Lam, Nature 354:82-84, 1991), chips (Fodor, Nature 364:555-556, 1993), bacteria or spores (U.S. Pat. No. 5,223,409), plasmids (Cull et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:1865-1869, 1992) or on phage (Scott and Smith, Science 249:386-390, 1990), or luciferase, and the enzymatic label detected by determination of conversion of an appropriate substrate to product.

Once a polypeptide as described herein is identified, it can be isolated and purified by any number of standard methods including, but not limited to, differential solubility (e.g., precipitation), centrifugation, chromatography (e.g., affinity, ion exchange, and size exclusion), or by any other standard techniques used for the purification of peptides, peptidomimetics, or proteins. The functional properties of an identified polypeptide of interest may be evaluated using any functional assay known in the art. Desirably, assays for evaluating downstream receptor function in intracellular signaling are used (e.g., cell proliferation).

For example, the peptidomimetics compounds of the present invention may be obtained using the following three-phase process: (1) scanning the polypeptides described herein to identify regions of secondary structure necessary for targeting the particular cell types described herein; (2) using conformationally constrained dipeptide surrogates to refine the backbone geometry and provide organic platforms corresponding to these surrogates; and (3) using the best organic platforms to display organic pharmocophores in libraries of candidates designed to mimic the desired activity of the native polypeptide. In more detail the three phases are as follows. In phase 1, the lead candidate polypeptides are scanned and their structure abridged to identify the requirements for their activity. A series of polypeptide analogs of the original are synthesized. In phase 2, the best polypeptide analogs are investigated using the conformationally constrained dipeptide surrogates. Indolizidin-2-one, indolizidin-9-one and quinolizidinone amino acids (I²aa, I⁹aa and Qaa respectively) are used as platforms for studying backbone geometry of the best peptide candidates. These and related platforms (reviewed in Halab et al., Biopolymers 55:101-122, 2000 and Hanessian et al., Tetrahedron 53:12789-12854, 1997) may be introduced at specific regions of the polypeptide to orient the pharmacophores in different directions. Biological evaluation of these analogs identifies improved lead polypeptides that mimic the geometric requirements for activity. In phase 3, the platforms from the most active lead polypeptides are used to display organic surrogates of the pharmacophores responsible for activity of the native peptide. The pharmacophores and scaffolds are combined in a parallel synthesis format. Derivation of polypeptides and the above phases can be accomplished by other means using methods known in the art.

Structure function relationships determined from the polypeptides, polypeptide derivatives, peptidomimetics or other small molecules described herein may be used to refine and prepare analogous molecular structures having similar or better properties. Accordingly, the compounds of the present invention also include molecules that share the structure, polarity, charge characteristics and side chain properties of the polypeptides described herein.

In summary, based on the disclosure herein, those skilled in the art can develop peptides and peptidomimetics screening assays which are useful for identifying compounds for targeting an agent to particular cell types (e.g., those described herein). The assays of this invention may be developed for low-throughput, high-throughput, or ultra-high throughput screening formats. Assays of the present invention include assays amenable to automation.

Diseases and Conditions

The compounds of the invention can be used to treat a variety of diseases and conditions. Because the compounds of the invention are able to cross the BBB or enter particular cell types, treatments of neurological disorders, including neurodegenerative diseases and cancer, can be enhanced using the multimers of the invention.

Cancer Therapy

Compounds of the invention including anticancer agents may be used to treat any brain or central nervous system disease (e.g., a brain cancer such as glioblastoma, astrocytoma, glioma, meduloblastoma, and oligodendroma, neuroglioma, ependymoma, and meningioma). Compounds that are efficiently transported to the liver, lung, kidney, spleen or muscle (e.g., AngioPep-1 through AngioPep-7) and therefore may also be used, in conjunction with an appropriate therapeutic agent, to treat a disease associated with these tissues (e.g., a cancer such as hepatocellular carcinoma, liver cancer, small cell carcinoma (e.g., oat cell cancer), mixed small cell/large cell carcinoma, combined small cell carcinoma, and metastatic tumors. Metastatic tumors can originate from cancer of any tissue, including breast cancer, colon cancer, prostate cancer, sarcoma, bladder cancer, neuroblastoma, Wilm's tumor, lymphoma, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, and certain T-cell lymphomas). Additional exemplary cancers that may be treated using a composition of the invention include hepatocellular carcinoma, breast cancer, cancers of the head and neck including various lymphomas such as mantle cell lymphoma, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, adenoma, squamous cell carcinoma, laryngeal carcinoma, cancers of the retina, cancers of the esophagus, multiple myeloma, ovarian cancer, uterine cancer, melanoma, colorectal cancer, bladder cancer, prostate cancer, lung cancer (including non-small cell lung carcinoma), pancreatic cancer, cervical cancer, head and neck cancer, skin cancers, nasopharyngeal carcinoma, liposarcoma, epithelial carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma, gallbladder adenocarcinoma, parotid adenocarcinoma, endometrial sarcoma, multidrug resistant cancers; and proliferative diseases and conditions, such as neovascularization associated with tumor angiogenesis, macular degeneration (e.g., wet/dry AMD), corneal neovascularization, diabetic retinopathy, neovascular glaucoma, myopic degeneration and other proliferative diseases and conditions such as restenosis and polycystic kidney disease. Brain cancers that may be treated with vector that is transported efficiently across the BBB include astrocytoma, pilocytic astrocytoma, dysembryoplastic neuroepithelial tumor, oligodendrogliomas, ependymoma, glioblastoma multiforme, mixed gliomas, oligoastrocytomas, medulloblastoma, retinoblastoma, neuroblastoma, germinoma, and teratoma.

GLP-1-Based Therapy

The compounds of the invention including a GLP-1 agoinst can be used in any therapeutic application where a GLP-1 agonist activity in the brain, or in a particular tissues, is desired. GLP-1 agonist activity is associated with stimulation of insulin secretion (i.e., to act as an incretin hormone) and inhibition glucagon secretion, thereby contributing to limit postprandial glucose excursions. GLP-1 agonists can also inhibit gastrointestinal motility and secretion, thus acting as an enterogastrone and part of the “ileal brake” mechanism. GLP-1 also appears to be a physiological regulator of appetite and food intake. Because of these actions, GLP-1 and GLP-1 receptor agonists can be used for therapy of metabolic disorders, as reviewed in, e.g., Kinzig et al., J Neurosci 23:6163-6170, 2003. Such disorders include obesity, hyperglycemia, dyslipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, syndrome X, insulin resistance, IGT, diabetic dyslipidemia, hyperlipidemia, a cardiovascular disease, and hypertension.

GLP-1 is also has neurological effects including sedative or anti-anxiolytic effects, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,846,937. Thus, GLP-1 agonists can be used in the treatment of anxiety, aggression, psychosis, seizures, panic attacks, hysteria, or sleep disorders. GLP-1 agonists can also be used to treat Alzheimer's disease, as GLP-1 agonists have been shown to protect neurons against amyloid-β peptide and glutamate-induced apoptosis (Perry et al., Curr Alzheimer Res 2:377-85, 2005).

Other therapeutic uses for GLP-1 agonists include improving learning, enhancing neuroprotection, and alleviating a symptom of a disease or disorder of the central nervous system, e.g., through modulation of neurogenesis, and e.g., Parkinson's Disease, Alzheimer's Disease, Huntington's Disease, ALS, stroke, ADD, and neuropsychiatric syndromes (U.S. Pat. No. 6,969,702 and U.S. Patent Application No. 2002/0115605). Stimulation of neurogenesis using GLP-1 agonists has been described, for example, in Bertilsson et al., J Neurosci Res 86:326-338, 2008.

Still other therapeutic uses include converting liver stem/progenitor cells into functional pancreatic cells (U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2005/0053588); preventing beta-cell deterioration (U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,259,233 and 6,569,832) and stimulation of beta-cell proliferation (U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2003/0224983); treating obesity (U.S. Pat. No. 7,211,557); suppressing appetite and inducing satiety (U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2003/0232754); treating irritable bowel syndrome (U.S. Pat. No. 6,348,447); reducing the morbidity and/or mortality associated with myocardial infarction (U.S. Pat. No. 6,747,006) and stroke (PCT Publication No. WO 00/16797); treating acute coronary syndrome characterized by an absence of Q-wave myocardial infarction (U.S. Pat. No. 7,056,887); attenuating post-surgical catabolic changes (U.S. Pat. No. 6,006,753); treating hibernating myocardium or diabetic cardiomyopathy (U.S. Pat. No. 6,894,024); suppressing plasma blood levels of norepinepherine (U.S. Pat. No. 6,894,024); increasing urinary sodium excretion, decreasing urinary potassium concentration (U.S. Pat. No. 6,703,359); treating conditions or disorders associated with toxic hypervolemia, e.g., renal failure, congestive heart failure, nephrotic syndrome, cirrhosis, pulmonary edema, and hypertension (U.S. Pat. No. 6,703,359); inducing an inotropic response and increasing cardiac contractility (U.S. Pat. No. 6,703,359); treating polycystic ovary syndrome (U.S. Pat. No. 7,105,489); treating respiratory distress (U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2004/0235726); improving nutrition via a non-alimentary route, i.e., via intravenous, subcutaneous, intramuscular, peritoneal, or other injection or infusion (U.S. Pat. No. 6,852,690); treating nephropathy (U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2004/0209803); treating left ventricular systolic dysfunction, e.g., with abnormal left ventricular ejection fraction (U.S. Pat. No. 7,192,922); inhibiting antro-duodenal motility, e.g., for the treatment or prevention of gastrointestinal disorders such as diarrhea, postoperative dumping syndrome and irritable bowel syndrome, and as premedication in endoscopic procedures (U.S. Pat. No. 6,579,851); treating critical illness polyneuropathy (CIPN) and systemic inflammatory response syndrome (SIRS) (U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2003/0199445); modulating triglyceride levels and treating dyslipidemia (U.S. Patent Application Publication Nos. 2003/0036504 and 2003/0143183); treating organ tissue injury caused by reperfusion of blood flow following ischemia (U.S. Pat. No. 6,284,725); treating coronary heart disease risk factor (CHDRF) syndrome (U.S. Pat. No. 6,528,520); and others.

Leptin-Based Therapy

Compounds of the invention that include leptin or a related molecule can be used to treat metabolic disorders, neurological diseases, as well as other indications.

In certain embodiments, the compound of the invention is used to treat a metabolic disorder. Such disorders include diabetes (type I or type II), obesity, hyperglycemia, dyslipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, syndrome X, insulin resistance, IGT, diabetic dyslipidemia, hyperlipidemia, a cardiovascular disease, and hypertension. Leptin decreases food intake and thus can be used to reduce weight and to treat diseases where reduced food intake or weight loss is beneficial.

Because peptide vectors described herein are capable of transporting an agent across the BBB, the compounds of the invention are also useful for the treatment of neurological diseases such as neurodegenerative diseases or other conditions of the central nervous system (CNS), the peripheral nervous system, or the autonomous nervous system (e.g., where neurons are lost or deteriorate). Many neurodegenerative diseases are characterized by ataxia (i.e., uncoordinated muscle movements) and/or memory loss. Neurodegenerative diseases include Alexander disease, Alper disease, Alzheimer's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS; i.e., Lou Gehrig's disease), ataxia telangiectasia, Batten disease (Spielmeyer-Vogt-Sjogren-Batten disease), bovine spongiform encephalopathy (BSE), Canavan disease, Cockayne syndrome, corticobasal degeneration, Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease, Huntington's disease, HIV-associated dementia, Kennedy's disease, Krabbé disease, Lewy body dementia, Machado-Joseph disease (Spinocerebellar ataxia type 3), multiple sclerosis, multiple system atrophy, narcolepsy, neuroborreliosis, Parkinson's disease, Pelizaeus-Merzbacher disease, Pick's disease, primary lateral sclerosis, prion diseases, Refsum's disease, Schilder's disease (i.e., adrenoleukodystrophy), schizophrenia, spinocerebellar ataxia, spinal muscular atrophy, Steele-Richardson, Olszewski disease, and tabes dorsalis.

The compounds of the invention can also be used to treat diseases found in other organs or tissues. For example, Angiopep-7 (SEQ ID NO:112) is efficiently transported into liver, lung, kidney, spleen, and muscle cells, allowing for the preferential treatment of diseases associated with these tissues (e.g., hepatocellular carcinoma and lung cancer). The compounds of the presents invention may also be used to treat genetic disorders, such as Down syndrome (i.e., trisomy 21), where down-regulation of particular gene transcripts may be useful.

Neurotensin-based Therapies

The compounds of the invention can be used in any appropriate therapeutic application where the activity of neurotensin activity is beneficial. In brain, NT is associated with dopaminergic receptors and other neurotransmitter systems. Peripheral NT acts as a paracrine and endocrine peptide on both the digestive and cardiovascular systems. Various therapeutic applications have been suggested for neurotensin, including psychiatric disorders, metabolic disorder, and pain. Because neurotensin has been shown to modulate neurotransmission in areas of the brain associated with schizophrenia, neurotensin and neurotensin receptor agonists have been proposed as antipsychotic agents.

Because polypeptides described herein are capable of transporting an agent across the BBB, the compounds of the invention are also useful for the treatment of neurological diseases such as neurodegenerative diseases or other conditions of the central nervous system (CNS), the peripheral nervous system, or the autonomous nervous system (e.g., where neurons are lost or deteriorate). Neurotensin has been suggested an antipsychotic therapy, and thus may be useful in the treatment of diseases such as schizophrenia and bipolar disorder. Many neurodegenerative diseases are characterized by ataxia (i.e., uncoordinated muscle movements) and/or memory loss. Neurodegenerative diseases include Alexander disease, Alper disease, Alzheimer's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS; i.e., Lou Gehrig's disease), ataxia telangiectasia, Batten disease (Spielmeyer-Vogt-Sjogren-Batten disease), bovine spongiform encephalopathy (BSE), Canavan disease, Cockayne syndrome, corticobasal degeneration, Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease, Huntington's disease, HIV-associated dementia, Kennedy's disease, Krabbé disease, Lewy body dementia, Machado-Joseph disease (Spinocerebellar ataxia type 3), multiple sclerosis, multiple system atrophy, narcolepsy, neuroborreliosis, Parkinson's disease, Pelizaeus-Merzbacher disease, Pick's disease, primary lateral sclerosis, prion diseases, Refsum's disease, Schilder's disease (i.e., adrenoleukodystrophy), schizophrenia, spinocerebellar ataxia, spinal muscular atrophy, Steele-Richardson, Olszewski disease, and tabes dorsalis.

The compounds of the invention may be used to reduce the body temperature of a subject. Because reduction in body temperature has been shown to be beneficial in subjects who may be suffering from, or may have recently suffered from, a stroke, cerebral ischemia, cardiac ischemia, or a nerve injury such as a spinal cord injury, such a treatment would therefore be useful in reducing complications of these conditions.

Neurotensin is also known to have analgesic effects. Thus the compounds of the invention may be used to reduce pain in a subject. The subject may be suffering from an acute pain (e.g., selected from the group consisting of mechanical pain, heat pain, cold pain, ischemic pain, and chemical-induced pain). Other types of pain include peripheral or central neuropathic pain, inflammatory pain, migraine-related pain, headache-related pain, irritable bowel syndrome-related pain, fibromyalgia-related pain, arthritic pain, skeletal pain, joint pain, gastrointestinal pain, muscle pain, angina pain, facial pain, pelvic pain, claudication, postoperative pain, post traumatic pain, tension-type headache, obstetric pain, gynecological pain, or chemotherapy-induced pain.

There is evidence that neurotensin can be used to treat metabolic disorders; see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application No. 2001/0046956. Thus the compounds of the invention may be used to treat such disorders. The metabolic disorder may be diabetes (e.g., Type I or Type II), obesity, diabetes as a consequence of obesity, hyperglycemia, dyslipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, syndrome X, insulin resistance, impaired glucose tolerance (IGT), diabetic dyslipidemia, hyperlipidemia, a cardiovascular disease, or hypertension. The subject may be overweight, obese, or bulimic.

Neurotensin has also been suggested to be able to treat drug addiction or reduce drug abuse in subjects, particularly with psychostimulant. Thus the compounds of the invention may be useful in treating addiction to or abuse of drugs such as amphetamine, methamphetamine, 3,4-methylenedioxymethamphetamine, nicotine, cocaine, methylphenidate, and arecoline.

GDNF/BDNF-based Therapy

GDNF and BDNF-based compounds may be used to treat any disease or condition where enhancing neuronal survival (e.g., decreasing neuronal death rate) or increasing the rate of neuronal formation is beneficial. Such conditions include neurodegenerative disorders, e.g., a disorder selected from the group consisting of a polyglutamine expansion disorder (e.g., Huntington's disease (HD), dentatorubropallidoluysian atrophy, Kennedy's disease (also referred to as spinobulbar muscular atrophy), and spinocerebellar ataxia (e.g., type 1, type 2, type 3 (also referred to as Machado-Joseph disease), type 6, type 7, and type 17)), another trinucleotide repeat expansion disorder (e.g., fragile X syndrome, fragile XE mental retardation, Friedreich's ataxia, myotonic dystrophy, spinocerebellar ataxia type 8, and spinocerebellar ataxia type 12), Alexander disease, Alper's disease, Alzheimer's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), ataxia telangiectasia, Batten disease (also referred to as Spielmeyer-Vogt-Sjogren-Batten disease), Canavan disease, Cockayne syndrome, corticobasal degeneration, Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease, ischemia stroke, Krabbe disease, Lewy body dementia, multiple sclerosis, multiple system atrophy, Parkinson's disease, Pelizaeus-Merzbacher disease, Pick's disease, primary lateral sclerosis, Refsum's disease, Sandhoff disease, Schilder's disease, spinal cord injury, spinal muscular atrophy, Steele-Richardson-Olszewski disease, and Tabes dorsalis. Other conditions include injury (e.g., spinal cord injury), concussion, ischemic stroke, and hemorrhagic stroke.

Administration and Dosage

The present invention also features pharmaceutical compositions that contain a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention. The composition can be formulated for use in a variety of drug delivery systems. One or more physiologically acceptable excipients or carriers can also be included in the composition for proper formulation. Suitable formulations for use in the present invention are found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Company, Philadelphia, Pa., 17th ed., 1985. For a brief review of methods for drug delivery, see, e.g., Langer (Science 249:1527-1533, 1990).

The pharmaceutical compositions are intended for parenteral, intranasal, topical, oral, or local administration, such as by a transdermal means, for prophylactic and/or therapeutic treatment. The pharmaceutical compositions can be administered parenterally (e.g., by intravenous, intramuscular, or subcutaneous injection), or by oral ingestion, or by topical application or intraarticular injection at areas affected by the vascular or cancer condition. Additional routes of administration include intravascular, intra-arterial, intratumor, intraperitoneal, intraventricular, intraepidural, as well as nasal, ophthalmic, intrascleral, intraorbital, rectal, topical, or aerosol inhalation administration. Sustained release administration is also specifically included in the invention, by such means as depot injections or erodible implants or components. Thus, the invention provides compositions for parenteral administration that include the above mention agents dissolved or suspended in an acceptable carrier, preferably an aqueous carrier, e.g., water, buffered water, saline, PBS, and the like. The compositions may contain pharmaceutically acceptable auxiliary substances as required to approximate physiological conditions, such as pH adjusting and buffering agents, tonicity adjusting agents, wetting agents, detergents and the like. The invention also provides compositions for oral delivery, which may contain inert ingredients such as binders or fillers for the formulation of a tablet, a capsule, and the like. Furthermore, this invention provides compositions for local administration, which may contain inert ingredients such as solvents or emulsifiers for the formulation of a cream, an ointment, and the like.

These compositions may be sterilized by conventional sterilization techniques, or may be sterile filtered. The resulting aqueous solutions may be packaged for use as is, or lyophilized, the lyophilized preparation being combined with a sterile aqueous carrier prior to administration. The pH of the preparations typically will be between 3 and 11, more preferably between 5 and 9 or between 6 and 8, and most preferably between 7 and 8, such as 7 to 7.5. The resulting compositions in solid form may be packaged in multiple single dose units, each containing a fixed amount of the above-mentioned agent or agents, such as in a sealed package of tablets or capsules. The composition in solid form can also be packaged in a container for a flexible quantity, such as in a squeezable tube designed for a topically applicable cream or ointment.

The compositions containing an effective amount can be administered for prophylactic or therapeutic treatments. In prophylactic applications, compositions can be administered to a subject with a clinically determined predisposition or increased susceptibility to a neurological or neurodegenerative disease. Compositions of the invention can be administered to the subject (e.g., a human) in an amount sufficient to delay, reduce, or preferably prevent the onset of clinical disease. In therapeutic applications, compositions are administered to a subject (e.g., a human) already suffering from disease (e.g., a neurological condition or neurodegenerative disease) in an amount sufficient to cure or at least partially arrest the symptoms of the condition and its complications. An amount adequate to accomplish this purpose is defined as a “therapeutically effective amount,” an amount of a compound sufficient to substantially improve some symptom associated with a disease or a medical condition. For example, in the treatment of a neurodegenerative disease (e.g., those described herein), an agent or compound that decreases, prevents, delays, suppresses, or arrests any symptom of the disease or condition would be therapeutically effective. A therapeutically effective amount of an agent or compound is not required to cure a disease or condition but will provide a treatment for a disease or condition such that the onset of the disease or condition is delayed, hindered, or prevented, or the disease or condition symptoms are ameliorated, or the term of the disease or condition is changed or, for example, is less severe or recovery is accelerated in an individual.

Amounts effective for this use may depend on the severity of the disease or condition and the weight and general state of the subject, but generally range from about 0.05 μg to about 1000 μg (e.g., 0.5-100 μg) of an equivalent amount of the agent per dose per subject. Suitable regimes for initial administration and booster administrations are typified by an initial administration followed by repeated doses at one or more hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly intervals by a subsequent administration. The total effective amount of an agent present in the compositions of the invention can be administered to a mammal as a single dose, either as a bolus or by infusion over a relatively short period of time, or can be administered using a fractionated treatment protocol, in which multiple doses are administered over a more prolonged period of time (e.g., a dose every 4-6, 8-12, 14-16, or 18-24 hours, or every 2-4 days, 1-2 weeks, once a month). Alternatively, continuous intravenous infusion sufficient to maintain therapeutically effective concentrations in the blood are contemplated.

The therapeutically effective amount of one or more agents present within the compositions of the invention and used in the methods of this invention applied to mammals (e.g., humans) can be determined by the ordinarily-skilled artisan with consideration of individual differences in age, weight, and the condition of the mammal. Because certain compounds of the invention exhibit an enhanced ability to cross the BBB, the dosage of the compounds of the invention can be lower than (e.g., less than or equal to about 90%, 75%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 15%, 12%, 10%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.5%, or 0.1% of) the equivalent dose of required for a therapeutic effect of the unconjugated agonist. The agents of the invention are administered to a subject (e.g. a mammal, such as a human) in an effective amount, which is an amount that produces a desirable result in a treated subject (e.g., preservation of neurons, new neuronal growth). Therapeutically effective amounts can also be determined empirically by those of skill in the art.

The subject may also receive an agent in the range of about 0.05 to 1,000 μg equivalent dose as compared to unconjugated agent per dose one or more times per week (e.g., 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7 or more times per week), 0.1 to 2,500 (e.g., 2,000, 1,500, 1,000, 500, 100, 10, 1, 0.5, or 0.1) μg dose per week. A subject may also receive an agent of the composition in the range of 0.1 to 3,000 μg per dose once every two or three weeks.

Single or multiple administrations of the compositions of the invention including an effective amount can be carried out with dose levels and pattern being selected by the treating physician. The dose and administration schedule can be determined and adjusted based on the severity of the disease or condition in the subject, which may be monitored throughout the course of treatment according to the methods commonly practiced by clinicians or those described herein.

The compounds of the present invention may be used in combination with either conventional methods of treatment or therapy or may be used separately from conventional methods of treatment or therapy.

When the compounds of this invention are administered in combination therapies with other agents, they may be administered sequentially or concurrently to an individual. Alternatively, pharmaceutical compositions according to the present invention may be comprised of a combination of a compound of the present invention in association with a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, as described herein, and another therapeutic or prophylactic agent known in the art.

EXAMPLE 1 Synthesis of Dimeric Angiopep-2 Using a TMEA Linker

The following scheme was used produce a dimeric form of Angiopep-2 joined by a TMEA linker.

C-terminally amidated Angiopep-2 with an additional C-terminal cysteine (Angiopep-2-Cys; SEQ ID NO:114) (264.2 mg, 109.9 umol, 2.4 eq.) was dissolved in urea 8 M (18 ml). This solution was added dropwise to a solution of TMEA (tris-(2-maleimidoethyl)amine) (Pierce Biotechnology) (17.7 mg, 45.8 umol, 1 eq. in 9 ml of urea 8 M). Monitoring of the reaction was done using the analytical methods 1 and 2 (which are described in chromatograms 1-2 of FIG. 1). The reaction (1.7 mM, pH 8.53) allowed to proceed at room temperature for 1 hour, and the mixture was purified by RP-HPLC chromatography (Waters PrepLC 4000; see chromatogram 3, Table 5).

TABLE 5
Purification

	Column	Flow Rate
Time (min)	Volume (C.V.)	(ml/min)	% Solvent B

0.00	0.00	13.00	20.0
5.12	1.52	13.00	20.0
28.75	7.01	13.00	40.0 (over 23.63 min)
33.30	1.35	13.00	95.0 (over 4.6 min)
38.00	1.39	13.00	95.0
1 CV = 43 ml

After coupling, ESI-TOF MS analysis showed the presence of TMEA cross-linked monomer, dimer, and trimer in solution. After evaporation of methanol and lyophilization, the dimer TMEA-(AN2)₂ was obtained as a pure white solid (119 mg, 50%, purity>98%). The mass was checked by ESI-TOF MS (Bruker Daltonics).

In addition to the information in FIG. 1, the following apparatus was used in the analytic methods. A Waters Acquity HPLC Column BEH phenyl, 1.7 μm, 2.1×50 mm was used. Detection was performed at 229 nm. Solution A was 0.1% FA in H₂O; Solution B was 0.1% FA in MeOH. A flow rate of 0.5 ml/min was used. The gradient settings are shown in Table 6 below.

TABLE 6
Time	Flow		Method	1	Method 2

(min)	(mL/min)	Curve	% A	% B	% A	% B

	0.5		90	10	80	20
0.40	0.5	6	90	10	80	20
0.70	0.5	6	70	30	50	50
2.20	0.5	6	30	70	15	85
2.40	0.5	6	10	90	5	95
2.70	0.5	6	10	90	5	95
2.80	0.5	6	90	10	80	20
2.81	0.5	6	90	10	80	20

Using ESI-TOF MS (Bruker Daltonics) the following m/z values were calculated and identified: calculated 5193.62. found 5193.68, m/z 866.62 (+6), 1039.74 (+5), 1299.42 (+4), 1732.21 (+3).

Purification was performed as follows, using a Waters PrepLC 4000 with a Phenyl OBD column (Waters X-Bridge) 5 μm, 19×150 mm, 135 Å, Sample load: 282 mg, Urea 8 M (27 ml), 20% MeOH in H₂O (2 ml), FA, Solution A was 0.1% FA in H₂O, Solution B was 0.1% FA in MeOH A flow rate of 13 ml/min was employed with a gradient: 20-40% B. Purification of the crude was performed in 2 batches successively.

Possible side reactions include hydrolysis of TMEA-(AN2)₂ (≦5%, Mw=5211.63) might occur. Conjugate is then stored under nitrogen atmosphere, below −20° C.

EXAMPLE 2 Synthesis of Dimeric Angiopep-2

The following synthetic scheme was used to produce dimeric Angiopep-2 having an SATP linker.

Angiopep-2-Cys-NH₂ (H-TFFYGGSRGKRNNFKTEEYC-NH₂; SEQ ID NO:114) was synthesized using solid phase peptide synthesis (SPPS). G⁶S⁷ is coupled using pseudoproline dipeptide GS to optimize the synthesis. SPPS was carried out on a Protein Technologies, Inc. Symphony® peptide synthesizer using Fmoc (9-fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl)amino-terminus protection. Angiopep-2-Cys-NH₂ (H-TFFYGGSRGKRNNFKTEECY-NH₂; SEQ ID NO:114) was synthesized on a 100-μmol scale using a 5-fold excess of Fmoc-amino acids (200 mM) relative to the resin. Coupling was performed from a Rink amide MBHA resin (with Nle) (0.40 mmol/g) for carboxyl-terminus amides using 1:1:2 amino acid/activator/NMM in DMF with HCTU (2-(1H-6-chlorobenzotriazol-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate) and NMM (N-methylmorpholine). Deprotection was carried out using 20% piperidine/DMF.

Rink amide MBHA resin (with Nle) (0.40 mmol/g), Fmoc-amino acids and HCTU were purchased from ChemImpex, and the pseudoproline dipeptide GS was purchased from Novabiochem. Side protecting groups for amino acids were trityl (Trt) for cysteine and aspargine, (tBu) for glutamic acid, tyrosine, serine, and threonine, pentamethyldihydrobenzofuran-5-sulfonyl (Pbf) for arginine, and tButyloxycarbonyl (tBoc) for lysine.

The SATP-AN2Cys-NH₂ was generated as follows. After deprotection of the last threonine residue, N-terminal S-acetylthiopropionic acyl groups were introduced by treating the free N-terminal amino peptide bound to the resin with a solution of SATP (N-succinimidyl S-acetylthiopropionate) (Pierce Biotechnology) (24.5 mg, 100 μmol, 1 eq. in 4 ml of DMF, 25 mM) for one hour at room temperature. The modification with SATP solution was repeated once for 1 h 30. Cleavage of the resin-bound product was carried out using TFA/water/EDT/TES (94/2.5/2.5/1) for two hours at room temperature. The crude modified peptide was precipitated using ice-cold ether and purified by RP-HPLC chromatography (Waters PrepLC 4000, See chromatograms 1-3 in FIGS. 1 and 2, Table 9).

Methanol was evaporated from the collected fractions and lyophilized to give SATP-AN2Cys-NH₂ as a pure white solid (736 mg, 26%, purity>95%). The mass was confirmed by ESI-TOF MS (Bruker Daltonics): calculated 2533.79. found 2533.18, m/z 1267.59 (+2), 845.41 (+3).

Dimeric SATP-AN2-AN2 was produced as follows. MPA-AN2, AN2 vector activated by BMPS(N-[β-Maleimidopropyloxy]succinimide ester), (120 mg, 39.4 umol, 1 eq., 80.25% peptide content) was dissolved in DMSO (2 ml). This solution was added to a solution of SATP-AN2-CysNH2 (100 mg, 39.4 μmol, 1 eq. in 2.5 ml of DMSO). Monitoring of the reaction was done with the analytical methods 1 and 2 (See chromatograms 4-5 in FIG. 3). The reaction (8.8 mM) allowed to proceed at room temperature for 30 minutes and filtered. The mixture was purified by RP-HPLC chromatography (Waters PrepLC 4000, See chromatograms 4-6 in FIGS. 3 and 4 and Table 9).

After evaporation of methanol and lyophilization, the dimer SATP-AN2-AN2 was obtained as a pure white solid (39 mg, 20%, purity>98%). The mass was confirmed by ESI-TOF MS (Bruker Daltonics): calculated 4986.39. found 4986.42, m/z 1247.60 (+4), 998.08 (+5), 832.07 (+6), 713.35 (+7).

Analytical methods 1 and 2 were performed as follows. Both methods used a Waters Acquity HPLC system with a Waters Acquity HPLC BEH phenyl column (1.7 μm, 2.1×50 mm). Detection was performed at 229 nm. Solution A was 0.1% FA in H₂O: Solution B was 0.1% FA in MeOH, with a flow rate of 0.5 ml/min. Flow gradients are shown in the Tables 7 and 8 below for each method.

TABLE 7
Method 1

Time	Flow
(min)	(mL/min)	% A	% B	Curve
	0.5	90	10
0.40	0.5	90	10	6
0.70	0.5	70	30	6
2.20	0.5	30	70	6
2.40	0.5	10	90	6
2.70	0.5	10	90	6
2.80	0.5	90	10	6
2.81	0.5	90	10	6

TABLE 8
Method 2:

Time	Flow
(min)	(mL/min)	% A	% B	Curve
	0.5	80	20
0.40	0.5	80	20	6
3.00	0.5	60	40	6
3.30	0.5	5	95	6
3.80	0.5	5	95	6
4.00	0.5	80	20	6
4.20	0.5	80	20	6
4.21	0.5	80	20	6

Purification of SATP-AN2Cys-NH₂ was performed as follows using a Waters PrepLC 4000 with a Kromasil column (C18, 10 μm, 50×250 mm, 100 Å). Solution A was 0.1% FA in H₂O; Solution B was 0.1% FA in MeOH, with a flow rate of 48 ml/min and gradient of 20-45% B. Purification results are shown in Table 9.

TABLE 9
Purification of SATP-AN2-Cys-NH2

	Column	Flow Rate
Time (min)	Volume (C.V.)	(ml/min)	% Solvent B

0.00	0.00	48.19	20.0
18.08	19.80	48.19	20.0
26.91	9.67	48.19	35.0 (over 5.46 min)
109.26	90.19	48.19	45.0 (over 23.61 min)
130.00	22.72	48.19	95.0 (over 5.00 min)
154.00	26.29	48.19	95.0
1 CV = 44 ml

Purification of SATP-AN2-AN2 was performed as follows using a Waters PrepLC 4000 with a BEH phenyl column (5 um, 19×150 mm, 135 Å). Solution A was 0.1% FA in H₂O; Solution B was 0.1% FA in MeOH with a flow rate of 13 ml/min and a gradient of 35-50% B. Purification results are shown in Table 10.

TABLE 10
Purification of SATP-AN2-AN2

	Column	Flow Rate
Time (min)	Volume (C.V.)	(ml/min)	% Solvent B

0.00	0.00	13.00	35.0
5.12	1.51	13.00	35.0
28.75	6.98	13.00	50.0 (over 23.63 min)
33.30	1.34	13.00	95.0 (over 4.55 min)
40.00	1.98	13.00	95.0
1 C.V. = 44 ml

The conjugate was stored under nitrogen atmosphere, below −20° C.

EXAMPLE 3 Synthesis of an Angiopep-1 Dimer Using a Disulfide Bond

An Angiopep-1 dimer was prepared by incubating the Angiopep-1 peptide (SEQ ID NO:67) at 37° C. for 2 hours in phosphate buffered saline (PBS) at pH 8.5. This reaction resulted in formation of Angiopep-1 dimers joined by a disulfide bond through the cysteine amino acid on each protein (FIG. 5).

Volume of brain parenchymal distribution was measured using the in situ brain perfusion assay (FIG. 6). Great uptake volumes using the Angiopep-1 dimer were observed, especially at lower concentrations, as compared to monomeric Angiopep-2. Parenchymal uptake of the Angiopep-1 dimer and Angiopep-2 was also measured at various concentrations in situ (FIG. 7). Here, the Angiopep-1 dimer, especially at lower concentrations (<500 nmol), exhibited higher transport than the Angiopep-2 monomer.

EXAMPLE 4 Transport of Angiopep-2 Dimers and Trimers

Transport of Angiopep-2 (synthetic) as well as Angiopep-2 (recombinant) was compared to transport of Angiopep-2 dimers and Angiopep-2 trimers (e.g., prepared as described above) at 50 nM. Transport of recombinant Angiopep-2 into diet-induced obese mice (DIO) was also tested (FIG. 8). Transport of the dimers and trimers into brain was observed.

EXAMPLE 5 Generation of an Exendin-4-Angioep-2 Dimer Conjugate

Using the conjugation chemistry described herein or similar chemistry, an Exendin-4-Angiopep-2 dimer was generated having the structure shown in FIG. 9A. Briefly, the amine group in the C-terminal lysine of [Lys³⁹]Exendin-4 was conjugated to an Angiopep-2 dimer through an MHA linker at the N-terminal threonine of the first Angiopep-2 peptide. A N-succinimidyl-5-acetylthiopropionate (SATP) linker was attached to an Angiopep-2-Cys peptide at its N-terminus. Through this cysteine, the Angiopep-2-Cys peptide was conjugated to a second Angiopep-2 peptide, which had been modified to contain an MPA linker. The dimer was then linked to the [Lys³⁹]Exendin-4 through an MHA linker. A control molecule (Exen-S4) was also generated using a scrambed form of Angiopep-2 conjugated at its N-terminal to the cysteine of [Cys³²]Exendin-4 through an MHA linker (FIG. 9B). These conjugates were prepared as trifluoroacetate (TFA) salts.

EXAMPLE 6 Characterization of an Exendin-4-Angiopep-2 Dimer Conjugate

Brain uptake of the exemplary GLP-1 agonist, exendin-4, was measured in situ when unconjugated, conjugated to a single Angiopep-2 using variable linker lengths, conjugated to a scrambled Angiopep-2 (S4), or conjugated to a dimeric form of Angiopep-2. The experiments were performed as described in Example 2 above.

From these results, we observed that conjugation of the exendin-4 analog to the dimeric form of Angiopep-2 results in a conjugate with a surprisingly greater ability to cross the BBB as compared to either the unconjugated exendin-4 or to the exendin-4 conjugated to a single Angiopep-2 (FIG. 10).

We also tested the ability of the exendin-4-Angiopep-2 dimer conjugate to reduce glycemia in DIO mice. Mice were injected with a bolus containing a control, exendin-4, or the exendin-4-Angiopep-2 dimer conjugate. Mice receiving either exendin-4 or the conjugate exhibited reduced glycemia as compared to mice receiving the control (FIG. 11).

Other Embodiments

All patents, patent applications including U.S. Provisional Application Nos. 61/222,785, filed Jul. 2, 2009, and 61/252,024, filed Oct. 15, 2009, and publications mentioned in this specification are herein incorporated by reference to the same extent as if each independent patent, patent application, or publication was specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference.